davinci1.txt
8050 lines
| 361.3 KiB
| text/plain
|
TextLexer
Brian E Granger
|
r1337 | |||
The shadows of verdure are always somewhat blue, and so is every | ||||
shadow of every object; and they assume this hue more in proportion | ||||
as they are remote from the eye, and less in proportion as they are | ||||
nearer. The leaves which reflect the blue of the atmosphere always | ||||
present themselves to the eye edgewise. | ||||
OF THE ILLUMINATED PART OF VERDURE AND OF MOUNTAINS. | ||||
The illuminated portion, at a great distance, will appear most | ||||
nearly of its natural colour where the strongest light falls upon | ||||
it. | ||||
438. | ||||
OF TREES THAT ARE LIGHTED BY THE SUN AND BY THE ATMOSPHERE. | ||||
In trees that are illuminated [both] by the sun and the atmosphere | ||||
and that have leaves of a dark colour, one side will be illuminated | ||||
by the atmosphere [only] and in consequence of this light will tend | ||||
to blueness, while on the other side they will be illuminated by the | ||||
atmosphere and the sun; and the side which the eye sees illuminated | ||||
by the sun will reflect light. | ||||
439. | ||||
OF DEPICTING A FOREST SCENE. | ||||
The trees and plants which are most thickly branched with slender | ||||
branches ought to have less dark shadow than those trees and plants | ||||
which, having broader leaves, will cast more shadow. | ||||
440. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
In the position of the eye which sees that portion of a tree | ||||
illuminated which turns towards the light, one tree will never be | ||||
seen to be illuminated equally with the other. To prove this, let | ||||
the eye be _c_ which sees the two trees _b d_ which are illuminated | ||||
by the sun _a_; I say that this eye _c_ will not see the light in | ||||
the same proportion to the shade, in one tree as in the other. | ||||
Because, the tree which is nearest to the sun will display so much | ||||
the stronger shadow than the more distant one, in proportion as one | ||||
tree is nearer to the rays of the sun that converge to the eye than | ||||
the other; &c. | ||||
You see that the eye _c_ sees nothing of the tree _d_ but shadow, | ||||
while the same eye _c_ sees the tree _b_ half in light and half in | ||||
shade. | ||||
When a tree is seen from below, the eye sees the top of it as placed | ||||
within the circle made by its boughs[23]. | ||||
Remember, O Painter! that the variety of depth of shade in any one | ||||
particular species of tree is in proportion to the rarity or density | ||||
of their branches. | ||||
[Footnote: The two lower sketches on the left of Pl XXVIII, No. 3, | ||||
refer to lines 21-23. The upper sketch has apparently been effaced | ||||
by Leonardo himself.] | ||||
The distribution of light and shade with reference to the position | ||||
of the spectator (441-443). | ||||
441. | ||||
The shadows of trees placed in a landscape do not display themselves | ||||
in the same position in the trees on the right hand and those on the | ||||
left; still more so if the sun is to the right or left. As is proved | ||||
by the 4th which says: Opaque bodies placed between the light and | ||||
the eye display themselves entirely in shadow; and by the 5th: The | ||||
eye when placed between the opaque body and the light sees the | ||||
opaque body entirely illuminated. And by the 6th: When the eye and | ||||
the opaque body are placed between darkness and light, it will be | ||||
seen half in shadow and half in light. | ||||
[Footnote: See the figure on the right hand side of Pl. XXVIII, No. | ||||
3. The first five lines of the text are written below the diagram | ||||
and above it are the last eight lines of the text, given as No. | ||||
461.] | ||||
442. | ||||
OF THE HERBS OF THE FIELD. | ||||
Of the plants which take a shadow from the plants which spring among | ||||
them, those which are on this side [in front] of the shadow have the | ||||
stems lighted up on a background of shadow, and the plants on which | ||||
the shadows fall have their stems dark on a light background; that | ||||
is on the background beyond the shadow. | ||||
OF TREES WHICH ARE BETWEEN THE EYE AND THE LIGHT. | ||||
Of the trees which are between the eye and the light the part in | ||||
front will be light; but this light will be broken by the | ||||
ramifications of transparent leaves--being seen from the under | ||||
side--and lustrous leaves--being seen from the upper side; and the | ||||
background below and behind will be dark green, being in shadow from | ||||
the front portion of the said tree. This occurs in trees placed | ||||
above the eye. | ||||
443. | ||||
FROM WHENCE TO DEPICT A LANDSCAPE | ||||
Landscapes should be represented so that the trees may be half in | ||||
light and half in shadow; but it is better to do them when the sun | ||||
is covered with clouds, for then the trees are lighted by the | ||||
general light of the sky, and the general darkness of the earth. And | ||||
then they are darkest in certain parts in proportion as those parts | ||||
are nearest to the middle of the tree and to the earth. | ||||
The effects of morning light (444-448). | ||||
444. | ||||
OF TREES TO THE SOUTH. | ||||
When the sun is in the east the trees to the South and to the North | ||||
have almost as much light as shadow. But a greater share of light in | ||||
proportion as they lie to the West and a greater share of shadow in | ||||
proportion as they lie to the East. | ||||
OF MEADOWS. | ||||
If the sun is in the East the verdure of the meadows and of other | ||||
small plants is of a most beautiful green from being transparent to | ||||
the sun; this does not occur in the meadows to the West, and in | ||||
those to the South and North the grass is of a moderately brilliant | ||||
green. | ||||
445. | ||||
OF THE 4 POINTS OF THE COMPASS [IN LANDSCAPES]. | ||||
When the sun is in the East all the portions of plants lighted by it | ||||
are of a most lively verdure, and this happens because the leaves | ||||
lighted by the sun within the half of the horizon that is the | ||||
Eastern half, are transparent; and within the Western semicircle the | ||||
verdure is of a dull hue and the moist air is turbid and of the | ||||
colour of grey ashes, not being transparent like that in the East, | ||||
which is quite clear and all the more so in proportion as it is | ||||
moister. | ||||
The shadows of the trees to the East cover a large portion of them | ||||
and are darker in proportion as the foliage of the trees is thicker. | ||||
446. | ||||
OF TREES IN THE EAST. | ||||
When the sun is in the East the trees seen towards the East will | ||||
have the light which surrounds them all round their shadows, | ||||
excepting on the side towards the earth; unless the tree has been | ||||
pruned [below] in the past year. And the trees to the South and | ||||
North will be half in shade and half in light, and more or less in | ||||
shade or in light in proportion as they are more or less to the East | ||||
or to the West. | ||||
The [position of] the eye above or below varies the shadows and | ||||
lights in trees, inasmuch as the eye placed above sees the tree with | ||||
the little shadow, and the eye placed below with a great deal of | ||||
shadow. | ||||
The colour of the green in plants varies as much as their species. | ||||
447. | ||||
OF THE SHADOWS IN TREES. | ||||
The sun being in the East [to the right], the trees to the West [or | ||||
left] of the eye will show in small relief and almost imperceptible | ||||
gradations, because the atmosphere which lies between the eye and | ||||
those trees is very dense [Footnote 7: _per la 7a di questo_. This | ||||
possibly referred to something written on the seventh page of this | ||||
note book marked _G_. Unfortunately it has been cut out and lost.], | ||||
see the 7th of this--and they have no shade; for though a shadow | ||||
exists in every detail of the ramification, it results that the | ||||
images of the shade and light that reach the eye are confused and | ||||
mingled together and cannot be perceived on account of their | ||||
minuteness. And the principal lights are in the middle of the trees, | ||||
and the shadows to wards the edges; and their separation is shown by | ||||
the shadows of the intervals between the trees; but when the forests | ||||
are thick with trees the thin edges are but little seen. | ||||
448. | ||||
OF TREES TO THE EAST. | ||||
When the sun is in the East the trees are darker towards the middle | ||||
while their edges are light. | ||||
The effects of midday light. | ||||
449. | ||||
OBJECTS IN HIGH LIGHT SHOW BUT LITTLE, BUT BETWEEN LIGHT AND SHADOW | ||||
THEY STAND OUT WELL. | ||||
To represent a landscape choose that the sun shall be at noon and | ||||
look towards the West or East and then draw. And if you turn towards | ||||
the North, every object placed on that side will have no shadow, | ||||
particularly those which are nearest to the [direction of the] | ||||
shadow of your head. And if you turn towards the South every object | ||||
on that side will be wholly in shadow. All the trees which are | ||||
towards the sun and have the atmosphere for their background are | ||||
dark, and the other trees which lie against that darkness will be | ||||
black [very dark] in the middle and lighter towards the edges. | ||||
The appearance of trees in the distance (450. 451). | ||||
450. | ||||
OF THE SPACES [SHOWING THE SKY] IN TREES THEMSELVES. | ||||
The spaces between the parts in the mass of trees, and the spaces | ||||
between the trees in the air, are, at great distances, invisible to | ||||
the eye; for, where it is an effort [even] to see the whole it is | ||||
most difficult to discern the parts.--But a confused mixture is the | ||||
result, partaking chiefly of the [hue] which predominates. The | ||||
spaces between the leaves consist of particles of illuminated air | ||||
which are very much smaller than the tree and are lost sight of | ||||
sooner than the tree; but it does not therefore follow that they are | ||||
not there. Hence, necessarily, a compounded [effect] is produced of | ||||
the sky and of the shadows of the tree in shade, which both together | ||||
strike the eye which sees them. | ||||
OF TREES WHICH CONCEAL THESE SPACES IN ONE ANOTHER. | ||||
That part of a tree will show the fewest spaces, behind which a | ||||
large number of trees are standing between the tree and the air | ||||
[sky]; thus in the tree _a_ the spaces are not concealed nor in _b_, | ||||
as there is no tree behind. But in _c_ only half shows the spaces | ||||
filled up by the tree _d_, and part of the tree _d_ is filled up by | ||||
the tree _e_ and a little farther on all the spaces in the mass of | ||||
the trees are lost, and only that at the side remains. | ||||
451. | ||||
OF TREES. | ||||
What outlines are seen in trees at a distance against the sky which | ||||
serves as their background? | ||||
The outlines of the ramification of trees, where they lie against | ||||
the illuminated sky, display a form which more nearly approaches the | ||||
spherical on proportion as they are remote, and the nearer they are | ||||
the less they appear in this spherical form; as in the first tree | ||||
_a_ which, being near to the eye, displays the true form of its | ||||
ramification; but this shows less in _b_ and is altogether lost in | ||||
_c_, where not merely the branches of the tree cannot be seen but | ||||
the whole tree is distinguished with difficulty. Every object in | ||||
shadow, of whatever form it may be, at a great distance appears to | ||||
be spherical. And this occurs because, if it is a square body, at a | ||||
very short distance it loses its angles, and a little farther off it | ||||
loses still more of its smaller sides which remain. And thus before | ||||
the whole is lost [to sight] the parts are lost, being smaller than | ||||
the whole; as a man, who in such a distant position loses his legs, | ||||
arms and head before [the mass of] his body, then the outlines of | ||||
length are lost before those of breadth, and where they have become | ||||
equal it would be a square if the angles remained; but as they are | ||||
lost it is round. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketch No. 4, Pl. XXVIII, belongs to this passage.] | ||||
The cast shadow of trees (452. 453). | ||||
452. | ||||
The image of the shadow of any object of uniform breadth can never | ||||
be [exactly] the same as that of the body which casts it. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXVIII, No. 5.] | ||||
Light and shade on groups of trees (453-457). | ||||
453. | ||||
All trees seen against the sun are dark towards the middle and this | ||||
shadow will be of the shape of the tree when apart from others. | ||||
The shadows cast by trees on which the sun shines are as dark as | ||||
those of the middle of the tree. | ||||
The shadow cast by a tree is never less than the mass of the tree | ||||
but becomes taller in proportion as the spot on which it falls, | ||||
slopes towards the centre of the world. | ||||
The shadow will be densest in the middle of the tree when the tree | ||||
has the fewest branches. | ||||
[Footnote: The three diagrams which accompany this text are placed, | ||||
in the original, before lines 7-11. At the spots marked _B_ Leonardo | ||||
wrote _Albero_ (tree). At _A_ is the word _Sole_ (sun), at _C Monte_ | ||||
(mountain) at _D piano_ (plain) and at _E cima_ (summit).] | ||||
Every branch participates of the central shadow of every other | ||||
branch and consequently [of that] of the whole tree. | ||||
The form of any shadow from a branch or tree is circumscribed by the | ||||
light which falls from the side whence the light comes; and this | ||||
illumination gives the shape of the shadow, and this may be of the | ||||
distance of a mile from the side where the sun is. | ||||
If it happens that a cloud should anywhere overshadow some part of a | ||||
hill the [shadow of the] trees there will change less than in the | ||||
plains; for these trees on the hills have their branches thicker, | ||||
because they grow less high each year than in the plains. Therefore | ||||
as these branches are dark by nature and being so full of shade, the | ||||
shadow of the clouds cannot darken them any more; but the open | ||||
spaces between the trees, which have no strong shadow change very | ||||
much in tone and particularly those which vary from green; that is | ||||
ploughed lands or fallen mountains or barren lands or rocks. Where | ||||
the trees are against the atmosphere they appear all the same | ||||
colour--if indeed they are not very close together or very thickly | ||||
covered with leaves like the fir and similar trees. When you see the | ||||
trees from the side from which the sun lights them, you will see | ||||
them almost all of the same tone, and the shadows in them will be | ||||
hidden by the leaves in the light, which come between your eye and | ||||
those shadows. | ||||
TREES AT A SHORT DISTANCE. | ||||
[Footnote 29: The heading _alberi vicini_ (trees at a short | ||||
distance) is in the original manuscript written in the margin.] When | ||||
the trees are situated between the sun and the eye, beyond the | ||||
shadow which spreads from their centre, the green of their leaves | ||||
will be seen transparent; but this transparency will be broken in | ||||
many places by the leaves and boughs in shadow which will come | ||||
between you and them, or, in their upper portions, they will be | ||||
accompanied by many lights reflected from the leaves. | ||||
454. | ||||
The trees of the landscape stand out but little from each other; | ||||
because their illuminated portions come against the illuminated | ||||
portions of those beyond and differ little from them in light and | ||||
shade. | ||||
455. | ||||
Of trees seen from below and against the light, one beyond the other | ||||
and near together. The topmost part of the first will be in great | ||||
part transparent and light, and will stand out against the dark | ||||
portion of the second tree. And thus it will be with all in | ||||
succession that are placed under the same conditions. | ||||
Let _s_ be the light, and _r_ the eye, _c d n_ the first tree, _a b | ||||
c_ the second. Then I say that _r_, the eye, will see the portion _c | ||||
f_ in great part transparent and lighted by the light _s_ which | ||||
falls upon it from the opposite side, and it will see it, on a dark | ||||
ground _b c_ because that is the dark part and shadow of the tree _a | ||||
b c_. | ||||
But if the eye is placed at _t_ it will see _o p_ dark on the light | ||||
background _n g_. | ||||
Of the transparent and shadowy parts of trees, that which is nearest | ||||
to you is the darkest. | ||||
456. | ||||
That part of a tree which has shadow for background, is all of one | ||||
tone, and wherever the trees or branches are thickest they will be | ||||
darkest, because there are no little intervals of air. But where the | ||||
boughs lie against a background of other boughs, the brighter parts | ||||
are seen lightest and the leaves lustrous from the sunlight falling | ||||
on them. | ||||
457. | ||||
In the composition of leafy trees be careful not to repeat too often | ||||
the same colour of one tree against the same colour of another | ||||
[behind it]; but vary it with a lighter, or a darker, or a stronger | ||||
green. | ||||
On the treatment of light for landscapes (458-464). | ||||
458. | ||||
The landscape has a finer azure [tone] when, in fine weather the sun | ||||
is at noon than at any other time of the day, because the air is | ||||
purified of moisture; and looking at it under that aspect you will | ||||
see the trees of a beautiful green at the outside and the shadows | ||||
dark towards the middle; and in the remoter distance the atmosphere | ||||
which comes between you and them looks more beautiful when there is | ||||
something dark beyond. And still the azure is most beautiful. The | ||||
objects seen from the side on which the sun shines will not show you | ||||
their shadows. But, if you are lower than the sun, you can see what | ||||
is not seen by the sun and that will be all in shade. The leaves of | ||||
the trees, which come between you and the sun are of two principal | ||||
colours which are a splendid lustre of green, and the reflection of | ||||
the atmosphere which lights up the objects which cannot be seen by | ||||
the sun, and the shaded portions which only face the earth, and the | ||||
darkest which are surrounded by something that is not dark. The | ||||
trees in the landscape which are between you and the sun are far | ||||
more beautiful than those you see when you are between the sun and | ||||
them; and this is so because those which face the sun show their | ||||
leaves as transparent towards the ends of their branches, and those | ||||
that are not transparent--that is at the ends--reflect the light; | ||||
and the shadows are dark because they are not concealed by any | ||||
thing. | ||||
The trees, when you place yourself between them and the sun, will | ||||
only display to you their light and natural colour, which, in | ||||
itself, is not very strong, and besides this some reflected lights | ||||
which, being against a background which does not differ very much | ||||
from themselves in tone, are not conspicuous; and if you are lower | ||||
down than they are situated, they may also show those portions on | ||||
which the light of the sun does not fall and these will be dark. | ||||
In the Wind. | ||||
But, if you are on the side whence the wind blows, you will see the | ||||
trees look very much lighter than on the other sides, and this | ||||
happens because the wind turns up the under side of the leaves, | ||||
which, in all trees, is much whiter than the upper sides; and, more | ||||
especially, will they be very light indeed if the wind blows from | ||||
the quarter where the sun is, and if you have your back turned to | ||||
it. | ||||
[Footnote: At _S_, in the original is the word _Sole_ (sun) and at | ||||
_N parte di nuvolo_ (the side of the clouds).] | ||||
459. | ||||
When the sun is covered by clouds, objects are less conspicuous, | ||||
because there is little difference between the light and shade of | ||||
the trees and of the buildings being illuminated by the brightness | ||||
of the atmosphere which surrounds the objects in such a way that the | ||||
shadows are few, and these few fade away so that their outline is | ||||
lost in haze. | ||||
460. | ||||
OF TREES AND LIGHTS ON THEM. | ||||
The best method of practice in representing country scenes, or I | ||||
should say landscapes with their trees, is to choose them so that | ||||
the sun is covered with clouds so that the landscape receives an | ||||
universal light and not the direct light of the sun, which makes the | ||||
shadows sharp and too strongly different from the lights. | ||||
461. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
In landscapes which represent [a scene in] winter. The mountains | ||||
should not be shown blue, as we see in the mountains in the summer. | ||||
And this is proved [Footnote 5. 6.: _Per la_ 4_a di questo_. It is | ||||
impossible to ascertain what this quotation refers to. _Questo_ | ||||
certainly does not mean the MS. in hand, nor any other now known to | ||||
us. The same remark applies to the phrase in line 15: _per la_ 2_a | ||||
di questo_.] in the 4th of this which says: Among mountains seen | ||||
from a great distance those will look of the bluest colour which are | ||||
in themselves the darkest; hence, when the trees are stripped of | ||||
their leaves, they will show a bluer tinge which will be in itself | ||||
darker; therefore, when the trees have lost their leaves they will | ||||
look of a gray colour, while, with their leaves, they are green, and | ||||
in proportion as the green is darker than the grey hue the green | ||||
will be of a bluer tinge than the gray. Also by the 2nd of this: The | ||||
shadows of trees covered with leaves are darker than the shadows of | ||||
those trees which have lost their leaves in proportion as the trees | ||||
covered with leaves are denser than those without leaves--and thus | ||||
my meaning is proved. | ||||
The definition of the blue colour of the atmosphere explains why the | ||||
landscape is bluer in the summer than in the winter. | ||||
462. | ||||
OF PAINTING IN A LANDSCAPE. | ||||
If the slope of a hill comes between the eye and the horizon, | ||||
sloping towards the eye, while the eye is opposite the middle of the | ||||
height of this slope, then that hill will increase in darkness | ||||
throughout its length. This is proved by the 7th of this which says | ||||
that a tree looks darkest when it is seen from below; the | ||||
proposition is verified, since this hill will, on its upper half | ||||
show all its trees as much from the side which is lighted by the | ||||
light of the sky, as from that which is in shade from the darkness | ||||
of the earth; whence it must result that these trees are of a medium | ||||
darkness. And from this [middle] spot towards the base of the hill, | ||||
these trees will be lighter by degrees by the converse of the 7th | ||||
and by the said 7th: For trees so placed, the nearer they are to the | ||||
summit of the hill the darker they necessarily become. But this | ||||
darkness is not in proportion to the distance, by the 8th of this | ||||
which says: That object shows darkest which is [seen] in the | ||||
clearest atmosphere; and by the 10th: That shows darkest which | ||||
stands out against a lighter background. | ||||
[Footnote: The quotation in this passage again cannot be verified.] | ||||
463. | ||||
OF LANDSCAPES. | ||||
The colours of the shadows in mountains at a great distance take a | ||||
most lovely blue, much purer than their illuminated portions. And | ||||
from this it follows that when the rock of a mountain is reddish the | ||||
illuminated portions are violet (?) and the more they are lighted | ||||
the more they display their proper colour. | ||||
464. | ||||
A place is most luminous when it is most remote from mountains. | ||||
On the treatment of light for views of towns (465-469). | ||||
465. | ||||
OF LIGHT AND SHADOW IN A TOWN. | ||||
When the sun is in the East and the eye is above the centre of a | ||||
town, the eye will see the Southern part of the town with its roofs | ||||
half in shade and half in light, and the same towards the North; the | ||||
Eastern side will be all in shadow and the Western will be all in | ||||
light. | ||||
466. | ||||
Of the houses of a town, in which the divisions between the houses | ||||
may be distinguished by the light which fall on the mist at the | ||||
bottom. If the eye is above the houses the light seen in the space | ||||
that is between one house and the next sinks by degrees into thicker | ||||
mist; and yet, being less transparent, it appears whiter; and if the | ||||
houses are some higher than the others, since the true [colour] is | ||||
always more discernible through the thinner atmosphere, the houses | ||||
will look darker in proportion as they are higher up. Let _n o p q_ | ||||
represent the various density of the atmosphere thick with moisture, | ||||
_a_ being the eye, the house _b c_ will look lightest at the bottom, | ||||
because it is in a thicker atmosphere; the lines _c d f_ will appear | ||||
equally light, for although _f_ is more distant than _c_, it is | ||||
raised into a thinner atmosphere, if the houses _b e_ are of the | ||||
same height, because they cross a brightness which is varied by | ||||
mist, but this is only because the line of the eye which starts from | ||||
above ends by piercing a lower and denser atmosphere at _d_ than at | ||||
_b_. Thus the line a _f_ is lower at _f_ than at _c_; and the house | ||||
_f_ will be seen darker at _e_ from the line _e k_ as far as _m_, | ||||
than the tops of the houses standing in front of it. | ||||
467. | ||||
OF TOWNS OR OTHER BUILDINGS SEEN IN THE EVENING OR THE MORNING | ||||
THROUGH THE MIST. | ||||
Of buildings seen at a great distance in the evening or the morning, | ||||
as in mist or dense atmosphere, only those portions are seen in | ||||
brightness which are lighted up by the sun which is near the | ||||
horizon; and those portions which are not lighted up by the sun | ||||
remain almost of the same colour and medium tone as the mist. | ||||
WHY OBJECTS WHICH ARE HIGH UP AND AT A DISTANCE ARE DARKER THAN THE | ||||
LOWER ONES, EVEN IF THE MIST IS UNIFORMLY DENSE. | ||||
Of objects standing in a mist or other dense atmosphere, whether | ||||
from vapour or smoke or distance, those will be most visible which | ||||
are the highest. And among objects of equal height that will be the | ||||
darkest [strongest] which has for background the deepest mist. Thus | ||||
the eye _h_ looking at _a b c_, towers of equal height, one with | ||||
another, sees _c_ the top of the first tower at _r_, at two degrees | ||||
of depth in the mist; and sees the height of the middle tower _b_ | ||||
through one single degree of mist. Therefore the top of the tower | ||||
_c_ appears stronger than the top of the tower _b_, &c. | ||||
468. | ||||
OF THE SMOKE OF A TOWN. | ||||
Smoke is seen better and more distinctly on the Eastern side than on | ||||
the Western when the sun is in the East; and this arises from two | ||||
causes; the first is that the sun, with its rays, shines through the | ||||
particles of the smoke and lights them up and makes them visible. | ||||
The second is that the roofs of the houses seen in the East at this | ||||
time are in shadow, because their obliquity does not allow of their | ||||
being illuminated by the sun. And the same thing occurs with dust; | ||||
and both one and the other look the lighter in proportion as they | ||||
are denser, and they are densest towards the middle. | ||||
469. | ||||
OF SMOKE AND DUST. | ||||
If the sun is in the East the smoke of cities will not be visible in | ||||
the West, because on that side it is not seen penetrated by the | ||||
solar rays, nor on a dark background; since the roofs of the houses | ||||
turn the same side to the eye as they turn towards the sun, and on | ||||
this light background the smoke is not very visible. | ||||
But dust, under the same aspect, will look darker than smoke being | ||||
of denser material than smoke which is moist. | ||||
The effect of wind on trees (470-473). | ||||
470. | ||||
OF REPRESENTING WIND. | ||||
In representing wind, besides the bending of the boughs and the | ||||
reversing of their leaves towards the quarter whence the wind comes, | ||||
you should also represent them amid clouds of fine dust mingled with | ||||
the troubled air. | ||||
471. | ||||
Describe landscapes with the wind, and the water, and the setting | ||||
and rising of the sun. | ||||
THE WIND. | ||||
All the leaves which hung towards the earth by the bending of the | ||||
shoots with their branches, are turned up side down by the gusts of | ||||
wind, and here their perspective is reversed; for, if the tree is | ||||
between you and the quarter of the wind, the leaves which are | ||||
towards you remain in their natural aspect, while those on the | ||||
opposite side which ought to have their points in a contrary | ||||
direction have, by being turned over, their points turned towards | ||||
you. | ||||
472. | ||||
Trees struck by the force of the wind bend to the side towards which | ||||
the wind is blowing; and the wind being past they bend in the | ||||
contrary direction, that is in reverse motion. | ||||
473. | ||||
That portion of a tree which is farthest from the force which | ||||
strikes it is the most injured by the blow because it bears most | ||||
strain; thus nature has foreseen this case by thickening them in | ||||
that part where they can be most hurt; and most in such trees as | ||||
grow to great heights, as pines and the like. [Footnote: Compare the | ||||
sketch drawn with a pen and washed with Indian ink on Pl. XL, No. 1. | ||||
In the Vatican copy we find, under a section entitled '_del fumo_', | ||||
the following remark: _Era sotto di questo capitulo un rompimento di | ||||
montagna, per dentro delle quali roture scherzaua fiame di fuoco, | ||||
disegnate di penna et ombrate d'acquarella, da uedere cosa mirabile | ||||
et uiua (Ed. MANZI, p. 235. Ed. LUDWIG, Vol. I, 460). This appears | ||||
to refer to the left hand portion of the drawing here given from the | ||||
Windsor collection, and from this it must be inferred, that the leaf | ||||
as it now exists in the library of the Queen of England, was already | ||||
separated from the original MS. at the time when the Vatican copy | ||||
was made.] | ||||
Light and shade on clouds (474-477). | ||||
474. | ||||
Describe how the clouds are formed and how they dissolve, and what | ||||
cause raises vapour. | ||||
475. | ||||
The shadows in clouds are lighter in proportion as they are nearer | ||||
to the horizon. | ||||
[Footnote: The drawing belonging to this was in black chalk and is | ||||
totally effaced.] | ||||
476. | ||||
When clouds come between the sun and the eye all the upper edges of | ||||
their round forms are light, and towards the middle they are dark, | ||||
and this happens because towards the top these edges have the sun | ||||
above them while you are below them; and the same thing happens with | ||||
the position of the branches of trees; and again the clouds, like | ||||
the trees, being somewhat transparent, are lighted up in part, and | ||||
at the edges they show thinner. | ||||
But, when the eye is between the cloud and the sun, the cloud has | ||||
the contrary effect to the former, for the edges of its mass are | ||||
dark and it is light towards the middle; and this happens because | ||||
you see the same side as faces the sun, and because the edges have | ||||
some transparency and reveal to the eye that portion which is hidden | ||||
beyond them, and which, as it does not catch the sunlight like that | ||||
portion turned towards it, is necessarily somewhat darker. Again, it | ||||
may be that you see the details of these rounded masses from the | ||||
lower side, while the sun shines on the upper side and as they are | ||||
not so situated as to reflect the light of the sun, as in the first | ||||
instance they remain dark. | ||||
The black clouds which are often seen higher up than those which are | ||||
illuminated by the sun are shaded by other clouds, lying between | ||||
them and the sun. | ||||
Again, the rounded forms of the clouds that face the sun, show their | ||||
edges dark because they lie against the light background; and to see | ||||
that this is true, you may look at the top of any cloud that is | ||||
wholly light because it lies against the blue of the atmosphere, | ||||
which is darker than the cloud. | ||||
[Footnote: A drawing in red chalk from the Windsor collection (see | ||||
Pl. XXIX), representing a landscape with storm-clouds, may serve to | ||||
illustrate this section as well as the following one.] | ||||
477. | ||||
OF CLOUDS, SMOKE AND DUST AND THE FLAMES OF A FURNACE OR OF A | ||||
BURNING KILN. | ||||
The clouds do not show their rounded forms excepting on the sides | ||||
which face the sun; on the others the roundness is imperceptible | ||||
because they are in the shade. [Footnote: The text of this chapter | ||||
is given in facsimile on Pls. XXXVI and XXXVII. The two halves of | ||||
the leaf form but one in the original. On the margin close to lines | ||||
4 and 5 is the note: _rossore d'aria inverso l'orizonte_--(of the | ||||
redness of the atmosphere near the horizon). The sketches on the | ||||
lower portion of the page will be spoken of in No. 668.] | ||||
If the sun is in the East and the clouds in the West, the eye placed | ||||
between the sun and the clouds sees the edges of the rounded forms | ||||
composing these clouds as dark, and the portions which are | ||||
surrounded by this dark [edge] are light. And this occurs because | ||||
the edges of the rounded forms of these clouds are turned towards | ||||
the upper or lateral sky, which is reflected in them. | ||||
Both the cloud and the tree display no roundness at all on their | ||||
shaded side. | ||||
On images reflected in water. | ||||
478. | ||||
Painters often deceive themselves, by representing water in which | ||||
they make the water reflect the objects seen by the man. But the | ||||
water reflects the object from one side and the man sees it from the | ||||
other; and it often happens that the painter sees an object from | ||||
below, and thus one and the same object is seen from hind part | ||||
before and upside down, because the water shows the image of the | ||||
object in one way, and the eye sees it in another. | ||||
Of rainbows and rain (479. 480). | ||||
479. | ||||
The colours in the middle of the rainbow mingle together. | ||||
The bow in itself is not in the rain nor in the eye that sees it; | ||||
though it is generated by the rain, the sun, and the eye. The | ||||
rainbow is always seen by the eye that is between the rain and the | ||||
body of the sun; hence if the sun is in the East and the rain is in | ||||
the West it will appear on the rain in the West. | ||||
480. | ||||
When the air is condensed into rain it would produce a vacuum if the | ||||
rest of the air did not prevent this by filling its place, as it | ||||
does with a violent rush; and this is the wind which rises in the | ||||
summer time, accompanied by heavy rain. | ||||
Of flower seeds. | ||||
481. | ||||
All the flowers which turn towards the sun perfect their seeds; but | ||||
not the others; that is to say those which get only the reflection | ||||
of the sun. | ||||
IX. | ||||
_The Practice of Painting._ | ||||
_It is hardly necessary to offer any excuses for the division | ||||
carried out in the arrangement of the text into practical | ||||
suggestions and theoretical enquiries. It was evidently intended by | ||||
Leonardo himself as we conclude from incidental remarks in the MSS. | ||||
(for instance No_ 110_). The fact that this arrangement was never | ||||
carried out either in the old MS. copies or in any edition since, is | ||||
easily accounted for by the general disorder which results from the | ||||
provisional distribution of the various chapters in the old copies. | ||||
We have every reason to believe that the earliest copyists, in | ||||
distributing the materials collected by them, did not in the least | ||||
consider the order in which the original MS.lay before them._ | ||||
_It is evident that almost all the chapters which refer to the | ||||
calling and life of the painter--and which are here brought together | ||||
in the first section (Nos._ 482-508_)--may be referred to two | ||||
distinct periods in Leonardo's life; most of them can be dated as | ||||
belonging to the year_ 1492 _or to_ 1515. _At about this later time | ||||
Leonardo may have formed the project of completing his Libro della | ||||
Pittura, after an interval of some years, as it would seem, during | ||||
which his interest in the subject had fallen somewhat into the | ||||
background._ | ||||
_In the second section, which treats first of the artist's studio, | ||||
the construction of a suitable window forms the object of careful | ||||
investigations; the special importance attached to this by Leonardo | ||||
is sufficiently obvious. His theory of the incidence of light which | ||||
was fully discussed in a former part of this work, was to him by no | ||||
means of mere abstract value, but, being deduced, as he says, from | ||||
experience (or experiment) was required to prove its utility in | ||||
practice. Connected with this we find suggestions for the choice of | ||||
a light with practical hints as to sketching a picture and some | ||||
other precepts of a practical character which must come under | ||||
consideration in the course of completing the painting. In all this | ||||
I have followed the same principle of arrangement in the text as was | ||||
carried out in the Theory of Painting, thus the suggestions for the | ||||
Perspective of a picture, (Nos._ 536-569_), are followed by the | ||||
theory of light and shade for the practical method of optics (Nos._ | ||||
548--566_) and this by the practical precepts or the treatment of | ||||
aerial perspective (_567--570_)._ | ||||
_In the passage on Portrait and Figure Painting the principles of | ||||
painting as applied to a bust and head are separated and placed | ||||
first, since the advice to figure painters must have some connection | ||||
with the principles of the treatment of composition by which they | ||||
are followed._ | ||||
_But this arrangement of the text made it seem advisable not to pick | ||||
out the practical precepts as to the representation of trees and | ||||
landscape from the close connection in which they were originally | ||||
placed--unlike the rest of the practical precepts--with the theory | ||||
of this branch of the subject. They must therefore be sought under | ||||
the section entitled Botany for Painters._ | ||||
_As a supplement to the_ Libro di Pittura _I have here added those | ||||
texts which treat of the Painter's materials,--as chalk, drawing | ||||
paper, colours and their preparation, of the management of oils and | ||||
varnishes; in the appendix are some notes on chemical substances. | ||||
Possibly some of these, if not all, may have stood in connection | ||||
with the preparation of colours. It is in the very nature of things | ||||
that Leonardo's incidental indications as to colours and the like | ||||
should be now-a-days extremely obscure and could only be explained | ||||
by professional experts--by them even in but few instances. It might | ||||
therefore have seemed advisable to reproduce exactly the original | ||||
text without offering any translation. The rendering here given is | ||||
merely an attempt to suggest what Leonardo's meaning may have been._ | ||||
_LOMAZZO tells us in his_ Trattato dell'arte della Pittura, Scultura | ||||
ed Architettura (Milano 1584, libro II, Cap. XIV): "Va discorrendo | ||||
ed argomentando Leonardo Vinci in un suo libro letto da me (?) | ||||
questi anni passati, ch'egli scrisse di mano stanca ai prieghi di | ||||
LUDOVICO SFORZA duca di Milano, in determinazione di questa | ||||
questione, se e piu nobile la pittura o la scultura; dicendo che | ||||
quanto piu un'arte porta seco fatica di corpo, e sudore, tanto piu e | ||||
vile, e men pregiata". _But the existence of any book specially | ||||
written for Lodovico il Moro on the superiority of Painting over | ||||
sculpture is perhaps mythical. The various passages in praise of | ||||
Painting as compared not merely with Sculpture but with Poetry, are | ||||
scattered among MSS. of very different dates._ | ||||
_Besides, the way, in which the subject is discussed appears not to | ||||
support the supposition, that these texts were prepared at a special | ||||
request of the Duke._ | ||||
I. | ||||
MORAL PRECEPTS FOR THE STUDENT OF PAINTING. | ||||
How to ascertain the dispositions for an artistic career. | ||||
482. | ||||
A WARNING CONCERNING YOUTHS WISHING TO BE PAINTERS. | ||||
Many are they who have a taste and love for drawing, but no talent; | ||||
and this will be discernible in boys who are not diligent and never | ||||
finish their drawings with shading. | ||||
The course of instruction for an artist (483-485). | ||||
483. | ||||
The youth should first learn perspective, then the proportions of | ||||
objects. Then he may copy from some good master, to accustom himself | ||||
to fine forms. Then from nature, to confirm by practice the rules he | ||||
has learnt. Then see for a time the works of various masters. Then | ||||
get the habit of putting his art into practice and work. | ||||
[Footnote: The Vatican copy and numerous abridgements all place this | ||||
chapter at the beginning of the _Trattato_, and in consequence | ||||
DUFRESNE and all subsequent editors have done the same. In the | ||||
Vatican copy however all the general considerations on the relation | ||||
of painting to the other arts are placed first, as introductory.] | ||||
484. | ||||
OF THE ORDER OF LEARNING TO DRAW. | ||||
First draw from drawings by good masters done from works of art and | ||||
from nature, and not from memory; then from plastic work, with the | ||||
guidance of the drawing done from it; and then from good natural | ||||
models and this you must put into practice. | ||||
485. | ||||
PRECEPTS FOR DRAWING. | ||||
The artist ought first to exercise his hand by copying drawings from | ||||
the hand of a good master. And having acquired that practice, under | ||||
the criticism of his master, he should next practise drawing objects | ||||
in relief of a good style, following the rules which will presently | ||||
be given. | ||||
The study of the antique (486. 487). | ||||
486. | ||||
OF DRAWING. | ||||
Which is best, to draw from nature or from the antique? and which is | ||||
more difficult to do outlines or light and shade? | ||||
487. | ||||
It is better to imitate [copy] the antique than modern work. | ||||
[Footnote 486, 487: These are the only two passages in which | ||||
Leonardo alludes to the importance of antique art in the training of | ||||
an artist. The question asked in No. 486 remains unanswered by him | ||||
and it seems to me very doubtful whether the opinion stated in No. | ||||
487 is to be regarded as a reply to it. This opinion stands in the | ||||
MS. in a connection--as will be explained later on--which seems to | ||||
require us to limit its application to a single special case. At any | ||||
rate we may suspect that when Leonardo put the question, he felt | ||||
some hesitation as to the answer. Among his very numerous drawings I | ||||
have not been able to find a single study from the antique, though a | ||||
drawing in black chalk, at Windsor, of a man on horseback (PI. | ||||
LXXIII) may perhaps be a reminiscence of the statue of Marcus | ||||
Aurelius at Rome. It seems to me that the drapery in a pen and ink | ||||
drawing of a bust, also at Windsor, has been borrowed from an | ||||
antique model (Pl. XXX). G. G. Rossi has, I believe, correctly | ||||
interpreted Leonardo's feeling towards the antique in the following | ||||
note on this passage in manzi's edition, p. 501: "Sappiamo dalla | ||||
storia, che i valorosi artisti Toscani dell'eta dell'oro dell'arte | ||||
studiarono sugli antichi marmi raccolti dal Magnifico LORENZO DE' | ||||
MEDICI. Pare che il Vinci a tali monumenti non si accostasse. Quest' | ||||
uomo sempre riconosce per maestra la natura, e questo principio lo | ||||
stringeva alla sola imitazione di essa"--Compare No. 10, 26--28 | ||||
footnote.] | ||||
The necessity of anatomical knowledge (488. 489). | ||||
488. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
It is indispensable to a Painter who would be thoroughly familiar | ||||
with the limbs in all the positions and actions of which they are | ||||
capable, in the nude, to know the anatomy of the sinews, bones, | ||||
muscles and tendons so that, in their various movements and | ||||
exertions, he may know which nerve or muscle is the cause of each | ||||
movement and show those only as prominent and thickened, and not the | ||||
others all over [the limb], as many do who, to seem great | ||||
draughtsmen, draw their nude figures looking like wood, devoid of | ||||
grace; so that you would think you were looking at a sack of walnuts | ||||
rather than the human form, or a bundle of radishes rather than the | ||||
muscles of figures. | ||||
489. | ||||
HOW IT IS NECESSARY TO A PAINTER THAT HE SHOULD KNOW THE INTRINSIC | ||||
FORMS [STRUCTURE] OF MAN. | ||||
The painter who is familiar with the nature of the sinews, muscles, | ||||
and tendons, will know very well, in giving movement to a limb, how | ||||
many and which sinews cause it; and which muscle, by swelling, | ||||
causes the contraction of that sinew; and which sinews, expanded | ||||
into the thinnest cartilage, surround and support the said muscle. | ||||
Thus he will variously and constantly demonstrate the different | ||||
muscles by means of the various attitudes of his figures, and will | ||||
not do, as many who, in a variety of movements, still display the | ||||
very same things [modelling] in the arms, back, breast and legs. And | ||||
these things are not to be regarded as minor faults. | ||||
How to acquire practice. | ||||
490. | ||||
OF STUDY AND THE ORDER OF STUDY. | ||||
I say that first you ought to learn the limbs and their mechanism, | ||||
and having this knowledge, their actions should come next, according | ||||
to the circumstances in which they occur in man. And thirdly to | ||||
compose subjects, the studies for which should be taken from natural | ||||
actions and made from time to time, as circumstances allow; and pay | ||||
attention to them in the streets and _piazze_ and fields, and note | ||||
them down with a brief indication of the forms; [Footnote 5: Lines | ||||
5-7 explained by the lower portion of the sketch No. 1 on Pl. XXXI.] | ||||
thus for a head make an o, and for an arm a straight or a bent line, | ||||
and the same for the legs and the body, [Footnote 7: Lines 5-7 | ||||
explained by the lower portion of the sketch No. 1 on Pl. XXXI.] and | ||||
when you return home work out these notes in a complete form. The | ||||
Adversary says that to acquire practice and do a great deal of work | ||||
it is better that the first period of study should be employed in | ||||
drawing various compositions done on paper or on walls by divers | ||||
masters, and that in this way practice is rapidly gained, and good | ||||
methods; to which I reply that the method will be good, if it is | ||||
based on works of good composition and by skilled masters. But since | ||||
such masters are so rare that there are but few of them to be found, | ||||
it is a surer way to go to natural objects, than to those which are | ||||
imitated from nature with great deterioration, and so form bad | ||||
methods; for he who can go to the fountain does not go to the | ||||
water-jar. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage has been published by Dr. M. JORDAN, _Das | ||||
Malerbuck des L. da Vinci_, p. 89; his reading however varies | ||||
slightly from mine.] | ||||
Industry and thoroughness the first conditions (491-493.) | ||||
491. | ||||
WHAT RULES SHOULD BE GIVEN TO BOYS LEARNING TO PAINT. | ||||
We know for certain that sight is one of the most rapid actions we | ||||
can perform. In an instant we see an infinite number of forms, still | ||||
we only take in thoroughly one object at a time. Supposing that you, | ||||
Reader, were to glance rapidly at the whole of this written page, | ||||
you would instantly perceive that it was covered with various | ||||
letters; but you could not, in the time, recognise what the letters | ||||
were, nor what they were meant to tell. Hence you would need to see | ||||
them word by word, line by line to be able to understand the | ||||
letters. Again, if you wish to go to the top of a building you must | ||||
go up step by step; otherwise it will be impossible that you should | ||||
reach the top. Thus I say to you, whom nature prompts to pursue this | ||||
art, if you wish to have a sound knowledge of the forms of objects | ||||
begin with the details of them, and do not go on to the second | ||||
[step] till you have the first well fixed in memory and in practice. | ||||
And if you do otherwise you will throw away your time, or certainly | ||||
greatly prolong your studies. And remember to acquire diligence | ||||
rather than rapidity. | ||||
492. | ||||
HOW THAT DILIGENCE [ACCURACY] SHOULD FIRST BE LEARNT RATHER THAN | ||||
RAPID EXECUTION. | ||||
If you, who draw, desire to study well and to good purpose, always | ||||
go slowly to work in your drawing; and discriminate in. the lights, | ||||
which have the highest degree of brightness, and to what extent and | ||||
likewise in the shadows, which are those that are darker than the | ||||
others and in what way they intermingle; then their masses and the | ||||
relative proportions of one to the other. And note in their | ||||
outlines, which way they tend; and which part of the lines is curved | ||||
to one side or the other, and where they are more or less | ||||
conspicuous and consequently broad or fine; and finally, that your | ||||
light and shade blend without strokes and borders [but] looking like | ||||
smoke. And when you have thus schooled your hand and your judgment | ||||
by such diligence, you will acquire rapidity before you are aware. | ||||
The artist's private life and choice of company (493-494). | ||||
493. | ||||
OF THE LIFE OF THE PAINTER IN THE COUNTRY. | ||||
A painter needs such mathematics as belong to painting. And the | ||||
absence of all companions who are alienated from his studies; his | ||||
brain must be easily impressed by the variety of objects, which | ||||
successively come before him, and also free from other cares | ||||
[Footnote 6: Leonardo here seems to be speaking of his own method of | ||||
work as displayed in his MSS. and this passage explains, at least in | ||||
part, the peculiarities in their arrangement.]. And if, when | ||||
considering and defining one subject, a second subject | ||||
intervenes--as happens when an object occupies the mind, then he | ||||
must decide which of these cases is the more difficult to work out, | ||||
and follow that up until it becomes quite clear, and then work out | ||||
the explanation of the other [Footnote 11: Leonardo here seems to be | ||||
speaking of his own method of work as displayed in his MSS. and this | ||||
passage explains, at least in part, the peculiarities in their | ||||
arrangement.]. And above all he must keep his mind as clear as the | ||||
surface of a mirror, which assumes colours as various as those of | ||||
the different objects. And his companions should be like him as to | ||||
their studies, and if such cannot be found he should keep his | ||||
speculations to himself alone, so that at last he will find no more | ||||
useful company [than his own]. | ||||
[Footnote: In the title line Leonardo had originally written _del | ||||
pictore filosofo_ (the philosophical painter), but he himself struck | ||||
out_filosofo_. Compare in No. 363 _pictora notomista_ (anatomical | ||||
painter). The original text is partly reproduced on Pl. CI.] | ||||
494. | ||||
OF THE LIFE OF THE PAINTER IN HIS STUDIO. | ||||
To the end that well-being of the body may not injure that of the | ||||
mind, the painter or draughtsman must remain solitary, and | ||||
particularly when intent on those studies and reflections which will | ||||
constantly rise up before his eye, giving materials to be well | ||||
stored in the memory. While you are alone you are entirely your own | ||||
[master] and if you have one companion you are but half your own, | ||||
and the less so in proportion to the indiscretion of his behaviour. | ||||
And if you have many companions you will fall deeper into the same | ||||
trouble. If you should say: "I will go my own way and withdraw | ||||
apart, the better to study the forms of natural objects", I tell | ||||
you, you will not be able to help often listening to their chatter. | ||||
And so, since one cannot serve two masters, you will badly fill the | ||||
part of a companion, and carry out your studies of art even worse. | ||||
And if you say: "I will withdraw so far that their words cannot | ||||
reach me and they cannot disturb me", I can tell you that you will | ||||
be thought mad. But, you see, you will at any rate be alone. And if | ||||
you must have companions ship find it in your studio. This may | ||||
assist you to have the advantages which arise from various | ||||
speculations. All other company may be highly mischievous. | ||||
The distribution of time for studying (495-497). | ||||
495. | ||||
OF WHETHER IT IS BETTER TO DRAW WITH COMPANIONS OR NOT. | ||||
I say and insist that drawing in company is much better than alone, | ||||
for many reasons. The first is that you would be ashamed to be seen | ||||
behindhand among the students, and such shame will lead you to | ||||
careful study. Secondly, a wholesome emulation will stimulate you to | ||||
be among those who are more praised than yourself, and this praise | ||||
of others will spur you on. Another is that you can learn from the | ||||
drawings of others who do better than yourself; and if you are | ||||
better than they, you can profit by your contempt for their defects, | ||||
while the praise of others will incite you to farther merits. | ||||
[Footnote: The contradiction by this passage of the foregoing | ||||
chapter is only apparent. It is quite clear, from the nature of the | ||||
reasoning which is here used to prove that it is more improving to | ||||
work with others than to work alone, that the studies of pupils only | ||||
are under consideration here.] | ||||
496. | ||||
OF STUDYING, IN THE DARK, WHEN YOU WAKE, OR IN BED BEFORE YOU GO TO | ||||
SLEEP. | ||||
I myself have proved it to be of no small use, when in bed in the | ||||
dark, to recall in fancy the external details of forms previously | ||||
studied, or other noteworthy things conceived by subtle speculation; | ||||
and this is certainly an admirable exercise, and useful for | ||||
impressing things on the memory. | ||||
497. | ||||
OF THE TIME FOR STUDYING SELECTION OF SUBJECTS. | ||||
Winter evenings ought to be employed by young students in looking | ||||
over the things prepared during the summer; that is, all the | ||||
drawings from the nude done in the summer should be brought together | ||||
and a choice made of the best [studies of] limbs and bodies among | ||||
them, to apply in practice and commit to memory. | ||||
OF POSITIONS. | ||||
After this in the following summer you should select some one who is | ||||
well grown and who has not been brought up in doublets, and so may | ||||
not be of stiff carriage, and make him go through a number of agile | ||||
and graceful actions; and if his muscles do not show plainly within | ||||
the outlines of his limbs that does not matter at all. It is enough | ||||
that you can see good attitudes and you can correct [the drawing of] | ||||
the limbs by those you studied in the winter. | ||||
[Footnote: An injunction to study in the evening occurs also in No. | ||||
524.] | ||||
On the productive power of minor artists (498-501). | ||||
498. | ||||
He is a poor disciple who does not excel his master. | ||||
499. | ||||
Nor is the painter praiseworthy who does but one thing well, as the | ||||
nude figure, heads, draperies, animals, landscapes or other such | ||||
details, irrespective of other work; for there can be no mind so | ||||
inept, that after devoting itself to one single thing and doing it | ||||
constantly, it should fail to do it well. | ||||
[Footnote: In MANZI'S edition (p. 502) the painter G. G. Bossi | ||||
indignantly remarks on this passage. "_Parla il Vince in questo | ||||
luogo come se tutti gli artisti avessero quella sublimita d'ingegno | ||||
capace di abbracciare tutte le cose, di cui era egli dotato"_ And he | ||||
then mentions the case of CLAUDE LORRAIN. But he overlooks the fact | ||||
that in Leonardo's time landscape painting made no pretensions to | ||||
independence but was reckoned among the details (_particulari_, | ||||
lines 3, 4).] | ||||
500. | ||||
THAT A PAINTER IS NOT ADMIRABLE UNLESS HE IS UNIVERSAL. | ||||
Some may distinctly assert that those persons are under a delusion | ||||
who call that painter a good master who can do nothing well but a | ||||
head or a figure. Certainly this is no great achievement; after | ||||
studying one single thing for a life-time who would not have | ||||
attained some perfection in it? But, since we know that painting | ||||
embraces and includes in itself every object produced by nature or | ||||
resulting from the fortuitous actions of men, in short, all that the | ||||
eye can see, he seems to me but a poor master who can only do a | ||||
figure well. For do you not perceive how many and various actions | ||||
are performed by men only; how many different animals there are, as | ||||
well as trees, plants, flowers, with many mountainous regions and | ||||
plains, springs and rivers, cities with public and private | ||||
buildings, machines, too, fit for the purposes of men, divers | ||||
costumes, decorations and arts? And all these things ought to be | ||||
regarded as of equal importance and value, by the man who can be | ||||
termed a good painter. | ||||
501. | ||||
OF THE MISERABLE PRETENCES MADE BY THOSE WHO FALSELY AND UNWORTHILY | ||||
ACQUIRE THE NAME OF PAINTERS. | ||||
Now there is a certain race of painters who, having studied but | ||||
little, must need take as their standard of beauty mere gold and | ||||
azure, and these, with supreme conceit, declare that they will not | ||||
give good work for miserable payment, and that they could do as well | ||||
as any other if they were well paid. But, ye foolish folks! cannot | ||||
such artists keep some good work, and then say: this is a costly | ||||
work and this more moderate and this is average work and show that | ||||
they can work at all prices? | ||||
A caution against one-sided study. | ||||
502. | ||||
HOW, IN IMPORTANT WORKS, A MAN SHOULD NOT TRUST ENTIRELY TO HIS | ||||
MEMORY WITHOUT CONDESCENDING TO DRAW FROM NATURE. | ||||
Any master who should venture to boast that he could remember all | ||||
the forms and effects of nature would certainly appear to me to be | ||||
graced with extreme ignorance, inasmuch as these effects are | ||||
infinite and our memory is not extensive enough to retain them. | ||||
Hence, O! painter, beware lest the lust of gain should supplant in | ||||
you the dignity of art; for the acquisition of glory is a much | ||||
greater thing than the glory of riches. Hence, for these and other | ||||
reasons which might be given, first strive in drawing to represent | ||||
your intention to the eye by expressive forms, and the idea | ||||
originally formed in your imagination; then go on taking out or | ||||
putting in, until you have satisfied yourself. Then have living men, | ||||
draped or nude, as you may have purposed in your work, and take care | ||||
that in dimensions and size, as determined by perspective, nothing | ||||
is left in the work which is not in harmony with reason and the | ||||
effects in nature. And this will be the way to win honour in your | ||||
art. | ||||
How to acquire universality (503-506). | ||||
503. | ||||
OF VARIETY IN THE FIGURES. | ||||
The painter should aim at universality, because there is a great | ||||
want of self-respect in doing one thing well and another badly, as | ||||
many do who study only the [rules of] measure and proportion in the | ||||
nude figure and do not seek after variety; for a man may be well | ||||
proportioned, or he may be fat and short, or tall and thin, or | ||||
medium. And a painter who takes no account of these varieties always | ||||
makes his figures on one pattern so that they might all be taken for | ||||
brothers; and this is a defect that demands stern reprehension. | ||||
504. | ||||
HOW SOMETHING MAY BE LEARNT EVERYWHERE. | ||||
Nature has beneficently provided that throughout the world you may | ||||
find something to imitate. | ||||
505. | ||||
OF THE MEANS OF ACQUIRING UNIVERSALITY. | ||||
It is an easy matter to men to acquire universality, for all | ||||
terrestrial animals resemble each other as to their limbs, that is | ||||
in their muscles, sinews and bones; and they do not vary excepting | ||||
in length or in thickness, as will be shown under Anatomy. But then | ||||
there are aquatic animals which are of great variety; I will not try | ||||
to convince the painter that there is any rule for them for they are | ||||
of infinite variety, and so is the insect tribe. | ||||
506. | ||||
PAINTING. | ||||
The mind of the painter must resemble a mirror, which always takes | ||||
the colour of the object it reflects and is completely occupied by | ||||
the images of as many objects as are in front of it. Therefore you | ||||
must know, Oh Painter! that you cannot be a good one if you are not | ||||
the universal master of representing by your art every kind of form | ||||
produced by nature. And this you will not know how to do if you do | ||||
not see them, and retain them in your mind. Hence as you go through | ||||
the fields, turn your attention to various objects, and, in turn | ||||
look now at this thing and now at that, collecting a store of divers | ||||
facts selected and chosen from those of less value. But do not do | ||||
like some painters who, when they are wearied with exercising their | ||||
fancy dismiss their work from their thoughts and take exercise in | ||||
walking for relaxation, but still keep fatigue in their mind which, | ||||
though they see various objects [around them], does not apprehend | ||||
them; but, even when they meet friends or relations and are saluted | ||||
by them, although they see and hear them, take no more cognisance of | ||||
them than if they had met so much empty air. | ||||
Useful games and exercises (507. 508). | ||||
507. | ||||
OF GAMES TO BE PLAYED BY THOSE WHO DRAW. | ||||
When, Oh draughtsmen, you desire to find relaxation in games you | ||||
should always practise such things as may be of use in your | ||||
profession, by giving your eye good practice in judging accurately | ||||
of the breadth and length of objects. Thus, to accustom your mind to | ||||
such things, let one of you draw a straight line at random on a | ||||
wall, and each of you, taking a blade of grass or of straw in his | ||||
hand, try to cut it to the length that the line drawn appears to him | ||||
to be, standing at a distance of 10 braccia; then each one may go up | ||||
to the line to measure the length he has judged it to be. And he who | ||||
has come nearest with his measure to the length of the pattern is | ||||
the best man, and the winner, and shall receive the prize you have | ||||
settled beforehand. Again you should take forshortened measures: | ||||
that is take a spear, or any other cane or reed, and fix on a point | ||||
at a certain distance; and let each one estimate how many times he | ||||
judges that its length will go into that distance. Again, who will | ||||
draw best a line one braccio long, which shall be tested by a | ||||
thread. And such games give occasion to good practice for the eye, | ||||
which is of the first importance in painting. | ||||
508. | ||||
A WAY OF DEVELOPING AND AROUSING THE MIND TO VARIOUS INVENTIONS. | ||||
I cannot forbear to mention among these precepts a new device for | ||||
study which, although it may seem but trivial and almost ludicrous, | ||||
is nevertheless extremely useful in arousing the mind to various | ||||
inventions. And this is, when you look at a wall spotted with | ||||
stains, or with a mixture of stones, if you have to devise some | ||||
scene, you may discover a resemblance to various landscapes, | ||||
beautified with mountains, rivers, rocks, trees, plains, wide | ||||
valleys and hills in varied arrangement; or again you may see | ||||
battles and figures in action; or strange faces and costumes, and an | ||||
endless variety of objects, which you could reduce to complete and | ||||
well drawn forms. And these appear on such walls confusedly, like | ||||
the sound of bells in whose jangle you may find any name or word you | ||||
choose to imagine. | ||||
II. | ||||
THE ARTIST'S STUDIO.--INSTRUMENTS AND HELPS FOR THE APPLICATION OF | ||||
PERSPECTIVE.--ON JUDGING OF A PICTURE. | ||||
On the size of the studio. | ||||
509. | ||||
Small rooms or dwellings discipline the mind, large ones weaken it. | ||||
On the construction of windows (510-512). | ||||
510. | ||||
The larger the wall the less the light will be. | ||||
511. | ||||
The different kinds of light afforded in cellars by various forms of | ||||
windows. The least useful and the coldest is the window at _a_. The | ||||
most useful, the lightest and warmest and most open to the sky is | ||||
the window at _b_. The window at _c_ is of medium utility. | ||||
[Footnote: From a reference to the notes on the right light for | ||||
painting it becomes evident that the observations made on | ||||
cellar-windows have a direct bearing on the construction of the | ||||
studio-window. In the diagram _b_ as well as in that under No. 510 | ||||
the window-opening is reduced to a minimum, but only, it would seem, | ||||
in order to emphasize the advantage of walls constructed on the plan | ||||
there shown.] | ||||
512. | ||||
OF THE PAINTER'S WINDOW AND ITS ADVANTAGE. | ||||
The painter who works from nature should have a window, which he can | ||||
raise and lower. The reason is that sometimes you will want to | ||||
finish a thing you are drawing, close to the light. | ||||
Let _a b c d_ be the chest on which the work may be raised or | ||||
lowered, so that the work moves up and down and not the painter. And | ||||
every evening you can let down the work and shut it up above so that | ||||
in the evening it may be in the fashion of a chest which, when shut | ||||
up, may serve the purpose of a bench. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXXI, No. 2. In this plate the lines have | ||||
unfortunately lost their sharpness, for the accidental loss of the | ||||
negative has necessitated a reproduction from a positive. But having | ||||
formerly published this sketch by another process, in VON LUTZOW'S | ||||
_Zeitschrift fur bildende Kunst_ (Vol. XVII, pg. 13) I have | ||||
reproduced it here in the text. The sharpness of the outline in the | ||||
original sketch is here preserved but it gives it from the reversed | ||||
side.] | ||||
On the best light for painting (513-520). | ||||
513. | ||||
Which light is best for drawing from nature; whether high or low, or | ||||
large or small, or strong and broad, or strong and small, or broad | ||||
and weak or small and weak? | ||||
[Footnote: The question here put is unanswered in the original MS.] | ||||
514. | ||||
OF THE QUALITY OF THE LIGHT. | ||||
A broad light high up and not too strong will render the details of | ||||
objects very agreeable. | ||||
515. | ||||
THAT THE LIGHT FOR DRAWING FROM NATURE SHOULD BE HIGH UP. | ||||
The light for drawing from nature should come from the North in | ||||
order that it may not vary. And if you have it from the South, keep | ||||
the window screened with cloth, so that with the sun shining the | ||||
whole day the light may not vary. The height of the light should be | ||||
so arranged as that every object shall cast a shadow on the ground | ||||
of the same length as itself. | ||||
516. | ||||
THE KIND OF LIGHT REQUISITE FOR PAINTING LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
An object will display the greatest difference of light and shade | ||||
when it is seen in the strongest light, as by sunlight, or, at | ||||
night, by the light of a fire. But this should not be much used in | ||||
painting because the works remain crude and ungraceful. | ||||
An object seen in a moderate light displays little difference in the | ||||
light and shade; and this is the case towards evening or when the | ||||
day is cloudy, and works then painted are tender and every kind of | ||||
face becomes graceful. Thus, in every thing extremes are to be | ||||
avoided: Too much light gives crudeness; too little prevents our | ||||
seeing. The medium is best. | ||||
OF SMALL LIGHTS. | ||||
Again, lights cast from a small window give strong differences of | ||||
light and shade, all the more if the room lighted by it be large, | ||||
and this is not good for painting. | ||||
517. | ||||
PAINTING. | ||||
The luminous air which enters by passing through orifices in walls | ||||
into dark rooms will render the place less dark in proportion as the | ||||
opening cuts into the walls which surround and cover in the | ||||
pavement. | ||||
518. | ||||
OF THE QUALITY OF LIGHT. | ||||
In proportion to the number of times that _a b_ goes into _c d_ will | ||||
it be more luminous than _c d_. And similarly, in proportion as the | ||||
point _e_ goes into _c d_ will it be more luminous than _c d;_ and | ||||
this light is useful for carvers of delicate work. [Footnote 5: For | ||||
the same reason a window thus constructed would be convenient for an | ||||
illuminator or a miniature painter.] | ||||
[Footnote: M. RAVAISSON in his edition of the Paris MS. A remarks on | ||||
this passage: _"La figure porte les lettres_ f _et_ g, _auxquelles | ||||
rien ne renvoie dans l'explication; par consequent, cette | ||||
explication est incomplete. La figure semblerait, d'ailleurs, se | ||||
rapporter a l'effet de la reflexion par un miroir concave."_ So far | ||||
as I can see the text is not imperfect, nor is the sense obscure. It | ||||
is hardly necessary to observe that _c d_ here indicate the wall of | ||||
the room opposite to the window _e_ and the semicircle described by | ||||
_f g_ stands for the arch of the sky; this occurs in various | ||||
diagrams, for example under 511. A similar semicircle, Pl III, No. 2 | ||||
(and compare No. 149) is expressly called '_orizonte_' in writing.] | ||||
519. | ||||
That the light should fall upon a picture from one window only. This | ||||
may be seen in the case of objects in this form. If you want to | ||||
represent a round ball at a certain height you must make it oval in | ||||
this shape, and stand so far off as that by foreshortening it | ||||
appears round. | ||||
520. | ||||
OF SELECTING THE LIGHT WHICH GIVES MOST GRACE TO FACES. | ||||
If you should have a court yard that you can at pleasure cover with | ||||
a linen awning that light will be good. Or when you want to take a | ||||
portrait do it in dull weather, or as evening falls, making the | ||||
sitter stand with his back to one of the walls of the court yard. | ||||
Note in the streets, as evening falls, the faces of the men and | ||||
women, and when the weather is dull, what softness and delicacy you | ||||
may perceive in them. Hence, Oh Painter! have a court arranged with | ||||
the walls tinted black and a narrow roof projecting within the | ||||
walls. It should be 10 braccia wide and 20 braccia long and 10 | ||||
braccia high and covered with a linen awning; or else paint a work | ||||
towards evening or when it is cloudy or misty, and this is a perfect | ||||
light. | ||||
On various helps in preparing a picture (521-530). | ||||
521. | ||||
To draw a nude figure from nature, or any thing else, hold in your | ||||
hand a plumb-line to enable you to judge of the relative position | ||||
of objects. | ||||
522. | ||||
OF DRAWING AN OBJECT. | ||||
When you draw take care to set up a principal line which you must | ||||
observe all throughout the object you are drawing; every thing | ||||
should bear relation to the direction of this principal line. | ||||
523. | ||||
OF A MODE OF DRAWING A PLACE ACCURATELY. | ||||
Have a piece of glass as large as a half sheet of royal folio paper | ||||
and set thus firmly in front of your eyes that is, between your eye | ||||
and the thing you want to draw; then place yourself at a distance of | ||||
2/3 of a braccia from the glass fixing your head with a machine in | ||||
such a way that you cannot move it at all. Then shut or entirely | ||||
cover one eye and with a brush or red chalk draw upon the glass that | ||||
which you see beyond it; then trace it on paper from the glass, | ||||
afterwards transfer it onto good paper, and paint it if you like, | ||||
carefully attending to the arial perspective. | ||||
HOW TO LEARN TO PLACE YOUR FIGURES CORRECTLY. | ||||
If you want to acquire a practice of good and correct attitudes for | ||||
your figures, make a square frame or net, and square it out with | ||||
thread; place this between your eye and the nude model you are | ||||
drawing, and draw these same squares on the paper on which you mean | ||||
to draw the figure, but very delicately. Then place a pellet of wax | ||||
on a spot of the net which will serve as a fixed point, which, | ||||
whenever you look at your model, must cover the pit of the throat; | ||||
or, if his back is turned, it may cover one of the vertebrae of the | ||||
neck. Thus these threads will guide you as to each part of the body | ||||
which, in any given attitude will be found below the pit of the | ||||
throat, or the angles of the shoulders, or the nipples, or hips and | ||||
other parts of the body; and the transverse lines of the net will | ||||
show you how much the figure is higher over the leg on which it is | ||||
posed than over the other, and the same with the hips, and the knees | ||||
and the feet. But always fix the net perpendicularly so that all the | ||||
divisions that you see the model divided into by the net work | ||||
correspond with your drawing of the model on the net work you have | ||||
sketched. The squares you draw may be as much smaller than those of | ||||
the net as you wish that your figure should be smaller than nature. | ||||
Afterwards remember when drawing figures, to use the rule of the | ||||
corresponding proportions of the limbs as you have learnt it from | ||||
the frame and net. This should be 3 braccia and a half high and 3 | ||||
braccia wide; 7 braccia distant from you and 1 braccio from the | ||||
model. | ||||
[Footnote: Leonardo is commonly credited with the invention of the | ||||
arrangement of a plate of glass commonly known as the "vertical | ||||
plane." Professor E. VON BRUCKE in his _"Bruchstucke aus der Theorie | ||||
der bildenden Kunste,"_ Leipzig 1877, pg. 3, writes on this | ||||
contrivance. _"Unsere Glastafel ist die sogenannte Glastafel des | ||||
Leonardo da Vinci, die in Gestalt einer Glastafel vorgestellte | ||||
Bildflache."_] | ||||
524. | ||||
A METHOD OF DRAWING AN OBJECT IN RELIEF AT NIGHT. | ||||
Place a sheet of not too transparent paper between the relievo and | ||||
the light and you can draw thus very well. | ||||
[Footnote: Bodies thus illuminated will show on the surface of the | ||||
paper how the copyist has to distribute light and shade.] | ||||
525. | ||||
If you want to represent a figure on a wall, the wall being | ||||
foreshortened, while the figure is to appear in its proper form, and | ||||
as standing free from the wall, you must proceed thus: have a thin | ||||
plate of iron and make a small hole in the centre; this hole must be | ||||
round. Set a light close to it in such a position as that it shines | ||||
through the central hole, then place any object or figure you please | ||||
so close to the wall that it touches it and draw the outline of the | ||||
shadow on the wall; then fill in the shade and add the lights; place | ||||
the person who is to see it so that he looks through that same hole | ||||
where at first the light was; and you will never be able to persuade | ||||
yourself that the image is not detached from the wall. | ||||
[Footnote: _uno piccolo spiracelo nel mezzo_. M. RAVAISSON, in his | ||||
edition of MS. A (Paris), p. 52, reads _nel muro_--evidently a | ||||
mistake for _nel mezzo_ which is quite plainly written; and he | ||||
translates it _"fait lui une petite ouverture dans le mur,"_ adding | ||||
in a note: _"les mots 'dans le mur' paraissent etre de trop. | ||||
Leonardo a du les ecrire par distraction"_ But _'nel mezzo'_ is | ||||
clearly legible even on the photograph facsimile given by Ravaisson | ||||
himself, and the objection he raises disappears at once. It is not | ||||
always wise or safe to try to prove our author's absence of mind or | ||||
inadvertence by apparent difficulties in the sense or connection of | ||||
the text.] | ||||
526. | ||||
TO DRAW A FIGURE ON A WALL 12 BRACCIA HIGH WHICH SHALL LOOK 24 | ||||
BRACCIA HIGH. | ||||
If you wish to draw a figure or any other object to look 24 braccia | ||||
high you must do it in this way. First, on the surface _m r_ draw | ||||
half the man you wish to represent; then the other half; then put on | ||||
the vault _m n_ [the rest of] the figure spoken of above; first set | ||||
out the vertical plane on the floor of a room of the same shape as | ||||
the wall with the coved part on which you are to paint your figure. | ||||
Then, behind it, draw a figure set out in profile of whatever size | ||||
you please, and draw lines from it to the point _f_ and, as these | ||||
lines cut _m n_ on the vertical plane, so will the figure come on | ||||
the wall, of which the vertical plane gives a likeness, and you will | ||||
have all the [relative] heights and prominences of the figure. And | ||||
the breadth or thickness which are on the upright wall _m n_ are to | ||||
be drawn in their proper form, since, as the wall recedes the figure | ||||
will be foreshortened by itself; but [that part of] the figure which | ||||
goes into the cove you must foreshorten, as if it were standing | ||||
upright; this diminution you must set out on a flat floor and there | ||||
must stand the figure which is to be transferred from the vertical | ||||
plane _r n_[Footnote 17: _che leverai dalla pariete r n_. The | ||||
letters refer to the larger sketch, No. 3 on Pl. XXXI.] in its real | ||||
size and reduce it once more on a vertical plane; and this will be a | ||||
good method [Footnote 18: Leonardo here says nothing as to how the | ||||
image foreshortened by perspective and thus produced on the vertical | ||||
plane is to be transferred to the wall; but from what is said in | ||||
Nos. 525 and 523 we may conclude that he was familiar with the | ||||
process of casting the enlarged shadow of a squaring net on the | ||||
surface of a wall to guide him in drawing the figure. | ||||
_Pariete di rilieuo; "sur une parai en relief"_ (RAVAISSON). _"Auf | ||||
einer Schnittlinie zum Aufrichten"_ (LUDWIG). The explanation of | ||||
this puzzling expression must be sought in No. 545, lines 15-17.]. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXXI. 3. The second sketch, which in the plate is | ||||
incomplete, is here reproduced and completed from the original to | ||||
illustrate the text. In the original the larger diagram is placed | ||||
between lines 5 and 6. | ||||
1. 2. C. A. 157a; 463a has the similar heading: '_del cressciere | ||||
della figura_', and the text begins: "_Se voli fare 1a figura | ||||
grande_ b c" but here it breaks off. The translation here given | ||||
renders the meaning of the passage as I think it must be understood. | ||||
The MS. is perfectly legible and the construction of the sentence is | ||||
simple and clear; difficulties can only arise from the very fullness | ||||
of the meaning, particularly towards the end of the passage.] | ||||
527. | ||||
If you would to draw a cube in an angle of a wall, first draw the | ||||
object in its own proper shape and raise it onto a vertical plane | ||||
until it resembles the angle in which the said object is to be | ||||
represented. | ||||
528. | ||||
Why are paintings seen more correctly in a mirror than out of it? | ||||
529. | ||||
HOW THE MIRROR IS THE MASTER [AND GUIDE] OF PAINTERS. | ||||
When you want to see if your picture corresponds throughout with the | ||||
objects you have drawn from nature, take a mirror and look in that | ||||
at the reflection of the real things, and compare the reflected | ||||
image with your picture, and consider whether the subject of the two | ||||
images duly corresponds in both, particularly studying the mirror. | ||||
You should take the mirror for your guide--that is to say a flat | ||||
mirror--because on its surface the objects appear in many respects | ||||
as in a painting. Thus you see, in a painting done on a flat | ||||
surface, objects which appear in relief, and in the mirror--also a | ||||
flat surface--they look the same. The picture has one plane surface | ||||
and the same with the mirror. The picture is intangible, in so far | ||||
as that which appears round and prominent cannot be grasped in the | ||||
hands; and it is the same with the mirror. And since you can see | ||||
that the mirror, by means of outlines, shadows and lights, makes | ||||
objects appear in relief, you, who have in your colours far stronger | ||||
lights and shades than those in the mirror, can certainly, if you | ||||
compose your picture well, make that also look like a natural scene | ||||
reflected in a large mirror. | ||||
[Footnote: I understand the concluding lines of this passage as | ||||
follows: If you draw the upper half a figure on a large sheet of | ||||
paper laid out on the floor of a room (_sala be piana_) to the same | ||||
scale (_con le sue vere grosseze_) as the lower half, already drawn | ||||
upon the wall (lines 10, 11)you must then reduce them on a '_pariete | ||||
di rilievo_,' a curved vertical plane which serves as a model to | ||||
reproduce the form of the vault.] | ||||
530. | ||||
OF JUDGING YOUR OWN PICTURES. | ||||
We know very well that errors are better recognised in the works of | ||||
others than in our own; and that often, while reproving little | ||||
faults in others, you may ignore great ones in yourself. To avoid | ||||
such ignorance, in the first place make yourself a master of | ||||
perspective, then acquire perfect knowledge of the proportions of | ||||
men and other animals, and also, study good architecture, that is so | ||||
far as concerns the forms of buildings and other objects which are | ||||
on the face of the earth; these forms are infinite, and the better | ||||
you know them the more admirable will your work be. And in cases | ||||
where you lack experience do not shrink from drawing them from | ||||
nature. But, to carry out my promise above [in the title]--I say | ||||
that when you paint you should have a flat mirror and often look at | ||||
your work as reflected in it, when you will see it reversed, and it | ||||
will appear to you like some other painter's work, so you will be | ||||
better able to judge of its faults than in any other way. Again, it | ||||
is well that you should often leave off work and take a little | ||||
relaxation, because, when you come back to it you are a better | ||||
judge; for sitting too close at work may greatly deceive you. Again, | ||||
it is good to retire to a distance because the work looks smaller | ||||
and your eye takes in more of it at a glance and sees more easily | ||||
the discords or disproportion in the limbs and colours of the | ||||
objects. | ||||
On the management of works (531. 532). | ||||
531. | ||||
OF A METHOD OF LEARNING WELL BY HEART. | ||||
When you want to know a thing you have studied in your memory | ||||
proceed in this way: When you have drawn the same thing so many | ||||
times that you think you know it by heart, test it by drawing it | ||||
without the model; but have the model traced on flat thin glass and | ||||
lay this on the drawing you have made without the model, and note | ||||
carefully where the tracing does not coincide with your drawing, and | ||||
where you find you have gone wrong; and bear in mind not to repeat | ||||
the same mistakes. Then return to the model, and draw the part in | ||||
which you were wrong again and again till you have it well in your | ||||
mind. If you have no flat glass for tracing on, take some very thin | ||||
kidts-kin parchment, well oiled and dried. And when you have used it | ||||
for one drawing you can wash it clean with a sponge and make a | ||||
second. | ||||
532. | ||||
THAT A PAINTER OUGHT TO BE CURIOUS TO HEAR THE OPINIONS OF EVERY ONE | ||||
ON HIS WORK. | ||||
Certainly while a man is painting he ought not to shrink from | ||||
hearing every opinion. For we know very well that a man, though he | ||||
may not be a painter, is familiar with the forms of other men and | ||||
very capable of judging whether they are hump backed, or have one | ||||
shoulder higher or lower than the other, or too big a mouth or nose, | ||||
and other defects; and, as we know that men are competent to judge | ||||
of the works of nature, how much more ought we to admit that they | ||||
can judge of our errors; since you know how much a man may be | ||||
deceived in his own work. And if you are not conscious of this in | ||||
yourself study it in others and profit by their faults. Therefore be | ||||
curious to hear with patience the opinions of others, consider and | ||||
weigh well whether those who find fault have ground or not for | ||||
blame, and, if so amend; but, if not make as though you had not | ||||
heard, or if he should be a man you esteem show him by argument the | ||||
cause of his mistake. | ||||
On the limitations of painting (533-535) | ||||
533. | ||||
HOW IN SMALL OBJECTS ERRORS ARE LESS EVIDENT THAN IN LARGE ONES. | ||||
In objects of minute size the extent of error is not so perceptible | ||||
as in large ones; and the reason is that if this small object is a | ||||
representation of a man or of some other animal, from the immense | ||||
diminution the details cannot be worked out by the artist with the | ||||
finish that is requisite. Hence it is not actually complete; and, | ||||
not being complete, its faults cannot be determined. For instance: | ||||
Look at a man at a distance of 300 braccia and judge attentively | ||||
whether he be handsome or ugly, or very remarkable or of ordinary | ||||
appearance. You will find that with the utmost effort you cannot | ||||
persuade yourself to decide. And the reason is that at such a | ||||
distance the man is so much diminished that the character of the | ||||
details cannot be determined. And if you wish to see how much this | ||||
man is diminished [by distance] hold one of your fingers at a span's | ||||
distance from your eye, and raise or lower it till the top joint | ||||
touches the feet of the figure you are looking at, and you will see | ||||
an incredible reduction. For this reason we often doubt as to the | ||||
person of a friend at a distance. | ||||
534. | ||||
WHY A PAINTING CAN NEVER APPEAR DETACHED AS NATURAL OBJECTS DO. | ||||
Painters often fall into despair of imitating nature when they see | ||||
their pictures fail in that relief and vividness which objects have | ||||
that are seen in a mirror; while they allege that they have colours | ||||
which for brightness or depth far exceed the strength of light and | ||||
shade in the reflections in the mirror, thus displaying their own | ||||
ignorance rather than the real cause, because they do not know it. | ||||
It is impossible that painted objects should appear in such relief | ||||
as to resemble those reflected in the mirror, although both are seen | ||||
on a flat surface, unless they are seen with only one eye; and the | ||||
reason is that two eyes see one object behind another as _a_ and _b_ | ||||
see _m_ and _n_. _m_ cannot exactly occupy [the space of] _n_ | ||||
because the base of the visual lines is so broad that the second | ||||
body is seen beyond the first. But if you close one eye, as at _s_ | ||||
the body _f_ will conceal _r_, because the line of sight proceeds | ||||
from a single point and makes its base in the first body, whence the | ||||
second, of the same size, can never be seen. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage contains the solution of the problem | ||||
proposed in No. 29, lines 10-14. Leonardo was evidently familiar | ||||
with the law of optics on which the construction of the stereoscope | ||||
depends. Compare E. VON BRUCKE, _Bruchstucke aus der Theorie der | ||||
bildenden Kunste_, pg. 69: "_Schon Leonardo da Vinci wusste, dass | ||||
ein noch so gut gemaltes Bild nie den vollen Eindruck der | ||||
Korperlichkeit geben kann, wie ihn die Natur selbst giebt. Er | ||||
erklart dies auch in Kap. LIII und Kap. CCCXLI_ (ed. DU FRESNE) | ||||
_des_ 'Trattato' _in sachgemasser Weise aus dem Sehen mit beiden | ||||
Augen_." | ||||
Chap. 53 of DU FRESNE'S edition corresponds to No. 534 of this | ||||
work.] | ||||
535. | ||||
WHY OF TWO OBJECTS OF EQUAL SIZE A PAINTED ONE WILL LOOK LARGER THAN | ||||
A SOLID ONE. | ||||
The reason of this is not so easy to demonstrate as many others. | ||||
Still I will endeavour to accomplish it, if not wholly, at any rate | ||||
in part. The perspective of diminution demonstrates by reason, that | ||||
objects diminish in proportion as they are farther from the eye, and | ||||
this reasoning is confirmed by experience. Hence, the lines of sight | ||||
that extend between the object and the eye, when they are directed | ||||
to the surface of a painting are all intersected at uniform limits, | ||||
while those lines which are directed towards a piece of sculpture | ||||
are intersected at various limits and are of various lengths. The | ||||
lines which are longest extend to a more remote limb than the others | ||||
and therefore that limb looks smaller. As there are numerous lines | ||||
each longer than the others--since there are numerous parts, each | ||||
more remote than the others and these, being farther off, | ||||
necessarily appear smaller, and by appearing smaller it follows that | ||||
their diminution makes the whole mass of the object look smaller. | ||||
But this does not occur in painting; since the lines of sight all | ||||
end at the same distance there can be no diminution, hence the parts | ||||
not being diminished the whole object is undiminished, and for this | ||||
reason painting does not diminish, as a piece of sculpture does. | ||||
On the choice of a position (536-537) | ||||
536. | ||||
HOW HIGH THE POINT OF SIGHT SHOULD BE PLACED. | ||||
The point of sight must be at the level of the eye of an ordinary | ||||
man, and the farthest limit of the plain where it touches the sky | ||||
must be placed at the level of that line where the earth and sky | ||||
meet; excepting mountains, which are independent of it. | ||||
537. | ||||
OF THE WAY TO DRAW FIGURES FOR HISTORICAL PICTURES. | ||||
The painter must always study on the wall on which he is to picture | ||||
a story the height of the position where he wishes to arrange his | ||||
figures; and when drawing his studies for them from nature he must | ||||
place himself with his eye as much below the object he is drawing | ||||
as, in the picture, it will have to be above the eye of the | ||||
spectator. Otherwise the work will look wrong. | ||||
The apparent size of figures in a picture (538-539) | ||||
538. | ||||
OF PLACING A FIGURE IN THE FOREGROUND OF A HISTORICAL PICTURE. | ||||
You must make the foremost figure in the picture less than the size | ||||
of nature in proportion to the number of braccia at which you place | ||||
it from the front line, and make the others in proportion by the | ||||
above rule. | ||||
539. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
You are asked, O Painter, why the figures you draw on a small scale | ||||
according to the laws of perspective do not appear--notwithstanding | ||||
the demonstration of distance--as large as real ones--their height | ||||
being the same as in those painted on the wall. | ||||
And why [painted] objects seen at a small distance appear larger | ||||
than the real ones? | ||||
The right position of the artist, when painting, and of the | ||||
spectator (540-547) | ||||
540. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
When you draw from nature stand at a distance of 3 times the height | ||||
of the object you wish to draw. | ||||
541. | ||||
OF DRAWING FROM RELIEF. | ||||
In drawing from the round the draughtsman should so place himself | ||||
that the eye of the figure he is drawing is on a level with his own. | ||||
This should be done with any head he may have to represent from | ||||
nature because, without exception, the figures or persons you meet | ||||
in the streets have their eyes on the same level as your own; and if | ||||
you place them higher or lower you will see that your drawing will | ||||
not be true. | ||||
542. | ||||
WHY GROUPS OF FIGURES ONE ABOVE ANOTHER ARE TO BE AVOIDED. | ||||
The universal practice which painters adopt on the walls of chapels | ||||
is greatly and reasonably to be condemned. Inasmuch as they | ||||
represent one historical subject on one level with a landscape and | ||||
buildings, and then go up a step and paint another, varying the | ||||
point [of sight], and then a third and a fourth, in such a way as | ||||
that on one wall there are 4 points of sight, which is supreme folly | ||||
in such painters. We know that the point of sight is opposite the | ||||
eye of the spectator of the scene; and if you would [have me] tell | ||||
you how to represent the life of a saint divided into several | ||||
pictures on one and the same wall, I answer that you must set out | ||||
the foreground with its point of sight on a level with the eye of | ||||
the spectator of the scene, and upon this plane represent the more | ||||
important part of the story large and then, diminishing by degrees | ||||
the figures, and the buildings on various hills and open spaces, you | ||||
can represent all the events of the history. And on the remainder of | ||||
the wall up to the top put trees, large as compared with the | ||||
figures, or angels if they are appropriate to the story, or birds or | ||||
clouds or similar objects; otherwise do not trouble yourself with it | ||||
for your whole work will be wrong. | ||||
543. | ||||
A PICTURE OF OBJECTS IN PERSPECTIVE WILL LOOK MORE LIFELIKE WHEN | ||||
SEEN FROM THE POINT FROM WHICH THE OBJECTS WERE DRAWN. | ||||
If you want to represent an object near to you which is to have the | ||||
effect of nature, it is impossible that your perspective should not | ||||
look wrong, with every false relation and disagreement of proportion | ||||
that can be imagined in a wretched work, unless the spectator, when | ||||
he looks at it, has his eye at the very distance and height and | ||||
direction where the eye or the point of sight was placed in doing | ||||
this perspective. Hence it would be necessary to make a window, or | ||||
rather a hole, of the size of your face through which you can look | ||||
at the work; and if you do this, beyond all doubt your work, if it | ||||
is correct as to light and shade, will have the effect of nature; | ||||
nay you will hardly persuade yourself that those objects are | ||||
painted; otherwise do not trouble yourself about it, unless indeed | ||||
you make your view at least 20 times as far off as the greatest | ||||
width or height of the objects represented, and this will satisfy | ||||
any spectator placed anywhere opposite to the picture. | ||||
If you want the proof briefly shown, take a piece of wood in the | ||||
form of a little column, eight times as high as it is thick, like a | ||||
column without any plinth or capital; then mark off on a flat wall | ||||
40 equal spaces, equal to its width so that between them they make | ||||
40 columns resembling your little column; you then must fix, | ||||
opposite the centre space, and at 4 braccia from the wall, a thin | ||||
strip of iron with a small round hole in the middle about as large | ||||
as a big pearl. Close to this hole place a light touching it. Then | ||||
place your column against each mark on the wall and draw the outline | ||||
of its shadow; afterwards shade it and look through the hole in the | ||||
iron plate. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original there is a wide space between lines 3 and | ||||
4 in which we find two sketches not belonging to the text. It is | ||||
unnecessary to give prominence to the points in which my reading | ||||
differs from that of M. RAVAISSON or to justify myself, since they | ||||
are all of secondary importance and can also be immediately verified | ||||
from the photograph facsimile in his edition.] | ||||
544. | ||||
A diminished object should be seen from the same distance, height | ||||
and direction as the point of sight of your eye, or else your | ||||
knowledge will produce no good effect. | ||||
And if you will not, or cannot, act on this principle--because as | ||||
the plane on which you paint is to be seen by several persons you | ||||
would need several points of sight which would make it look | ||||
discordant and wrong--place yourself at a distance of at least 10 | ||||
times the size of the objects. | ||||
The lesser fault you can fall into then, will be that of | ||||
representing all the objects in the foreground of their proper size, | ||||
and on whichever side you are standing the objects thus seen will | ||||
diminish themselves while the spaces between them will have no | ||||
definite ratio. For, if you place yourself in the middle of a | ||||
straight row [of objects], and look at several columns arranged in a | ||||
line you will see, beyond a few columns separated by intervals, that | ||||
the columns touch; and beyond where they touch they cover each | ||||
other, till the last column projects but very little beyond the last | ||||
but one. Thus the spaces between the columns are by degrees entirely | ||||
lost. So, if your method of perspective is good, it will produce the | ||||
same effect; this effect results from standing near the line in | ||||
which the columns are placed. This method is not satisfactory unless | ||||
the objects seen are viewed from a small hole, in the middle of | ||||
which is your point of sight; but if you proceed thus your work will | ||||
be perfect and will deceive the beholder, who will see the columns | ||||
as they are here figured. | ||||
Here the eye is in the middle, at the point _a_ and near to the | ||||
columns. | ||||
[Footnote: The diagram which stands above this chapter in the | ||||
original with the note belonging to it: "a b _e la ripruova_" (_a b_ | ||||
is the proof) has obviously no connection with the text. The second | ||||
sketch alone is reproduced and stands in the original between lines | ||||
22 and 23.] | ||||
545. | ||||
If you cannot arrange that those who look at your work should stand | ||||
at one particular point, when constructing your work, stand back | ||||
until your eye is at least 20 times as far off as the greatest | ||||
height and width of your work. This will make so little difference | ||||
when the eye of the spectator moves, that it will be hardly | ||||
appreciable, and it will look very good. | ||||
If the point of sight is at _t_ you would make the figures on the | ||||
circle _d b e_ all of one size, as each of them bears the same | ||||
relation to the point _t_. But consider the diagram given below and | ||||
you will see that this is wrong, and why I shall make _b_ smaller | ||||
than _d e_ [Footnote 8: The second diagram of this chapter stands in | ||||
the original between lines 8 and 9.]. | ||||
It is easy to understand that if 2 objects equal to each other are | ||||
placed side by side the one at 3 braccia distance looks smaller than | ||||
that placed at 2 braccia. This however is rather theoretical than | ||||
for practice, because you stand close by [Footnote 11: Instead of | ||||
'_se preso_' (=_sie presso_) M. RAVAISSON reads '_sempre se_' which | ||||
gives rise to the unmeaning rendering: '_parceque toujours_ ...']. | ||||
All the objects in the foreground, whether large or small, are to be | ||||
drawn of their proper size, and if you see them from a distance they | ||||
will appear just as they ought, and if you see them close they will | ||||
diminish of themselves. | ||||
[Footnote 15: Compare No. 526 line 18.] Take care that the vertical | ||||
plan on which you work out the perspective of the objects seen is of | ||||
the same form as the wall on which the work is to be executed. | ||||
546. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The size of the figures represented ought to show you the distance | ||||
they are seen from. If you see a figure as large as nature you know | ||||
it appears to be close to the eye. | ||||
547. | ||||
WHERE A SPECTATOR SHOULD STAND TO LOOK AT A PICTURE. | ||||
Supposing _a b_ to be the picture and _d_ to be the light, I say | ||||
that if you place yourself between _c_ and _e_ you will not | ||||
understand the picture well and particularly if it is done in oils, | ||||
or still more if it is varnished, because it will be lustrous and | ||||
somewhat of the nature of a mirror. And for this reason the nearer | ||||
you go towards the point _c_, the less you will see, because the | ||||
rays of light falling from the window on the picture are reflected | ||||
to that point. But if you place yourself between _e_ and _d_ you | ||||
will get a good view of it, and the more so as you approach the | ||||
point _d_, because that spot is least exposed to these reflected | ||||
rays of light. | ||||
III. | ||||
THE PRACTICAL METHODS OF LIGHT AND SHADE AND AERIAL PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Gradations of light and shade. | ||||
548. | ||||
OF PAINTING: OF THE DARKNESS OF THE SHADOWS, OR I MAY SAY, THE | ||||
BRIGHTNESS OF THE LIGHTS. | ||||
Although practical painters attribute to all shaded objects--trees, | ||||
fields, hair, beards and skin--four degrees of darkness in each | ||||
colour they use: that is to say first a dark foundation, secondly a | ||||
spot of colour somewhat resembling the form of the details, thirdly | ||||
a somewhat brighter and more defined portion, fourthly the lights | ||||
which are more conspicuous than other parts of the figure; still to | ||||
me it appears that these gradations are infinite upon a continuous | ||||
surface which is in itself infinitely divisible, and I prove it | ||||
thus:--[Footnote 7: See Pl. XXXI, No. 1; the two upper sketches.] | ||||
Let _a g_ be a continuous surface and let _d_ be the light which | ||||
illuminates it; I say--by the 4th [proposition] which says that that | ||||
side of an illuminated body is most highly lighted which is nearest | ||||
to the source of light--that therefore _g_ must be darker than _c_ | ||||
in proportion as the line _d g_ is longer than the line _d c_, and | ||||
consequently that these gradations of light--or rather of shadow, | ||||
are not 4 only, but may be conceived of as infinite, because _c d_ | ||||
is a continuous surface and every continuous surface is infinitely | ||||
divisible; hence the varieties in the length of lines extending | ||||
between the light and the illuminated object are infinite, and the | ||||
proportion of the light will be the same as that of the length of | ||||
the lines between them; extending from the centre of the luminous | ||||
body to the surface of the illuminated object. | ||||
On the choice of light for a picture (549-554). | ||||
549. | ||||
HOW THE PAINTER MUST PLACE HIMSELF WITH REFERENCE TO THE LIGHT, TO | ||||
GIVE THE EFFECT OF RELIEF. | ||||
Let _a b_ be the window, _m_ the point of light. I say that on | ||||
whichever side the painter places himself he will be well placed if | ||||
only his eye is between the shaded and the illuminated portions of | ||||
the object he is drawing; and this place you will find by putting | ||||
yourself between the point _m_ and the division between the shadow | ||||
and the light on the object to be drawn. | ||||
550. | ||||
THAT SHADOWS CAST BY A PARTICULAR LIGHT SHOULD BE AVOIDED, BECAUSE | ||||
THEY ARE EQUALLY STRONG AT THE ENDS AND AT THE BEGINNING. | ||||
The shadows cast by the sun or any other particular light have not a | ||||
pleasing effect on the body to which they belong, because the parts | ||||
remain confuse, being divided by distinct outlines of light and | ||||
shade. And the shadows are of equal strength at the end and at the | ||||
beginning. | ||||
551. | ||||
HOW LIGHT SHOULD BE THROWN UPON FIGURES. | ||||
The light must be arranged in accordance with the natural conditions | ||||
under which you wish to represent your figures: that is, if you | ||||
represent them in the sunshine make the shadows dark with large | ||||
spaces of light, and mark their shadows and those of all the | ||||
surrounding objects strongly on the ground. And if you represent | ||||
them as in dull weather give little difference of light and shade, | ||||
without any shadows at their feet. If you represent them as within | ||||
doors, make a strong difference between the lights and shadows, with | ||||
shadows on the ground. If the window is screened and the walls | ||||
white, there will be little difference of light. If it is lighted by | ||||
firelight make the high lights ruddy and strong, and the shadows | ||||
dark, and those cast on the walls and on the floor will be clearly | ||||
defined and the farther they are from the body the broader and | ||||
longer will they be. If the light is partly from the fire and partly | ||||
from the outer day, that of day will be the stronger and that of the | ||||
fire almost as red as fire itself. Above all see that the figures | ||||
you paint are broadly lighted and from above, that is to say all | ||||
living persons that you paint; for you will see that all the people | ||||
you meet out in the street are lighted from above, and you must know | ||||
that if you saw your most intimate friend with a light [on his face] | ||||
from below you would find it difficult to recognise him. | ||||
552. | ||||
OF HELPING THE APPARENT RELIEF OF A PICTURE BY GIVING IT ARTIFICIAL | ||||
LIGHT AND SHADE. | ||||
To increase relief of a picture you may place, between your figure | ||||
and the solid object on which its shadow falls, a line of bright | ||||
light, dividing the figure from the object in shadow. And on the | ||||
same object you shall represent two light parts which will surround | ||||
the shadow cast upon the wall by the figure placed opposite [6]; and | ||||
do this frequently with the limbs which you wish should stand out | ||||
somewhat from the body they belong to; particularly when the arms | ||||
cross the front of the breast show, between the shadow cast by the | ||||
arms on the breast and the shadow on the arms themselves, a little | ||||
light seeming to fall through a space between the breast and the | ||||
arms; and the more you wish the arm to look detached from the breast | ||||
the broader you must make the light; always contrive also to arrange | ||||
the figures against the background in such a way as that the parts | ||||
in shadow are against a light background and the illuminated | ||||
portions against a dark background. | ||||
[Footnote 6: Compare the two diagrams under No. 565.] | ||||
553. | ||||
OF SITUATION. | ||||
Remember [to note] the situation of your figures; for the light and | ||||
shade will be one thing if the object is in a dark place with a | ||||
particular light, and another thing if it is in a light place with | ||||
direct sunlight; one thing in a dark place with a diffused evening | ||||
light or a cloudy sky, and another in the diffused light of the | ||||
atmosphere lighted by the sun. | ||||
554. | ||||
OF THE JUDGMENT TO BE MADE OF A PAINTER'S WORK. | ||||
First you must consider whether the figures have the relief required | ||||
by their situation and the light which illuminates them; for the | ||||
shadows should not be the same at the extreme ends of the | ||||
composition as in the middle, because it is one thing when figures | ||||
are surrounded by shadows and another when they have shadows only on | ||||
one side. Those which are in the middle of the picture are | ||||
surrounded by shadows, because they are shaded by the figures which | ||||
stand between them and the light. And those are lighted on one side | ||||
only which stand between the principal group and the light, because | ||||
where they do not look towards the light they face the group and the | ||||
darkness of the group is thrown on them: and where they do not face | ||||
the group they face the brilliant light and it is their own darkness | ||||
shadowing them, which appears there. | ||||
In the second place observe the distribution or arrangement of | ||||
figures, and whether they are distributed appropriately to the | ||||
circumstances of the story. Thirdly, whether the figures are | ||||
actively intent on their particular business. | ||||
555. | ||||
OF THE TREATMENT OF THE LIGHTS. | ||||
First give a general shadow to the whole of that extended part which | ||||
is away from the light. Then put in the half shadows and the strong | ||||
shadows, comparing them with each other and, in the same way give | ||||
the extended light in half tint, afterwards adding the half lights | ||||
and the high lights, likewise comparing them together. | ||||
The distribution of light and shade (556-559) | ||||
556. | ||||
OF SHADOWS ON BODIES. | ||||
When you represent the dark shadows in bodies in light and shade, | ||||
always show the cause of the shadow, and the same with reflections; | ||||
because the dark shadows are produced by dark objects and the | ||||
reflections by objects only moderately lighted, that is with | ||||
diminished light. And there is the same proportion between the | ||||
highly lighted part of a body and the part lighted by a reflection | ||||
as between the origin of the lights on the body and the origin of | ||||
the reflections. | ||||
557. | ||||
OF LIGHTS AND SHADOWS. | ||||
I must remind you to take care that every portion of a body, and | ||||
every smallest detail which is ever so little in relief, must be | ||||
given its proper importance as to light and shade. | ||||
558. | ||||
OF THE WAY TO MAKE THE SHADOW ON FIGURES CORRESPOND TO THE LIGHT AND | ||||
TO [THE COLOUR] OF THE BODY. | ||||
When you draw a figure and you wish to see whether the shadow is the | ||||
proper complement to the light, and neither redder nor yellower than | ||||
is the nature of the colour you wish to represent in shade, proceed | ||||
thus. Cast a shadow with your finger on the illuminated portion, and | ||||
if the accidental shadow that you have made is like the natural | ||||
shadow cast by your finger on your work, well and good; and by | ||||
putting your finger nearer or farther off, you can make darker or | ||||
lighter shadows, which you must compare with your own. | ||||
559. | ||||
OF SURROUNDING BODIES BY VARIOUS FORMS OF SHADOW. | ||||
Take care that the shadows cast upon the surface of the bodies by | ||||
different objects must undulate according to the various curves of | ||||
the limbs which cast the shadows, and of the objects on which they | ||||
are cast. | ||||
The juxtaposition of light and shade (560, 561). | ||||
560. | ||||
ON PAINTING. | ||||
The comparison of the various qualities of shadows and lights not | ||||
infrequently seems ambiguous and confused to the painter who desires | ||||
to imitate and copy the objects he sees. The reason is this: If you | ||||
see a white drapery side by side with a black one, that part of the | ||||
white drapery which lies against the black one will certainly look | ||||
much whiter than the part which lies against something whiter than | ||||
itself. [Footnote: It is evident from this that so early as in 1492 | ||||
Leonardo's writing in perspective was so far advanced that he could | ||||
quote his own statements.--As bearing on this subject compare what | ||||
is said in No. 280.] And the reason of this is shown in my [book on] | ||||
perspective. | ||||
561. | ||||
OF SHADOWS. | ||||
Where a shadow ends in the light, note carefully where it is paler | ||||
or deeper and where it is more or less indistinct towards the light; | ||||
and, above all, in [painting] youthful figures I remind you not to | ||||
make the shadow end like a stone, because flesh has a certain | ||||
transparency, as may be seen by looking at a hand held between the | ||||
eye and the sun, which shines through it ruddy and bright. Place the | ||||
most highly coloured part between the light and shadow. And to see | ||||
what shadow tint is needed on the flesh, cast a shadow on it with | ||||
your finger, and according as you wish to see it lighter or darker | ||||
hold your finger nearer to or farther from your picture, and copy | ||||
that [shadow]. | ||||
On the lighting of the background (562-565). | ||||
562. | ||||
OF THE BACKGROUNDS FOR PAINTED FIGURES. | ||||
The ground which surrounds the forms of any object you paint should | ||||
be darker than the high lights of those figures, and lighter than | ||||
their shadowed part: &c. | ||||
563. | ||||
OF THE BACKGROUND THAT THE PAINTER SHOULD ADOPT IN HIS WORKS. | ||||
Since experience shows us that all bodies are surrounded by light | ||||
and shade it is necessary that you, O Painter, should so arrange | ||||
that the side which is in light shall terminate against a dark body | ||||
and likewise that the shadow side shall terminate against a light | ||||
body. And by [following] this rule you will add greatly to the | ||||
relief of your figures. | ||||
564. | ||||
A most important part of painting consists in the backgrounds of the | ||||
objects represented; against these backgrounds the outlines of | ||||
those natural objects which are convex are always visible, and also | ||||
the forms of these bodies against the background, even though the | ||||
colours of the bodies should be the same as that of the background. | ||||
This is caused by the convex edges of the objects not being | ||||
illuminated in the same way as, by the same light, the background is | ||||
illuminated, since these edges will often be lighter or darker than | ||||
the background. But if the edge is of the same colour as the | ||||
background, beyond a doubt it will in that part of the picture | ||||
interfere with your perception of the outline, and such a choice in | ||||
a picture ought to be rejected by the judgment of good painters, | ||||
inasmuch as the purpose of the painter is to make his figures appear | ||||
detached from the background; while in the case here described the | ||||
contrary occurs, not only in the picture, but in the objects | ||||
themselves. | ||||
565. | ||||
That you ought, when representing objects above the eye and on one | ||||
side--if you wish them to look detached from the wall--to show, | ||||
between the shadow on the object and the shadow it casts a middle | ||||
light, so that the body will appear to stand away from the wall. | ||||
On the lighting of white objects. | ||||
566. | ||||
HOW WHITE BODIES SHOULD BE REPRESENTED. | ||||
If you are representing a white body let it be surrounded by ample | ||||
space, because as white has no colour of its own, it is tinged and | ||||
altered in some degree by the colour of the objects surrounding it. | ||||
If you see a woman dressed in white in the midst of a landscape, | ||||
that side which is towards the sun is bright in colour, so much so | ||||
that in some portions it will dazzle the eyes like the sun itself; | ||||
and the side which is towards the atmosphere,--luminous through | ||||
being interwoven with the sun's rays and penetrated by them--since | ||||
the atmosphere itself is blue, that side of the woman's figure will | ||||
appear steeped in blue. If the surface of the ground about her be | ||||
meadows and if she be standing between a field lighted up by the sun | ||||
and the sun itself, you will see every portion of those folds which | ||||
are towards the meadow tinged by the reflected rays with the colour | ||||
of that meadow. Thus the white is transmuted into the colours of the | ||||
luminous and of the non-luminous objects near it. | ||||
The methods of aerial (567--570). | ||||
567. | ||||
WHY FACES [SEEN] AT A DISTANCE LOOK DARK. | ||||
We see quite plainly that all the images of visible objects that lie | ||||
before us, whether large or small, reach our sense by the minute | ||||
aperture of the eye; and if, through so small a passage the image | ||||
can pass of the vast extent of sky and earth, the face of a | ||||
man--being by comparison with such large images almost nothing by | ||||
reason of the distance which diminishes it,--fills up so little of | ||||
the eye that it is indistinguishable. Having, also, to be | ||||
transmitted from the surface to the sense through a dark medium, | ||||
that is to say the crystalline lens which looks dark, this image, | ||||
not being strong in colour becomes affected by this darkness on its | ||||
passage, and on reaching the sense it appears dark; no other reason | ||||
can in any way be assigned. If the point in the eye is black, it is | ||||
because it is full of a transparent humour as clear as air and acts | ||||
like a perforation in a board; on looking into it it appears dark | ||||
and the objects seen through the bright air and a dark one become | ||||
confused in this darkness. | ||||
WHY A MAN SEEN AT A CERTAIN DISTANCE IS NOT RECOGNISABLE. | ||||
The perspective of diminution shows us that the farther away an | ||||
object is the smaller it looks. If you look at a man at a distance | ||||
from you of an arrow's flight, and hold the eye of a small needle | ||||
close to your own eye, you can see through it several men whose | ||||
images are transmitted to the eye and will all be comprised within | ||||
the size of the needle's eye; hence, if the man who is at the | ||||
distance of an arrow's flight can send his whole image to your eye, | ||||
occupying only a small space in the needle's eye how can you | ||||
[expect] in so small a figure to distinguish or see the nose or | ||||
mouth or any detail of his person? and, not seeing these you cannot | ||||
recognise the man, since these features, which he does not show, are | ||||
what give men different aspects. | ||||
568. | ||||
THE REASON WHY SMALL FIGURES SHOULD NOT BE MADE FINISHED. | ||||
I say that the reason that objects appear diminished in size is | ||||
because they are remote from the eye; this being the case it is | ||||
evident that there must be a great extent of atmosphere between the | ||||
eye and the objects, and this air interferes with the distinctness | ||||
of the forms of the object. Hence the minute details of these | ||||
objects will be indistinguishable and unrecognisable. Therefore, O | ||||
Painter, make your smaller figures merely indicated and not highly | ||||
finished, otherwise you will produce effects the opposite to nature, | ||||
your supreme guide. The object is small by reason of the great | ||||
distance between it and the eye, this great distance is filled with | ||||
air, that mass of air forms a dense body which intervenes and | ||||
prevents the eye seeing the minute details of objects. | ||||
569. | ||||
Whenever a figure is placed at a considerable distance you lose | ||||
first the distinctness of the smallest parts; while the larger parts | ||||
are left to the last, losing all distinctness of detail and outline; | ||||
and what remains is an oval or spherical figure with confused edges. | ||||
570. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
The density of a body of smoke looks white below the horizon while | ||||
above the horizon it is dark, even if the smoke is in itself of a | ||||
uniform colour, this uniformity will vary according to the variety | ||||
in the ground on which it is seen. | ||||
IV. | ||||
OF PORTRAIT AND FIGURE PAINTING. | ||||
Of sketching figures and portraits (571-572). | ||||
571. | ||||
OF THE WAY TO LEARN TO COMPOSE FIGURES [IN GROUPS] IN HISTORICAL | ||||
PICTURES. | ||||
When you have well learnt perspective and have by heart the parts | ||||
and forms of objects, you must go about, and constantly, as you go, | ||||
observe, note and consider the circumstances and behaviour of men in | ||||
talking, quarrelling or laughing or fighting together: the action of | ||||
the men themselves and the actions of the bystanders, who separate | ||||
them or who look on. And take a note of them with slight strokes | ||||
thus, in a little book which you should always carry with you. And | ||||
it should be of tinted paper, that it may not be rubbed out, but | ||||
change the old [when full] for a new one; since these things should | ||||
not be rubbed out but preserved with great care; for the forms, and | ||||
positions of objects are so infinite that the memory is incapable of | ||||
retaining them, wherefore keep these [sketches] as your guides and | ||||
masters. | ||||
[Footnote: Among Leonardo's numerous note books of pocket size not | ||||
one has coloured paper, so no sketches answering to this description | ||||
can be pointed out. The fact that most of the notes are written in | ||||
ink, militates against the supposition that they were made in the | ||||
open air.] | ||||
572. | ||||
OF A METHOD OF KEEPING IN MIND THE FORM OF A FACE. | ||||
If you want to acquire facility for bearing in mind the expression | ||||
of a face, first make yourself familiar with a variety of [forms of] | ||||
several heads, eyes, noses, mouths, chins and cheeks and necks and | ||||
shoulders: And to put a case: Noses are of 10 types: straight, | ||||
bulbous, hollow, prominent above or below the middle, aquiline, | ||||
regular, flat, round or pointed. These hold good as to profile. In | ||||
full face they are of 11 types; these are equal thick in the middle, | ||||
thin in the middle, with the tip thick and the root narrow, or | ||||
narrow at the tip and wide at the root; with the nostrils wide or | ||||
narrow, high or low, and the openings wide or hidden by the point; | ||||
and you will find an equal variety in the other details; which | ||||
things you must draw from nature and fix them in your mind. Or else, | ||||
when you have to draw a face by heart, carry with you a little book | ||||
in which you have noted such features; and when you have cast a | ||||
glance at the face of the person you wish to draw, you can look, in | ||||
private, which nose or mouth is most like, or there make a little | ||||
mark to recognise it again at home. Of grotesque faces I need say | ||||
nothing, because they are kept in mind without difficulty. | ||||
The position of the head. | ||||
573. | ||||
HOW YOU SHOULD SET TO WORK TO DRAW A HEAD OF WHICH ALL THE PARTS | ||||
SHALL AGREE WITH THE POSITION GIVEN TO IT. | ||||
To draw a head in which the features shall agree with the turn and | ||||
bend of the head, pursue this method. You know that the eyes, | ||||
eyebrows, nostrils, corners of the mouth, and sides of the chin, the | ||||
jaws, cheeks, ears and all the parts of a face are squarely and | ||||
straightly set upon the face. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare the drawings and the text belonging to them on | ||||
Pl. IX. (No. 315), Pl. X (No. 316), Pl. XL (No. 318) and Pl. XII. | ||||
(No. 319).] | ||||
Therefore when you have sketched the face draw lines passing from | ||||
one corner of the eye to the other; and so for the placing of each | ||||
feature; and after having drawn the ends of the lines beyond the two | ||||
sides of the face, look if the spaces inside the same parallel lines | ||||
on the right and on the left are equal [12]. But be sure to remember | ||||
to make these lines tend to the point of sight. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXXI, No. 4, the slight sketch on the left hand | ||||
side. The text of this passage is written by the side of it. In this | ||||
sketch the lines seem intentionally incorrect and converging to the | ||||
right (compare I. 12) instead of parallel. Compare too with this | ||||
text the drawing in red chalk from Windsor Castle which is | ||||
reproduced on Pl. XL, No. 2.] | ||||
Of the light on the face (574-576). | ||||
574. | ||||
HOW TO KNOW WHICH SIDE OF AN OBJECT IS TO BE MORE OR LESS LUMINOUS | ||||
THAN THE OTHER. | ||||
Let _f_ be the light, the head will be the object illuminated by it | ||||
and that side of the head on which the rays fall most directly will | ||||
be the most highly lighted, and those parts on which the rays fall | ||||
most aslant will be less lighted. The light falls as a blow might, | ||||
since a blow which falls perpendicularly falls with the greatest | ||||
force, and when it falls obliquely it is less forcible than the | ||||
former in proportion to the width of the angle. _Exempli gratia_ if | ||||
you throw a ball at a wall of which the extremities are equally far | ||||
from you the blow will fall straight, and if you throw the ball at | ||||
the wall when standing at one end of it the ball will hit it | ||||
obliquely and the blow will not tell. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXXI. No. 4; the sketch on the right hand side.] | ||||
575. | ||||
THE PROOF AND REASON WHY AMONG THE ILLUMINATED PARTS CERTAIN | ||||
PORTIONS ARE IN HIGHER LIGHT THAN OTHERS. | ||||
Since it is proved that every definite light is, or seems to be, | ||||
derived from one single point the side illuminated by it will have | ||||
its highest light on the portion where the line of radiance falls | ||||
perpendicularly; as is shown above in the lines _a g_, and also in | ||||
_a h_ and in _l a_; and that portion of the illuminated side will be | ||||
least luminous, where the line of incidence strikes it between two | ||||
more dissimilar angles, as is seen at _b c d_. And by this means you | ||||
may also know which parts are deprived of light as is seen at _m k_. | ||||
Where the angles made by the lines of incidence are most equal there | ||||
will be the highest light, and where they are most unequal it will | ||||
be darkest. | ||||
I will make further mention of the reason of reflections. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXXII. The text, here given complete, is on the | ||||
right hand side. The small circles above the beginning of lines 5 | ||||
and 11 as well as the circle above the text on Pl. XXXI, are in a | ||||
paler ink and evidently added by a later hand in order to | ||||
distinguish the text as belonging to the _Libro di Pittura_ (see | ||||
Prolegomena. No. 12, p. 3). The text on the left hand side of this | ||||
page is given as Nos. 577 and 137.] | ||||
576. | ||||
Where the shadow should be on the face. | ||||
General suggestions for historical pictures (577-581). | ||||
577. | ||||
When you compose a historical picture take two points, one the point | ||||
of sight, and the other the source of light; and make this as | ||||
distant as possible. | ||||
578. | ||||
Historical pictures ought not to be crowded and confused with too | ||||
many figures. | ||||
579. | ||||
PRECEPTS IN PAINTING. | ||||
Let you sketches of historical pictures be swift and the working out | ||||
of the limbs not be carried too far, but limited to the position of | ||||
the limbs, which you can afterwards finish as you please and at your | ||||
leisure. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. XXXVIII, No. 2. The pen and ink drawing given | ||||
there as No. 3 may also be compared with this passage. It is in the | ||||
Windsor collection where it is numbered 101.] | ||||
580. | ||||
The sorest misfortune is when your views are in advance of your | ||||
work. | ||||
581. | ||||
Of composing historical pictures. Of not considering the limbs in | ||||
the figures in historical pictures; as many do who, in the wish to | ||||
represent the whole of a figure, spoil their compositions. And when | ||||
you place one figure behind another take care to draw the whole of | ||||
it so that the limbs which come in front of the nearer figures may | ||||
stand out in their natural size and place. | ||||
How to represent the differences of age and sex (582-583). | ||||
582. | ||||
How the ages of man should be depicted: that is, Infancy, Childhood, | ||||
Youth, Manhood, Old age, Decrepitude. | ||||
[Footnote: No answer is here given to this question, in the original | ||||
MS.] | ||||
583. | ||||
Old men ought to be represented with slow and heavy movements, their | ||||
legs bent at the knees, when they stand still, and their feet placed | ||||
parallel and apart; bending low with the head leaning forward, and | ||||
their arms but little extended. | ||||
Women must be represented in modest attitudes, their legs close | ||||
together, their arms closely folded, their heads inclined and | ||||
somewhat on one side. | ||||
Old women should be represented with eager, swift and furious | ||||
gestures, like infernal furies; but the action should be more | ||||
violent in their arms and head than in their legs. | ||||
Little children, with lively and contorted movements when sitting, | ||||
and, when standing still, in shy and timid attitudes. | ||||
[Footnote: _bracci raccolte_. Compare Pl. XXXIII. This drawing, in | ||||
silver point on yellowish tinted paper, the lights heightened with | ||||
white, represents two female hands laid together in a lap. Above is | ||||
a third finished study of a right hand, apparently holding a veil | ||||
from the head across the bosom. This drawing evidently dates from | ||||
before 1500 and was very probably done at Florence, perhaps as a | ||||
preparatory study for some picture. The type of hand with its | ||||
slender thin forms is more like the style of the _Vierge aux | ||||
Rochers_ in the Louvre than any later works--as the Mona Lisa for | ||||
instance.] | ||||
Of representing the emotions. | ||||
584. | ||||
THAT A FIGURE IS NOT ADMIRABLE UNLESS IT EXPRESSES BY ITS ACTION THE | ||||
PASSION OF ITS SENTIMENT. | ||||
That figure is most admirable which by its actions best expresses | ||||
the passion that animates it. | ||||
HOW AN ANGRY MAN IS TO BE FIGURED. | ||||
You must make an angry person holding someone by the hair, wrenching | ||||
his head against the ground, and with one knee on his ribs; his | ||||
right arm and fist raised on high. His hair must be thrown up, his | ||||
brow downcast and knit, his teeth clenched and the two corners of | ||||
his mouth grimly set; his neck swelled and bent forward as he leans | ||||
over his foe, and full of furrows. | ||||
HOW TO REPRESENT A MAN IN DESPAIR. | ||||
You must show a man in despair with a knife, having already torn | ||||
open his garments, and with one hand tearing open the wound. And | ||||
make him standing on his feet and his legs somewhat bent and his | ||||
whole person leaning towards the earth; his hair flying in disorder. | ||||
Of representing imaginary animals. | ||||
585. | ||||
HOW YOU SHOULD MAKE AN IMAGINARY ANIMAL LOOK NATURAL. | ||||
You know that you cannot invent animals without limbs, each of | ||||
which, in itself, must resemble those of some other animal. Hence if | ||||
you wish to make an animal, imagined by you, appear natural--let us | ||||
say a Dragon, take for its head that of a mastiff or hound, with the | ||||
eyes of a cat, the ears of a porcupine, the nose of a greyhound, the | ||||
brow of a lion, the temples of an old cock, the neck of a water | ||||
tortoise. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketch here inserted of two men on horseback fighting | ||||
a dragon is the facsimile of a pen and ink drawing belonging to | ||||
BARON EDMOND DE ROTHSCHILD of Paris.] | ||||
The selection of forms. | ||||
586. | ||||
OF THE DELUSIONS WHICH ARISE IN JUDGING OF THE LIMBS. | ||||
A painter who has clumsy hands will paint similar hands in his | ||||
works, and the same will occur with any limb, unless long study has | ||||
taught him to avoid it. Therefore, O Painter, look carefully what | ||||
part is most ill-favoured in your own person and take particular | ||||
pains to correct it in your studies. For if you are coarse, your | ||||
figures will seem the same and devoid of charm; and it is the same | ||||
with any part that may be good or poor in yourself; it will be shown | ||||
in some degree in your figures. | ||||
587. | ||||
OF THE SELECTION OF BEAUTIFUL FACES. | ||||
It seems to me to be no small charm in a painter when he gives his | ||||
figures a pleasing air, and this grace, if he have it not by nature, | ||||
he may acquire by incidental study in this way: Look about you and | ||||
take the best parts of many beautiful faces, of which the beauty is | ||||
confirmed rather by public fame than by your own judgment; for you | ||||
might be mistaken and choose faces which have some resemblance to | ||||
your own. For it would seem that such resemblances often please us; | ||||
and if you should be ugly, you would select faces that were not | ||||
beautiful and you would then make ugly faces, as many painters do. | ||||
For often a master's work resembles himself. So select beauties as I | ||||
tell you, and fix them in your mind. | ||||
588. | ||||
Of the limbs, which ought to be carefully selected, and of all the | ||||
other parts with regard to painting. | ||||
589. | ||||
When selecting figures you should choose slender ones rather than | ||||
lean and wooden ones. | ||||
590. | ||||
OF THE MUSCLES OF ANIMALS. | ||||
The hollow spaces interposed between the muscles must not be of such | ||||
a character as that the skin should seem to cover two sticks laid | ||||
side by side like _c_, nor should they seem like two sticks somewhat | ||||
remote from such contact so that the skin hangs in an empty loose | ||||
curve as at _f_; but it should be like _i_, laid over the spongy fat | ||||
that lies in the angles as the angle _n m o_; which angle is formed | ||||
by the contact of the ends of the muscles and as the skin cannot | ||||
fold down into such an angle, nature has filled up such angles with | ||||
a small quantity of spongy and, as I may say, vesicular fat, with | ||||
minute bladders [in it] full of air, which is condensed or rarefied | ||||
in them according to the increase or the diminution of the substance | ||||
of the muscles; in which latter case the concavity _i_ always has a | ||||
larger curve than the muscle. | ||||
591. | ||||
OF UNDULATING MOVEMENTS AND EQUIPOISE IN FIGURES AND OTHER ANIMALS. | ||||
When representing a human figure or some graceful animal, be careful | ||||
to avoid a wooden stiffness; that is to say make them move with | ||||
equipoise and balance so as not to look like a piece of wood; but | ||||
those you want to represent as strong you must not make so, | ||||
excepting in the turn of the head. | ||||
How to pose figures. | ||||
592. | ||||
OF GRACE IN THE LIMBS. | ||||
The limbs should be adapted to the body with grace and with | ||||
reference to the effect that you wish the figure to produce. And if | ||||
you wish to produce a figure that shall of itself look light and | ||||
graceful you must make the limbs elegant and extended, and without | ||||
too much display of the muscles; and those few that are needed for | ||||
your purpose you must indicate softly, that is, not very prominent | ||||
and without strong shadows; the limbs, and particularly the arms | ||||
easy; that is, none of the limbs should be in a straight line with | ||||
the adjoining parts. And if the hips, which are the pole of a man, | ||||
are by reason of his position, placed so, that the right is higher | ||||
than the left, make the point of the higher shoulder in a | ||||
perpendicular line above the highest prominence of the hip, and let | ||||
this right shoulder be lower than the left. Let the pit of the | ||||
throat always be over the centre of the joint of the foot on which | ||||
the man is leaning. The leg which is free should have the knee lower | ||||
than the other, and near the other leg. The positions of the head | ||||
and arms are endless and I shall therefore not enlarge on any rules | ||||
for them. Still, let them be easy and pleasing, with various turns | ||||
and twists, and the joints gracefully bent, that they may not look | ||||
like pieces of wood. | ||||
Of appropriate gestures (593-600). | ||||
593. | ||||
A picture or representation of human figures, ought to be done in | ||||
such a way as that the spectator may easily recognise, by means of | ||||
their attitudes, the purpose in their minds. Thus, if you have to | ||||
represent a man of noble character in the act of speaking, let his | ||||
gestures be such as naturally accompany good words; and, in the same | ||||
way, if you wish to depict a man of a brutal nature, give him fierce | ||||
movements; as with his arms flung out towards the listener, and his | ||||
head and breast thrust forward beyond his feet, as if following the | ||||
speaker's hands. Thus it is with a deaf and dumb person who, when he | ||||
sees two men in conversation--although he is deprived of | ||||
hearing--can nevertheless understand, from the attitudes and | ||||
gestures of the speakers, the nature of their discussion. I once saw | ||||
in Florence a man who had become deaf who, when you spoke very loud | ||||
did not understand you, but if you spoke gently and without making | ||||
any sound, understood merely from the movement of the lips. Now | ||||
perhaps you will say that the lips of a man who speaks loudly do not | ||||
move like those of one speaking softly, and that if they were to | ||||
move them alike they would be alike understood. As to this argument, | ||||
I leave the decision to experiment; make a man speak to you gently | ||||
and note [the motion of] his lips. | ||||
[Footnote: The first ten lines of this text have already been | ||||
published, but with a slightly different reading by Dr. M. JORDAN: | ||||
_Das Malerbuch Leonardo da Vinci's_ p. 86.] | ||||
594. | ||||
OF REPRESENTING A MAN SPEAKING TO A MULTITUDE. | ||||
When you wish to represent a man speaking to a number of people, | ||||
consider the matter of which he has to treat and adapt his action to | ||||
the subject. Thus, if he speaks persuasively, let his action be | ||||
appropriate to it. If the matter in hand be to set forth an | ||||
argument, let the speaker, with the fingers of the right hand hold | ||||
one finger of the left hand, having the two smaller ones closed; and | ||||
his face alert, and turned towards the people with mouth a little | ||||
open, to look as though he spoke; and if he is sitting let him | ||||
appear as though about to rise, with his head forward. If you | ||||
represent him standing make him leaning slightly forward with body | ||||
and head towards the people. These you must represent as silent and | ||||
attentive, all looking at the orator's face with gestures of | ||||
admiration; and make some old men in astonishment at the things they | ||||
hear, with the corners of their mouths pulled down and drawn in, | ||||
their cheeks full of furrows, and their eyebrows raised, and | ||||
wrinkling the forehead where they meet. Again, some sitting with | ||||
their fingers clasped holding their weary knees. Again, some bent | ||||
old man, with one knee crossed over the other; on which let him hold | ||||
his hand with his other elbow resting in it and the hand supporting | ||||
his bearded chin. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketches introduced here are a facsimile of a pen and | ||||
ink drawing in the Louvre which Herr CARL BRUN considers as studies | ||||
for the Last Supper in the church of _Santa Maria delle Grazie_ (see | ||||
Leonardo da Vinci, LXI, pp. 21, 27 and 28 in DOHME'S _Kunst und | ||||
Kunstler_, Leipzig, Seemann). I shall not here enter into any | ||||
discussion of this suggestion; but as a justification for | ||||
introducing the drawing in this place, I may point out that some of | ||||
the figures illustrate this passage as perfectly as though they had | ||||
been drawn for that express purpose. I have discussed the | ||||
probability of a connection between this sketch and the picture of | ||||
the Last Supper on p. 335. The original drawing is 27 3/4 | ||||
centimetres wide by 21 high.--The drawing in silver point on reddish | ||||
paper given on Pl. LII. No. 1--the original at Windsor Castle--may | ||||
also serve to illustrate the subject of appropriate gestures, | ||||
treated in Nos. 593 and 594.] | ||||
595. | ||||
OF THE DISPOSITION OF LIMBS. | ||||
As regards the disposition of limbs in movement you will have to | ||||
consider that when you wish to represent a man who, by some chance, | ||||
has to turn backwards or to one side, you must not make him move his | ||||
feet and all his limbs towards the side to which he turns his head. | ||||
Rather must you make the action proceed by degrees and through the | ||||
different joints; that is, those of the foot, the knee and the hip | ||||
and the neck. And if you set him on the right leg, you must make the | ||||
left knee bend inwards, and let his foot be slightly raised on the | ||||
outside, and the left shoulder be somewhat lower than the right, | ||||
while the nape of the neck is in a line directly over the outer | ||||
ancle of the left foot. And the left shoulder will be in a | ||||
perpendicular line above the toes of the right foot. And always set | ||||
your figures so that the side to which the head turns is not the | ||||
side to which the breast faces, since nature for our convenience has | ||||
made us with a neck which bends with ease in many directions, the | ||||
eye wishing to turn to various points, the different joints. And if | ||||
at any time you make a man sitting with his arms at work on | ||||
something which is sideways to him, make the upper part of his body | ||||
turn upon the hips. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare Pl. VII, No. 5. The original drawing at Windsor | ||||
Castle is numbered 104.] | ||||
596. | ||||
When you draw the nude always sketch the whole figure and then | ||||
finish those limbs which seem to you the best, but make them act | ||||
with the other limbs; otherwise you will get a habit of never | ||||
putting the limbs well together on the body. | ||||
Never make the head turn the same way as the torso, nor the arm and | ||||
leg move together on the same side. And if the face is turned to the | ||||
right shoulder, make all the parts lower on the left side than on | ||||
the right; and when you turn the body with the breast outwards, if | ||||
the head turns to the left side make the parts on the right side | ||||
higher than those on the left. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original MS. a much defaced sketch is to be seen | ||||
by the side of the second part of this chapter; its faded condition | ||||
has rendered reproduction impossible. In M. RAVAISSON'S facsimile | ||||
the outlines of the head have probably been touched up. This passage | ||||
however is fitly illustrated by the drawings on Pl. XXI.] | ||||
597. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Of the nature of movements in man. Do not repeat the same gestures | ||||
in the limbs of men unless you are compelled by the necessity of | ||||
their action, as is shown in _a b_. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. V, where part of the text is also reproduced. The | ||||
effaced figure to the extreme left has evidently been cancelled by | ||||
Leonardo himself as unsatisfactory.] | ||||
598. | ||||
The motions of men must be such as suggest their dignity or their | ||||
baseness. | ||||
599. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Make your work carry out your purpose and meaning. That is when you | ||||
draw a figure consider well who it is and what you wish it to be | ||||
doing. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
With regard to any action which you give in a picture to an old man | ||||
or to a young one, you must make it more energetic in the young man | ||||
in proportion as he is stronger than the old one; and in the same | ||||
way with a young man and an infant. | ||||
600. | ||||
OF SETTING ON THE LIMBS. | ||||
The limbs which are used for labour must be muscular and those which | ||||
are not much used you must make without muscles and softly rounded. | ||||
OF THE ACTION OF THE FIGURES. | ||||
Represent your figures in such action as may be fitted to express | ||||
what purpose is in the mind of each; otherwise your art will not be | ||||
admirable. | ||||
V. | ||||
SUGGESTIONS FOR COMPOSITIONS. | ||||
Of painting battle pieces (601-603). | ||||
601. | ||||
OF THE WAY OF REPRESENTING A BATTLE. | ||||
First you must represent the smoke of artillery mingling in the air | ||||
with the dust and tossed up by the movement of horses and the | ||||
combatants. And this mixture you must express thus: The dust, being | ||||
a thing of earth, has weight; and although from its fineness it is | ||||
easily tossed up and mingles with the air, it nevertheless readily | ||||
falls again. It is the finest part that rises highest; hence that | ||||
part will be least seen and will look almost of the same colour as | ||||
the air. The higher the smoke mixed with the dust-laden air rises | ||||
towards a certain level, the more it will look like a dark cloud; | ||||
and it will be seen that at the top, where the smoke is more | ||||
separate from the dust, the smoke will assume a bluish tinge and the | ||||
dust will tend to its colour. This mixture of air, smoke and dust | ||||
will look much lighter on the side whence the light comes than on | ||||
the opposite side. The more the combatants are in this turmoil the | ||||
less will they be seen, and the less contrast will there be in their | ||||
lights and shadows. Their faces and figures and their appearance, | ||||
and the musketeers as well as those near them you must make of a | ||||
glowing red. And this glow will diminish in proportion as it is | ||||
remote from its cause. | ||||
The figures which are between you and the light, if they be at a | ||||
distance, will appear dark on a light background, and the lower part | ||||
of their legs near the ground will be least visible, because there | ||||
the dust is coarsest and densest [19]. And if you introduce horses | ||||
galloping outside the crowd, make the little clouds of dust distant | ||||
from each other in proportion to the strides made by the horses; and | ||||
the clouds which are furthest removed from the horses, should be | ||||
least visible; make them high and spreading and thin, and the nearer | ||||
ones will be more conspicuous and smaller and denser [23]. The air | ||||
must be full of arrows in every direction, some shooting upwards, | ||||
some falling, some flying level. The balls from the guns must have a | ||||
train of smoke following their flight. The figures in the foreground | ||||
you must make with dust on the hair and eyebrows and on other flat | ||||
places likely to retain it. The conquerors you will make rushing | ||||
onwards with their hair and other light things flying on the wind, | ||||
with their brows bent down, | ||||
[Footnote: 19--23. Compare 608. 57--75.] | ||||
602. | ||||
and with the opposite limbs thrust forward; that is where a man puts | ||||
forward the right foot the left arm must be advanced. And if you | ||||
make any one fallen, you must show the place where he has slipped | ||||
and been dragged along the dust into blood stained mire; and in the | ||||
half-liquid earth arround show the print of the tramping of men and | ||||
horses who have passed that way. Make also a horse dragging the dead | ||||
body of his master, and leaving behind him, in the dust and mud, the | ||||
track where the body was dragged along. You must make the conquered | ||||
and beaten pale, their brows raised and knit, and the skin above | ||||
their brows furrowed with pain, the sides of the nose with wrinkles | ||||
going in an arch from the nostrils to the eyes, and make the | ||||
nostrils drawn up--which is the cause of the lines of which I | ||||
speak--, and the lips arched upwards and discovering the upper | ||||
teeth; and the teeth apart as with crying out and lamentation. And | ||||
make some one shielding his terrified eyes with one hand, the palm | ||||
towards the enemy, while the other rests on the ground to support | ||||
his half raised body. Others represent shouting with their mouths | ||||
open, and running away. You must scatter arms of all sorts among the | ||||
feet of the combatants, as broken shields, lances, broken swords and | ||||
other such objects. And you must make the dead partly or entirely | ||||
covered with dust, which is changed into crimson mire where it has | ||||
mingled with the flowing blood whose colour shows it issuing in a | ||||
sinuous stream from the corpse. Others must be represented in the | ||||
agonies of death grinding their teeth, rolling their eyes, with | ||||
their fists clenched against their bodies and their legs contorted. | ||||
Some might be shown disarmed and beaten down by the enemy, turning | ||||
upon the foe, with teeth and nails, to take an inhuman and bitter | ||||
revenge. You might see some riderless horse rushing among the enemy, | ||||
with his mane flying in the wind, and doing no little mischief with | ||||
his heels. Some maimed warrior may be seen fallen to the earth, | ||||
covering himself with his shield, while the enemy, bending over him, | ||||
tries to deal him a deathstroke. There again might be seen a number | ||||
of men fallen in a heap over a dead horse. You would see some of the | ||||
victors leaving the fight and issuing from the crowd, rubbing their | ||||
eyes and cheeks with both hands to clean them of the dirt made by | ||||
their watering eyes smarting from the dust and smoke. The reserves | ||||
may be seen standing, hopeful but cautious; with watchful eyes, | ||||
shading them with their hands and gazing through the dense and murky | ||||
confusion, attentive to the commands of their captain. The captain | ||||
himself, his staff raised, hurries towards these auxiliaries, | ||||
pointing to the spot where they are most needed. And there may be a | ||||
river into which horses are galloping, churning up the water all | ||||
round them into turbulent waves of foam and water, tossed into the | ||||
air and among the legs and bodies of the horses. And there must not | ||||
be a level spot that is not trampled with gore. | ||||
603. | ||||
OF LIGHTING THE LOWER PARTS OF BODIES CLOSE TOGETHER, AS OF MEN IN | ||||
BATTLE. | ||||
As to men and horses represented in battle, their different parts | ||||
will be dark in proportion as they are nearer to the ground on which | ||||
they stand. And this is proved by the sides of wells which grow | ||||
darker in proportion to their depth, the reason of which is that the | ||||
deepest part of the well sees and receives a smaller amount of the | ||||
luminous atmosphere than any other part. | ||||
And the pavement, if it be of the same colour as the legs of these | ||||
said men and horses, will always be more lighted and at a more | ||||
direct angle than the said legs &c. | ||||
604. | ||||
OF THE WAY TO REPRESENT A NIGHT [SCENE]. | ||||
That which is entirely bereft of light is all darkness; given a | ||||
night under these conditions and that you want to represent a night | ||||
scene,--arrange that there shall be a great fire, then the objects | ||||
which are nearest to this fire will be most tinged with its colour; | ||||
for those objects which are nearest to a coloured light participate | ||||
most in its nature; as therefore you give the fire a red colour, you | ||||
must make all the objects illuminated by it ruddy; while those which | ||||
are farther from the fire are more tinted by the black hue of night. | ||||
The figures which are seen against the fire look dark in the glare | ||||
of the firelight because that side of the objects which you see is | ||||
tinged by the darkness of the night and not by the fire; and those | ||||
who stand at the side are half dark and half red; while those who | ||||
are visible beyond the edges of the flame will be fully lighted by | ||||
the ruddy glow against a black background. As to their gestures, | ||||
make those which are near it screen themselves with their hands and | ||||
cloaks as a defence against the intense heat, and with their faces | ||||
turned away as if about to retire. Of those farther off represent | ||||
several as raising their hands to screen their eyes, hurt by the | ||||
intolerable glare. | ||||
Of depicting a tempest (605. 606). | ||||
605. | ||||
Describe a wind on land and at sea. Describe a storm of rain. | ||||
606. | ||||
HOW TO REPRESENT A TEMPEST. | ||||
If you wish to represent a tempest consider and arrange well its | ||||
effects as seen, when the wind, blowing over the face of the sea and | ||||
earth, removes and carries with it such things as are not fixed to | ||||
the general mass. And to represent the storm accurately you must | ||||
first show the clouds scattered and torn, and flying with the wind, | ||||
accompanied by clouds of sand blown up from the sea shore, and | ||||
boughs and leaves swept along by the strength and fury of the blast | ||||
and scattered with other light objects through the air. Trees and | ||||
plants must be bent to the ground, almost as if they would follow | ||||
the course of the gale, with their branches twisted out of their | ||||
natural growth and their leaves tossed and turned about [Footnote | ||||
11: See Pl. XL, No. 2.]. Of the men who are there some must have | ||||
fallen to the ground and be entangled in their garments, and hardly | ||||
to be recognized for the dust, while those who remain standing may | ||||
be behind some tree, with their arms round it that the wind may not | ||||
tear them away; others with their hands over their eyes for the | ||||
dust, bending to the ground with their clothes and hair streaming in | ||||
the wind. [Footnote 15: See Pl. XXXIV, the right hand lower sketch.] | ||||
Let the sea be rough and tempestuous and full of foam whirled among | ||||
the lofty waves, while the wind flings the lighter spray through the | ||||
stormy air, till it resembles a dense and swathing mist. Of the | ||||
ships that are therein some should be shown with rent sails and the | ||||
tatters fluttering through the air, with ropes broken and masts | ||||
split and fallen. And the ship itself lying in the trough of the sea | ||||
and wrecked by the fury of the waves with the men shrieking and | ||||
clinging to the fragments of the vessel. Make the clouds driven by | ||||
the impetuosity of the wind and flung against the lofty mountain | ||||
tops, and wreathed and torn like waves beating upon rocks; the air | ||||
itself terrible from the deep darkness caused by the dust and fog | ||||
and heavy clouds. | ||||
Of representing the deluge (607-609). | ||||
607. | ||||
TO REPRESENT THE DELUGE. | ||||
The air was darkened by the heavy rain whose oblique descent driven | ||||
aslant by the rush of the winds, flew in drifts through the air not | ||||
otherwise than as we see dust, varied only by the straight lines of | ||||
the heavy drops of falling water. But it was tinged with the colour | ||||
of the fire kindled by the thunder-bolts by which the clouds were | ||||
rent and shattered; and whose flashes revealed the broad waters of | ||||
the inundated valleys, above which was seen the verdure of the | ||||
bending tree tops. Neptune will be seen in the midst of the water | ||||
with his trident, and [15] let AEolus with his winds be shown | ||||
entangling the trees floating uprooted, and whirling in the huge | ||||
waves. The horizon and the whole hemisphere were obscure, but lurid | ||||
from the flashes of the incessant lightning. Men and birds might be | ||||
seen crowded on the tall trees which remained uncovered by the | ||||
swelling waters, originators of the mountains which surround the | ||||
great abysses [Footnote 23: Compare Vol. II. No. 979.]. | ||||
608. | ||||
OF THE DELUGE AND HOW TO REPRESENT IT IN A PICTURE. | ||||
Let the dark and gloomy air be seen buffeted by the rush of contrary | ||||
winds and dense from the continued rain mingled with hail and | ||||
bearing hither and thither an infinite number of branches torn from | ||||
the trees and mixed with numberless leaves. All round may be seen | ||||
venerable trees, uprooted and stripped by the fury of the winds; and | ||||
fragments of mountains, already scoured bare by the torrents, | ||||
falling into those torrents and choking their valleys till the | ||||
swollen rivers overflow and submerge the wide lowlands and their | ||||
inhabitants. Again, you might have seen on many of the hill-tops | ||||
terrified animals of different kinds, collected together and subdued | ||||
to tameness, in company with men and women who had fled there with | ||||
their children. The waters which covered the fields, with their | ||||
waves were in great part strewn with tables, bedsteads, boats and | ||||
various other contrivances made from necessity and the fear of | ||||
death, on which were men and women with their children amid sounds | ||||
of lamentation and weeping, terrified by the fury of the winds which | ||||
with their tempestuous violence rolled the waters under and over and | ||||
about the bodies of the drowned. Nor was there any object lighter | ||||
than the water which was not covered with a variety of animals | ||||
which, having come to a truce, stood together in a frightened | ||||
crowd--among them wolves, foxes, snakes and others--fleing from | ||||
death. And all the waters dashing on their shores seemed to be | ||||
battling them with the blows of drowned bodies, blows which killed | ||||
those in whom any life remained [19]. You might have seen | ||||
assemblages of men who, with weapons in their hands, defended the | ||||
small spots that remained to them against lions, wolves and beasts | ||||
of prey who sought safety there. Ah! what dreadful noises were heard | ||||
in the air rent by the fury of the thunder and the lightnings it | ||||
flashed forth, which darted from the clouds dealing ruin and | ||||
striking all that opposed its course. Ah! how many you might have | ||||
seen closing their ears with their hands to shut out the tremendous | ||||
sounds made in the darkened air by the raging of the winds mingling | ||||
with the rain, the thunders of heaven and the fury of the | ||||
thunder-bolts. Others were not content with shutting their eyes, but | ||||
laid their hands one over the other to cover them the closer that | ||||
they might not see the cruel slaughter of the human race by the | ||||
wrath of God. Ah! how many laments! and how many in their terror | ||||
flung themselves from the rocks! Huge branches of great oaks loaded | ||||
with men were seen borne through the air by the impetuous fury of | ||||
the winds. How many were the boats upset, some entire, and some | ||||
broken in pieces, on the top of people labouring to escape with | ||||
gestures and actions of grief foretelling a fearful death. Others, | ||||
with desperate act, took their own lives, hopeless of being able to | ||||
endure such suffering; and of these, some flung themselves from | ||||
lofty rocks, others strangled themselves with their own hands, other | ||||
seized their own children and violently slew them at a blow; some | ||||
wounded and killed themselves with their own weapons; others, | ||||
falling on their knees recommended themselves to God. Ah! how many | ||||
mothers wept over their drowned sons, holding them upon their knees, | ||||
with arms raised spread out towards heaven and with words and | ||||
various threatening gestures, upbraiding the wrath of the gods. | ||||
Others with clasped hands and fingers clenched gnawed them and | ||||
devoured them till they bled, crouching with their breast down on | ||||
their knees in their intense and unbearable anguish. Herds of | ||||
animals were to be seen, such as horses, oxen, goats and swine | ||||
already environed by the waters and left isolated on the high peaks | ||||
of the mountains, huddled together, those in the middle climbing to | ||||
the top and treading on the others, and fighting fiercely | ||||
themselves; and many would die for lack of food. Already had the | ||||
birds begun to settle on men and on other animals, finding no land | ||||
uncovered which was not occupied by living beings, and already had | ||||
famine, the minister of death, taken the lives of the greater number | ||||
of the animals, when the dead bodies, now fermented, where leaving | ||||
the depth of the waters and were rising to the top. Among the | ||||
buffeting waves, where they were beating one against the other, and, | ||||
like as balls full of air, rebounded from the point of concussion, | ||||
these found a resting place on the bodies of the dead. And above | ||||
these judgements, the air was seen covered with dark clouds, riven | ||||
by the forked flashes of the raging bolts of heaven, lighting up on | ||||
all sides the depth of the gloom. | ||||
The motion of the air is seen by the motion of the dust thrown up by | ||||
the horse's running and this motion is as swift in again filling up | ||||
the vacuum left in the air which enclosed the horse, as he is rapid | ||||
in passing away from the air. | ||||
Perhaps it will seem to you that you may reproach me with having | ||||
represented the currents made through the air by the motion of the | ||||
wind notwithstanding that the wind itself is not visible in the air. | ||||
To this I must answer that it is not the motion of the wind but only | ||||
the motion of the things carried along by it which is seen in the | ||||
air. | ||||
THE DIVISIONS. [Footnote 76: These observations, added at the bottom | ||||
of the page containing the full description of the doluge seem to | ||||
indicate that it was Leonardo's intention to elaborate the subject | ||||
still farther in a separate treatise.] | ||||
Darkness, wind, tempest at sea, floods of water, forests on fire, | ||||
rain, bolts from heaven, earthquakes and ruins of mountains, | ||||
overthrow of cities [Footnote 81: _Spianamenti di citta_ (overthrow | ||||
of cities). A considerable number of drawings in black chalk, at | ||||
Windsor, illustrate this catastrophe. Most of them are much rubbed; | ||||
one of the least injured is reproduced at Pl. XXXIX. Compare also | ||||
the pen and ink sketch Pl. XXXVI.]. | ||||
Whirlwinds which carry water [spouts] branches of trees, and men | ||||
through the air. | ||||
Boughs stripped off by the winds, mingling by the meeting of the | ||||
winds, with people upon them. | ||||
Broken trees loaded with people. | ||||
Ships broken to pieces, beaten on rocks. | ||||
Flocks of sheep. Hail stones, thunderbolts, whirlwinds. | ||||
People on trees which are unable to to support them; trees and | ||||
rocks, towers and hills covered with people, boats, tables, troughs, | ||||
and other means of floating. Hills covered with men, women and | ||||
animals; and lightning from the clouds illuminating every thing. | ||||
[Footnote: This chapter, which, with the next one, is written on a | ||||
loose sheet, seems to be the passage to which one of the compilers | ||||
of the Vatican copy alluded when he wrote on the margin of fol. 36: | ||||
"_Qua mi ricordo della mirabile discritione del Diluuio dello | ||||
autore._" It is scarcely necessary to point out that these chapters | ||||
are among those which have never before been published. The | ||||
description in No. 607 may be regarded as a preliminary sketch for | ||||
this one. As the MS. G. (in which it is to be found) must be | ||||
attributed to the period of about 1515 we may deduce from it the | ||||
approximate date of the drawings on Pl. XXXIV, XXXV, Nos. 2 and 3, | ||||
XXXVI and XXXVII, since they obviously belong to this text. The | ||||
drawings No. 2 on Pl. XXXV are, in the original, side by side with | ||||
the text of No. 608; lines 57 to 76 are shown in the facsimile. In | ||||
the drawing in Indian ink given on Pl. XXXIV we see Wind-gods in the | ||||
sky, corresponding to the allusion to Aeolus in No. 607 1. | ||||
15.-Plates XXXVI and XXXVII form one sheet in the original. The | ||||
texts reproduced on these Plates have however no connection with the | ||||
sketches, excepting the sketches of clouds on the right hand side. | ||||
These texts are given as No. 477. The group of small figures on Pl. | ||||
XXXVII, to the left, seems to be intended for a '_congregatione | ||||
d'uomini._' See No. 608, 1. 19.] | ||||
609. | ||||
DESCRIPTION OF THE DELUGE. | ||||
Let there be first represented the summit of a rugged mountain with | ||||
valleys surrounding its base, and on its sides let the surface of | ||||
the soil be seen to slide, together with the small roots of the | ||||
bushes, denuding great portions of the surrounding rocks. And | ||||
descending ruinous from these precipices in its boisterous course, | ||||
let it dash along and lay bare the twisted and gnarled roots of | ||||
large trees overthrowing their roots upwards; and let the mountains, | ||||
as they are scoured bare, discover the profound fissures made in | ||||
them by ancient earthquakes. The base of the mountains may be in | ||||
great part clothed and covered with ruins of shrubs, hurled down | ||||
from the sides of their lofty peaks, which will be mixed with mud, | ||||
roots, boughs of trees, with all sorts of leaves thrust in with the | ||||
mud and earth and stones. And into the depth of some valley may have | ||||
fallen the fragments of a mountain forming a shore to the swollen | ||||
waters of its river; which, having already burst its banks, will | ||||
rush on in monstrous waves; and the greatest will strike upon and | ||||
destroy the walls of the cities and farmhouses in the valley [14]. | ||||
Then the ruins of the high buildings in these cities will throw up a | ||||
great dust, rising up in shape like smoke or wreathed clouds against | ||||
the falling rain; But the swollen waters will sweep round the pool | ||||
which contains them striking in eddying whirlpools against the | ||||
different obstacles, and leaping into the air in muddy foam; then, | ||||
falling back, the beaten water will again be dashed into the air. | ||||
And the whirling waves which fly from the place of concussion, and | ||||
whose impetus moves them across other eddies going in a contrary | ||||
direction, after their recoil will be tossed up into the air but | ||||
without dashing off from the surface. Where the water issues from | ||||
the pool the spent waves will be seen spreading out towards the | ||||
outlet; and there falling or pouring through the air and gaining | ||||
weight and impetus they will strike on the water below piercing it | ||||
and rushing furiously to reach its depth; from which being thrown | ||||
back it returns to the surface of the lake, carrying up the air that | ||||
was submerged with it; and this remains at the outlet in foam | ||||
mingled with logs of wood and other matters lighter than water. | ||||
Round these again are formed the beginnings of waves which increase | ||||
the more in circumference as they acquire more movement; and this | ||||
movement rises less high in proportion as they acquire a broader | ||||
base and thus they are less conspicuous as they die away. But if | ||||
these waves rebound from various objects they then return in direct | ||||
opposition to the others following them, observing the same law of | ||||
increase in their curve as they have already acquired in the | ||||
movement they started with. The rain, as it falls from the clouds is | ||||
of the same colour as those clouds, that is in its shaded side; | ||||
unless indeed the sun's rays should break through them; in that case | ||||
the rain will appear less dark than the clouds. And if the heavy | ||||
masses of ruin of large mountains or of other grand buildings fall | ||||
into the vast pools of water, a great quantity will be flung into | ||||
the air and its movement will be in a contrary direction to that of | ||||
the object which struck the water; that is to say: The angle of | ||||
reflection will be equal to the angle of incidence. Of the objects | ||||
carried down by the current, those which are heaviest or rather | ||||
largest in mass will keep farthest from the two opposite shores. The | ||||
water in the eddies revolves more swiftly in proportion as it is | ||||
nearer to their centre. The crests of the waves of the sea tumble to | ||||
their bases falling with friction on the bubbles of their sides; and | ||||
this friction grinds the falling water into minute particles and | ||||
this being converted into a dense mist, mingles with the gale in the | ||||
manner of curling smoke and wreathing clouds, and at last it, rises | ||||
into the air and is converted into clouds. But the rain which falls | ||||
through the atmosphere being driven and tossed by the winds becomes | ||||
rarer or denser according to the rarity or density of the winds that | ||||
buffet it, and thus there is generated in the atmosphere a moisture | ||||
formed of the transparent particles of the rain which is near to the | ||||
eye of the spectator. The waves of the sea which break on the slope | ||||
of the mountains which bound it, will foam from the velocity with | ||||
which they fall against these hills; in rushing back they will meet | ||||
the next wave as it comes and and after a loud noise return in a | ||||
great flood to the sea whence they came. Let great numbers of | ||||
inhabitants--men and animals of all kinds--be seen driven [54] by | ||||
the rising of the deluge to the peaks of the mountains in the midst | ||||
of the waters aforesaid. | ||||
The wave of the sea at Piombino is all foaming water. [Footnote 55. | ||||
56: These two lines are written below the bottom sketch on Pl. XXXV, | ||||
3. The MS. Leic. being written about the year 1510 or later, it does | ||||
not seem to me to follow that the sketches must have been made at | ||||
Piombino, where Leonardo was in the year 1502 and possibly returned | ||||
there subsequently (see Vol. II. Topographical notes).] | ||||
Of the water which leaps up from the spot where great masses fall on | ||||
its surface. Of the winds of Piombino at Piombino. Eddies of wind | ||||
and rain with boughs and shrubs mixed in the air. Emptying the boats | ||||
of the rain water. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketches on Pl. XXXV 3 stand by the side of lines 14 | ||||
to 54.] | ||||
Of depicting natural phenomena (610. 611). | ||||
610. | ||||
The tremendous fury of the wind driven by the falling in of the | ||||
hills on the caves within--by the falling of the hills which served | ||||
as roofs to these caverns. | ||||
A stone flung through the air leaves on the eye which sees it the | ||||
impression of its motion, and the same effect is produced by the | ||||
drops of water which fall from the clouds when it [16] rains. | ||||
[17] A mountain falling on a town, will fling up dust in the form of | ||||
clouds; but the colour of this dust will differ from that of the | ||||
clouds. Where the rain is thickest let the colour of the dust be | ||||
less conspicuous and where the dust is thickest let the rain be less | ||||
conspicuous. And where the rain is mingled with the wind and with | ||||
the dust the clouds created by the rain must be more transparent | ||||
than those of dust [alone]. And when flames of fire are mingled with | ||||
clouds of smoke and water very opaque and dark clouds will be formed | ||||
[Footnote 26-28: Compare Pl. XL, 1--the drawing in Indian ink on the | ||||
left hand side, which seems to be a reminiscence of his observations | ||||
of an eruption (see his remarks on Mount Etna in Vol II).]. And the | ||||
rest of this subject will be treated in detail in the book on | ||||
painting. | ||||
[Footnote: See the sketches and text on Pl. XXXVIII, No. 1. Lines | ||||
1-16 are there given on the left hand side, 17-30 on the right. The | ||||
four lines at the bottom on the right are given as No. 472. Above | ||||
these texts, which are written backwards, there are in the original | ||||
sixteen lines in a larger writing from left to right, but only half | ||||
of this is here visible. They treat of the physical laws of motion | ||||
of air and water. It does not seem to me that there is any reason | ||||
for concluding that this writing from left to right is spurious. | ||||
Compare with it the facsimile of the rough copy of Leonardo's letter | ||||
to Ludovico il Moro in Vol. II.] | ||||
611. | ||||
People were to be seen eagerly embarking victuals on various kinds | ||||
of hastily made barks. But little of the waves were visible in those | ||||
places where the dark clouds and rain were reflected. | ||||
But where the flashes caused by the bolts of heaven were reflected, | ||||
there were seen as many bright spots, caused by the image of the | ||||
flashes, as there were waves to reflect them to the eye of the | ||||
spectator. | ||||
The number of the images produced by the flash of lightning on the | ||||
waves of the water were multiplied in proportion to the distance of | ||||
the spectator's eye. | ||||
So also the number of the images was diminished in proportion as | ||||
they were nearer the eye which saw them [Footnote 22. 23: _Com'e | ||||
provato_. See Vol. II, Nos. 874-878 and 892-901], as it has been | ||||
proved in the definition of the luminosity of the moon, and of our | ||||
marine horizon when the sun's rays are reflected in it and the eye | ||||
which receives the reflection is remote from the sea. | ||||
VI. | ||||
THE ARTIST'S MATERIALS. | ||||
Of chalk and paper (612--617). | ||||
612. | ||||
To make points [crayons] for colouring dry. Temper with a little wax | ||||
and do not dry it; which wax you must dissolve with water: so that | ||||
when the white lead is thus tempered, the water being distilled, may | ||||
go off in vapour and the wax may remain; you will thus make good | ||||
crayons; but you must know that the colours must be ground with a | ||||
hot stone. | ||||
613. | ||||
Chalk dissolves in wine and in vinegar or in aqua fortis and can be | ||||
recombined with gum. | ||||
614. | ||||
PAPER FOR DRAWING UPON IN BLACK BY THE AID OF YOUR SPITTLE. | ||||
Take powdered gall nuts and vitriol, powder them and spread them on | ||||
paper like a varnish, then write on it with a pen wetted with | ||||
spittle and it will turn as black as ink. | ||||
615. | ||||
If you want to make foreshortened letters stretch the paper in a | ||||
drawing frame and then draw your letters and cut them out, and make | ||||
the sunbeams pass through the holes on to another stretched paper, | ||||
and then fill up the angles that are wanting. | ||||
616. | ||||
This paper should be painted over with candle soot tempered with | ||||
thin glue, then smear the leaf thinly with white lead in oil as is | ||||
done to the letters in printing, and then print in the ordinary way. | ||||
Thus the leaf will appear shaded in the hollows and lighted on the | ||||
parts in relief; which however comes out here just the contrary. | ||||
[Footnote: This text, which accompanies a facsimile impression of a | ||||
leaf of sage, has already been published in the _Saggio delle Opere | ||||
di L. da Vinci_, Milano 1872, p. 11. G. GOVI observes on this | ||||
passage: "_Forse aveva egli pensato ancora a farsi un erbario, od | ||||
almeno a riprodurre facilmente su carta le forme e i particolari | ||||
delle foglie di diverse piante; poiche (modificando un metodo che | ||||
probabilmente gli eia stato insegnato da altri, e che piu tardi si | ||||
legge ripetuto in molti ricettarii e libri di segreti), accanto a | ||||
una foglia di Salvia impressa in nero su carta bianca, lascio | ||||
scritto: Questa carta ... | ||||
Erano i primi tentativi di quella riproduzione immediata delle parti | ||||
vegetali, che poi sotto il nome d'Impressione Naturale, fu condotta | ||||
a tanta perfezione in questi ultimi tempi dal signor de Hauer e da | ||||
altri_."] | ||||
617. | ||||
Very excellent will be a stiff white paper, made of the usual | ||||
mixture and filtered milk of an herb called calves foot; and when | ||||
this paper is prepared and damped and folded and wrapped up it may | ||||
be mixed with the mixture and thus left to dry; but if you break it | ||||
before it is moistened it becomes somewhat like the thin paste | ||||
called _lasagne_ and you may then damp it and wrap it up and put it | ||||
in the mixture and leave it to dry; or again this paper may be | ||||
covered with stiff transparent white and _sardonio_ and then damped | ||||
so that it may not form angles and then covered up with strong | ||||
transparent size and as soon as it is firm cut it two fingers, and | ||||
leave it to dry; again you may make stiff cardboard of _sardonio_ | ||||
and dry it and then place it between two sheets of papyrus and break | ||||
it inside with a wooden mallet with a handle and then open it with | ||||
care holding the lower sheet of paper flat and firm so that the | ||||
broken pieces be not separated; then have a sheet of paper covered | ||||
with hot glue and apply it on the top of all these pieces and let | ||||
them stick fast; then turn it upside down and apply transparent size | ||||
several times in the spaces between the pieces, each time pouring in | ||||
first some black and then some stiff white and each time leaving it | ||||
to dry; then smooth it and polish it. | ||||
On the preparation and use of colours (618-627). | ||||
618. | ||||
To make a fine green take green and mix it with bitumen and you will | ||||
make the shadows darker. Then, for lighter [shades] green with | ||||
yellow ochre, and for still lighter green with yellow, and for the | ||||
high lights pure yellow; then mix green and turmeric together and | ||||
glaze every thing with it. To make a fine red take cinnabar or red | ||||
chalk or burnt ochre for the dark shadows and for the lighter ones | ||||
red chalk and vermilion and for the lights pure vermilion and then | ||||
glaze with fine lake. To make good oil for painting. One part of | ||||
oil, one of the first refining and one of the second. | ||||
619. | ||||
Use black in the shadow, and in the lights white, yellow, green, | ||||
vermilion and lake. Medium shadows; take the shadow as above and mix | ||||
it with the flesh tints just alluded to, adding to it a little | ||||
yellow and a little green and occasionally some lake; for the | ||||
shadows take green and lake for the middle shades. | ||||
[Footnote 618 and 619: If we may judge from the flourishes with | ||||
which the writing is ornamented these passages must have been | ||||
written in Leonardo's youth.] | ||||
620. | ||||
You can make a fine ochre by the same method as you use to make | ||||
white. | ||||
621. | ||||
A FINE YELLOW. | ||||
Dissolve realgar with one part of orpiment, with aqua fortis. | ||||
WHITE. | ||||
Put the white into an earthen pot, and lay it no thicker than a | ||||
string, and let it stand in the sun undisturbed for 2 days; and in | ||||
the morning when the sun has dried off the night dews. | ||||
622. | ||||
To make reddish black for flesh tints take red rock crystals from | ||||
Rocca Nova or garnets and mix them a little; again armenian bole is | ||||
good in part. | ||||
623. | ||||
The shadow will be burnt ,terra-verte'. | ||||
624. | ||||
THE PROPORTIONS OF COLOURS. | ||||
If one ounce of black mixed with one ounce of white gives a certain | ||||
shade of darkness, what shade of darkness will be produced by 2 | ||||
ounces of black to 1 ounce of white? | ||||
625. | ||||
Remix black, greenish yellow and at the end blue. | ||||
626. | ||||
Verdigris with aloes, or gall or turmeric makes a fine green and so | ||||
it does with saffron or burnt orpiment; but I doubt whether in a | ||||
short time they will not turn black. Ultramarine blue and glass | ||||
yellow mixed together make a beautiful green for fresco, that is | ||||
wall-painting. Lac and verdigris make a good shadow for blue in oil | ||||
painting. | ||||
627. | ||||
Grind verdigris many times coloured with lemon juice and keep it | ||||
away from yellow (?). | ||||
Of preparing the panel. | ||||
628. | ||||
TO PREPARE A PANEL FOR PAINTING ON. | ||||
The panel should be cypress or pear or service-tree or walnut. You | ||||
must coat it over with mastic and turpentine twice distilled and | ||||
white or, if you like, lime, and put it in a frame so that it may | ||||
expand and shrink according to its moisture and dryness. Then give | ||||
it [a coat] of aqua vitae in which you have dissolved arsenic or | ||||
[corrosive] sublimate, 2 or 3 times. Then apply boiled linseed oil | ||||
in such a way as that it may penetrate every part, and before it is | ||||
cold rub it well with a cloth to dry it. Over this apply liquid | ||||
varnish and white with a stick, then wash it with urine when it is | ||||
dry, and dry it again. Then pounce and outline your drawing finely | ||||
and over it lay a priming of 30 parts of verdigris with one of | ||||
verdigris with two of yellow. | ||||
[Footnote: M. RAVAISSON'S reading varies from mine in the following | ||||
passages: | ||||
1._opero allor [?] bo [alloro?]_ = "_ou bien de [laurier]_." | ||||
6. _fregalo bene con un panno_. He reads _pane_ for _panno_ and | ||||
renders it. "_Frotte le bien avec un pain de facon [jusqu'a ce] | ||||
qu'il_" etc. | ||||
7. _colla stecca po laua_. He reads "_polacca_" = "_avec le couteau | ||||
de bois [?] polonais [?]_."] | ||||
The preparation of oils (629--634). | ||||
629. | ||||
OIL. | ||||
Make some oil of mustard seed; and if you wish to make it with | ||||
greater ease mix the ground seeds with linseed oil and put it all | ||||
under the press. | ||||
630. | ||||
TO REMOVE THE SMELL OF OIL. | ||||
Take the rank oil and put ten pints into a jar and make a mark on | ||||
the jar at the height of the oil; then add to it a pint of vinegar | ||||
and make it boil till the oil has sunk to the level of the mark and | ||||
thus you will be certain that the oil is returned to its original | ||||
quantity and the vinegar will have gone off in vapour, carrying with | ||||
it the evil smell; and I believe you may do the same with nut oil or | ||||
any other oil that smells badly. | ||||
631. | ||||
Since walnuts are enveloped in a thin rind, which partakes of the | ||||
nature of ..., if you do not remove it when you make the oil from | ||||
them, this skin tinges the oil, and when you work with it this skin | ||||
separates from the oil and rises to the surface of the painting, and | ||||
this is what makes it change. | ||||
632. | ||||
TO RESTORE OIL COLOURS THAT HAVE BECOME DRY. | ||||
If you want to restore oil colours that have become dry keep them | ||||
soaking in soft soap for a night and, with your finger, mix them up | ||||
with the soft soap; then pour them into a cup and wash them with | ||||
water, and in this way you can restore colours that have got dry. | ||||
But take care that each colour has its own vessel to itself adding | ||||
the colour by degrees as you restore it and mind that they are | ||||
thoroughly softened, and when you wish to use them for tempera wash | ||||
them five and six times with spring water, and leave them to settle; | ||||
if the soft soap should be thick with any of the colours pass it | ||||
through a filter. [Footnote: The same remark applies to these | ||||
sections as to No. 618 and 619.] | ||||
633. | ||||
OIL. | ||||
Mustard seed pounded with linseed oil. | ||||
634. | ||||
... outside the bowl 2 fingers lower than the level of the oil, and | ||||
pass it into the neck of a bottle and let it stand and thus all the | ||||
oil will separate from this milky liquid; it will enter the bottle | ||||
and be as clear as crystal; and grind your colours with this, and | ||||
every coarse or viscid part will remain in the liquid. You must know | ||||
that all the oils that have been created in seads or fruits are | ||||
quite clear by nature, and the yellow colour you see in them only | ||||
comes of your not knowing how to draw it out. Fire or heat by its | ||||
nature has the power to make them acquire colour. See for example | ||||
the exudation or gums of trees which partake of the nature of rosin; | ||||
in a short time they harden because there is more heat in them than | ||||
in oil; and after some time they acquire a certain yellow hue | ||||
tending to black. But oil, not having so much heat does not do so; | ||||
although it hardens to some extent into sediment it becomes finer. | ||||
The change in oil which occurs in painting proceeds from a certain | ||||
fungus of the nature of a husk which exists in the skin which covers | ||||
the nut, and this being crushed along with the nuts and being of a | ||||
nature much resembling oil mixes with it; it is of so subtle a | ||||
nature that it combines with all colours and then comes to the | ||||
surface, and this it is which makes them change. And if you want the | ||||
oil to be good and not to thicken, put into it a little camphor | ||||
melted over a slow fire and mix it well with the oil and it will | ||||
never harden. | ||||
[Footnote: The same remark applies to these sections as to No. 618 | ||||
and 619.] | ||||
On varnishes [or powders] (635-637). | ||||
635. | ||||
VARNISH [OR POWDER]. | ||||
Take cypress [oil] and distil it and have a large pitcher, and put | ||||
in the extract with so much water as may make it appear like amber, | ||||
and cover it tightly so that none may evaporate. And when it is | ||||
dissolved you may add in your pitcher as much of the said solution, | ||||
as shall make it liquid to your taste. And you must know that amber | ||||
is the gum of the cypress-tree. | ||||
VARNISH [OR POWDER]. | ||||
And since varnish [powder] is the resin of juniper, if you distil | ||||
juniper you can dissolve the said varnish [powder] in the essence, | ||||
as explained above. | ||||
636. | ||||
VARNISH [OR POWDER]. | ||||
Notch a juniper tree and give it water at the roots, mix the liquor | ||||
which exudes with nut-oil and you will have a perfect varnish | ||||
[powder], made like amber varnish [powder], fine and of the best | ||||
quality make it in May or April. | ||||
637. | ||||
VARNISH [OR POWDER]. | ||||
Mercury with Jupiter and Venus,--a paste made of these must be | ||||
corrected by the mould (?) continuously, until Mercury separates | ||||
itself entirely from Jupiter and Venus. [Footnote: Here, and in No. | ||||
641 _Mercurio_ seems to mean quicksilver, _Giove_ stands for iron, | ||||
_Venere_ for copper and _Saturno_ for lead.] | ||||
On chemical materials (638-650). | ||||
638. | ||||
Note how aqua vitae absorbs into itself all the colours and smells | ||||
of flowers. If you want to make blue put iris flowers into it and | ||||
for red solanum berries (?) | ||||
639. | ||||
Salt may be made from human excrement burnt and calcined and made | ||||
into lees, and dried by a slow fire, and all dung in like manner | ||||
yields salt, and these salts when distilled are very pungent. | ||||
640. | ||||
Sea water filtered through mud or clay, leaves all its saltness in | ||||
it. Woollen stuffs placed on board ship absorb fresh water. If sea | ||||
water is distilled under a retort it becomes of the first excellence | ||||
and any one who has a little stove in his kitchen can, with the same | ||||
wood as he cooks with, distil a great quantity of water if the | ||||
retort is a large one. | ||||
641. | ||||
MOULD(?). | ||||
The mould (?) may be of Venus, or of Jupiter and Saturn and placed | ||||
frequently in the fire. And it should be worked with fine emery and | ||||
the mould (?) should be of Venus and Jupiter impasted over (?) | ||||
Venus. But first you will test Venus and Mercury mixed with Jove, | ||||
and take means to cause Mercury to disperse; and then fold them well | ||||
together so that Venus or Jupiter be connected as thinly as | ||||
possible. | ||||
[Footnote: See the note to 637.] | ||||
642. | ||||
Nitre, vitriol, cinnabar, alum, salt ammoniac, sublimated mercury, | ||||
rock salt, alcali salt, common salt, rock alum, alum schist (?), | ||||
arsenic, sublimate, realgar, tartar, orpiment, verdegris. | ||||
643. | ||||
Pitch four ounces virgin wax, four ounces incense, two ounces oil of | ||||
roses one ounce. | ||||
644. | ||||
Four ounces virgin wax, four ounces Greek pitch, two ounces incense, | ||||
one ounce oil of roses, first melt the wax and oil then the Greek | ||||
pitch then the other things in powder. | ||||
645. | ||||
Very thin glass may be cut with scissors and when placed over inlaid | ||||
work of bone, gilt, or stained of other colours you can saw it | ||||
through together with the bone and then put it together and it will | ||||
retain a lustre that will not be scratched nor worn away by rubbing | ||||
with the hand. | ||||
646. | ||||
TO DILUTE WHITE WINE AND MAKE IT PURPLE. | ||||
Powder gall nuts and let this stand 8 days in the white wine; and in | ||||
the same way dissolve vitriol in water, and let the water stand and | ||||
settle very clear, and the wine likewise, each by itself, and strain | ||||
them well; and when you dilute the white wine with the water the | ||||
wine will become red. | ||||
647. | ||||
Put marcasite into aqua fortis and if it turns green, know that it | ||||
has copper in it. Take it out with saltpetre and soft soap. | ||||
648. | ||||
A white horse may have the spots removed with the Spanish haematite | ||||
or with aqua fortis or with ... Removes the black hair on a white | ||||
horse with the singeing iron. Force him to the ground. | ||||
649. | ||||
FIRE. | ||||
If you want to make a fire which will set a hall in a blaze without | ||||
injury do this: first perfume the hall with a dense smoke of incense | ||||
or some other odoriferous substance: It is a good trick to play. Or | ||||
boil ten pounds of brandy to evaporate, but see that the hall is | ||||
completely closed and throw up some powdered varnish among the fumes | ||||
and this powder will be supported by the smoke; then go into the | ||||
room suddenly with a lighted torch and at once it will be in a | ||||
blaze. | ||||
650. | ||||
FIRE. | ||||
Take away that yellow surface which covers oranges and distill them | ||||
in an alembic, until the distillation may be said to be perfect. | ||||
FIRE. | ||||
Close a room tightly and have a brasier of brass or iron with fire | ||||
in it and sprinkle on it two pints of aqua vitae, a little at a | ||||
time, so that it may be converted into smoke. Then make some one | ||||
come in with a light and suddenly you will see the room in a blaze | ||||
like a flash of lightning, and it will do no harm to any one. | ||||
VII. | ||||
PHILOSOPHY AND HISTORY OF THE ART OF PAINTING. | ||||
The relation of art and nature (651. 652). | ||||
651. | ||||
What is fair in men, passes away, but not so in art. | ||||
652. | ||||
HE WHO DESPISES PAINTING LOVES NEITHER PHILOSOPHY NOR NATURE. | ||||
If you condemn painting, which is the only imitator of all visible | ||||
works of nature, you will certainly despise a subtle invention which | ||||
brings philosophy and subtle speculation to the consideration of the | ||||
nature of all forms--seas and plains, trees, animals, plants and | ||||
flowers--which are surrounded by shade and light. And this is true | ||||
knowledge and the legitimate issue of nature; for painting is born | ||||
of nature--or, to speak more correctly, we will say it is the | ||||
grandchild of nature; for all visible things are produced by nature, | ||||
and these her children have given birth to painting. Hence we may | ||||
justly call it the grandchild of nature and related to God. | ||||
Painting is superior to poetry (653. 654). | ||||
653. | ||||
THAT PAINTING SURPASSES ALL HUMAN WORKS BY THE SUBTLE CONSIDERATIONS | ||||
BELONGING TO IT. | ||||
The eye, which is called the window of the soul, is the principal | ||||
means by which the central sense can most completely and abundantly | ||||
appreciate the infinite works of nature; and the ear is the second, | ||||
which acquires dignity by hearing of the things the eye has seen. If | ||||
you, historians, or poets, or mathematicians had not seen things | ||||
with your eyes you could not report of them in writing. And if you, | ||||
0 poet, tell a story with your pen, the painter with his brush can | ||||
tell it more easily, with simpler completeness and less tedious to | ||||
be understood. And if you call painting dumb poetry, the painter may | ||||
call poetry blind painting. Now which is the worse defect? to be | ||||
blind or dumb? Though the poet is as free as the painter in the | ||||
invention of his fictions they are not so satisfactory to men as | ||||
paintings; for, though poetry is able to describe forms, actions and | ||||
places in words, the painter deals with the actual similitude of the | ||||
forms, in order to represent them. Now tell me which is the nearer | ||||
to the actual man: the name of man or the image of the man. The name | ||||
of man differs in different countries, but his form is never changed | ||||
but by death. | ||||
654. | ||||
And if the poet gratifies the sense by means of the ear, the painter | ||||
does so by the eye--the worthier sense; but I will say no more of | ||||
this but that, if a good painter represents the fury of a battle, | ||||
and if a poet describes one, and they are both together put before | ||||
the public, you will see where most of the spectators will stop, to | ||||
which they will pay most attention, on which they will bestow most | ||||
praise, and which will satisfy them best. Undoubtedly painting being | ||||
by a long way the more intelligible and beautiful, will please most. | ||||
Write up the name of God [Christ] in some spot and setup His image | ||||
opposite and you will see which will be most reverenced. Painting | ||||
comprehends in itself all the forms of nature, while you have | ||||
nothing but words, which are not universal as form is, and if you | ||||
have the effects of the representation, we have the representation | ||||
of the effects. Take a poet who describes the beauty of a lady to | ||||
her lover and a painter who represents her and you will see to which | ||||
nature guides the enamoured critic. Certainly the proof should be | ||||
allowed to rest on the verdict of experience. You have ranked | ||||
painting among the mechanical arts but, in truth, if painters were | ||||
as apt at praising their own works in writing as you are, it would | ||||
not lie under the stigma of so base a name. If you call it | ||||
mechanical because it is, in the first place, manual, and that it is | ||||
the hand which produces what is to be found in the imagination, you | ||||
too writers, who set down manually with the pen what is devised in | ||||
your mind. And if you say it is mechanical because it is done for | ||||
money, who falls into this error--if error it can be called--more | ||||
than you? If you lecture in the schools do you not go to whoever | ||||
pays you most? Do you do any work without pay? Still, I do not say | ||||
this as blaming such views, for every form of labour looks for its | ||||
reward. And if a poet should say: "I will invent a fiction with a | ||||
great purpose," the painter can do the same, as Apelles painted | ||||
Calumny. If you were to say that poetry is more eternal, I say the | ||||
works of a coppersmith are more eternal still, for time preserves | ||||
them longer than your works or ours; nevertheless they have not much | ||||
imagination [29]. And a picture, if painted on copper with enamel | ||||
colours may be yet more permanent. We, by our arts may be called the | ||||
grandsons of God. If poetry deals with moral philosophy, painting | ||||
deals with natural philosophy. Poetry describes the action of the | ||||
mind, painting considers what the mind may effect by the motions [of | ||||
the body]. If poetry can terrify people by hideous fictions, | ||||
painting can do as much by depicting the same things in action. | ||||
Supposing that a poet applies himself to represent beauty, ferocity, | ||||
or a base, a foul or a monstrous thing, as against a painter, he may | ||||
in his ways bring forth a variety of forms; but will the painter not | ||||
satisfy more? are there not pictures to be seen, so like the actual | ||||
things, that they deceive men and animals? | ||||
Painting is superior to sculpture (655. 656). | ||||
655. | ||||
THAT SCULPTURE IS LESS INTELLECTUAL THAN PAINTING, AND LACKS MANY | ||||
CHARACTERISTICS OF NATURE. | ||||
I myself, having exercised myself no less in sculpture than in | ||||
painting and doing both one and the other in the same degree, it | ||||
seems to me that I can, without invidiousness, pronounce an opinion | ||||
as to which of the two is of the greatest merit and difficulty and | ||||
perfection. In the first place sculpture requires a certain light, | ||||
that is from above, a picture carries everywhere with it its own | ||||
light and shade. Thus sculpture owes its importance to light and | ||||
shade, and the sculptor is aided in this by the nature, of the | ||||
relief which is inherent in it, while the painter whose art | ||||
expresses the accidental aspects of nature, places his effects in | ||||
the spots where nature must necessarily produce them. The sculptor | ||||
cannot diversify his work by the various natural colours of objects; | ||||
painting is not defective in any particular. The sculptor when he | ||||
uses perspective cannot make it in any way appear true; that of the | ||||
painter can appear like a hundred miles beyond the picture itself. | ||||
Their works have no aerial perspective whatever, they cannot | ||||
represent transparent bodies, they cannot represent luminous bodies, | ||||
nor reflected lights, nor lustrous bodies--as mirrors and the like | ||||
polished surfaces, nor mists, nor dark skies, nor an infinite number | ||||
of things which need not be told for fear of tedium. As regards the | ||||
power of resisting time, though they have this resistance [Footnote | ||||
19: From what is here said as to painting on copper it is very | ||||
evident that Leonardo was not acquainted with the method of painting | ||||
in oil on thin copper plates, introduced by the Flemish painters of | ||||
the XVIIth century. J. LERMOLIEFF has already pointed out that in | ||||
the various collections containing pictures by the great masters of | ||||
the Italian Renaissance, those painted on copper (for instance the | ||||
famous reading Magdalen in the Dresden Gallery) are the works of a | ||||
much later date (see _Zeitschrift fur bildende Kunst_. Vol. X pg. | ||||
333, and: _Werke italienischer Master in den Galerien von Munchen, | ||||
Dresden und Berlin_. Leipzig 1880, pg. 158 and 159.)--Compare No. | ||||
654, 29.], a picture painted on thick copper covered with white | ||||
enamel on which it is painted with enamel colours and then put into | ||||
the fire again and baked, far exceeds sculpture in permanence. It | ||||
may be said that if a mistake is made it is not easy to remedy it; | ||||
it is but a poor argument to try to prove that a work be the nobler | ||||
because oversights are irremediable; I should rather say that it | ||||
will be more difficult to improve the mind of the master who makes | ||||
such mistakes than to repair the work he has spoilt. | ||||
656. | ||||
We know very well that a really experienced and good painter will | ||||
not make such mistakes; on the contrary, with sound rules he will | ||||
remove so little at a time that he will bring his work to a good | ||||
issue. Again the sculptor if working in clay or wax, can add or | ||||
reduce, and when his model is finished it can easily be cast in | ||||
bronze, and this is the last operation and is the most permanent | ||||
form of sculpture. Inasmuch as that which is merely of marble is | ||||
liable to ruin, but not bronze. Hence a painting done on copper | ||||
which as I said of painting may be added to or altered, resembles | ||||
sculpture in bronze, which, having first been made in wax could then | ||||
be altered or added to; and if sculpture in bronze is durable, this | ||||
work in copper and enamel is absolutely imperishable. Bronze is but | ||||
dark and rough after all, but this latter is covered with various | ||||
and lovely colours in infinite variety, as has been said above; or | ||||
if you will have me only speak of painting on panel, I am content to | ||||
pronounce between it and sculpture; saying that painting is the more | ||||
beautiful and the more imaginative and the more copious, while | ||||
sculpture is the more durable but it has nothing else. Sculpture | ||||
shows with little labour what in painting appears a miraculous thing | ||||
to do; to make what is impalpable appear palpable, flat objects | ||||
appear in relief, distant objects seem close. In fact painting is | ||||
adorned with infinite possibilities which sculpture cannot command. | ||||
Aphorisms (657-659). | ||||
657. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
Men and words are ready made, and you, O Painter, if you do not know | ||||
how to make your figures move, are like an orator who knows not how | ||||
to use his words. | ||||
658. | ||||
As soon as the poet ceases to represent in words what exists in | ||||
nature, he in fact ceases to resemble the painter; for if the poet, | ||||
leaving such representation, proceeds to describe the flowery and | ||||
flattering speech of the figure, which he wishes to make the | ||||
speaker, he then is an orator and no longer a poet nor a painter. | ||||
And if he speaks of the heavens he becomes an astrologer, and | ||||
philosopher; and a theologian, if he discourses of nature or God. | ||||
But, if he restricts himself to the description of objects, he would | ||||
enter the lists against the painter, if with words he could satisfy | ||||
the eye as the painter does. | ||||
659. | ||||
Though you may be able to tell or write the exact description of | ||||
forms, the painter can so depict them that they will appear alive, | ||||
with the shadow and light which show the expression of a face; which | ||||
you cannot accomplish with the pen though it can be achieved by the | ||||
brush. | ||||
On the history of painting (660. 661). | ||||
660. | ||||
THAT PAINTING DECLINES AND DETERIORATES FROM AGE TO AGE, WHEN | ||||
PAINTERS HAVE NO OTHER STANDARD THAN PAINTING ALREADY DONE. | ||||
Hence the painter will produce pictures of small merit if he takes | ||||
for his standard the pictures of others. But if he will study from | ||||
natural objects he will bear good fruit; as was seen in the painters | ||||
after the Romans who always imitated each other and so their art | ||||
constantly declined from age to age. After these came Giotto the | ||||
Florentine who--not content with imitating the works of Cimabue his | ||||
master--being born in the mountains and in a solitude inhabited only | ||||
by goats and such beasts, and being guided by nature to his art, | ||||
began by drawing on the rocks the movements of the goats of which he | ||||
was keeper. And thus he began to draw all the animals which were to | ||||
be found in the country, and in such wise that after much study he | ||||
excelled not only all the masters of his time but all those of many | ||||
bygone ages. Afterwards this art declined again, because everyone | ||||
imitated the pictures that were already done; thus it went on from | ||||
century to century until Tomaso, of Florence, nicknamed Masaccio, | ||||
showed by his perfect works how those who take for their standard | ||||
any one but nature--the mistress of all masters--weary themselves in | ||||
vain. And, I would say about these mathematical studies that those | ||||
who only study the authorities and not the works of nature are | ||||
descendants but not sons of nature the mistress of all good authors. | ||||
Oh! how great is the folly of those who blame those who learn from | ||||
nature [Footnote 22: _lasciando stare li autori_. In this | ||||
observation we may detect an indirect evidence that Leonardo | ||||
regarded his knowledge of natural history as derived from his own | ||||
investigations, as well as his theories of perspective and optics. | ||||
Compare what he says in praise of experience (Vol II; _XIX_).], | ||||
setting aside those authorities who themselves were the disciples of | ||||
nature. | ||||
661. | ||||
That the first drawing was a simple line drawn round the shadow of a | ||||
man cast by the sun on a wall. | ||||
The painter's scope. | ||||
662. | ||||
The painter strives and competes with nature. | ||||
_X. | ||||
Studies and Sketches for Pictures and Decorations. | ||||
An artist's manuscript notes can hardly be expected to contain any | ||||
thing more than incidental references to those masterpieces of his | ||||
work of which the fame, sounded in the writings of his | ||||
contemporaries, has left a glorious echo to posterity. We need not | ||||
therefore be surprised to find that the texts here reproduced do not | ||||
afford us such comprehensive information as we could wish. On the | ||||
other hand, the sketches and studies prepared by Leonardo for the | ||||
two grandest compositions he ever executed: The Fresco of the Last | ||||
Supper in the Refectory of Santa Maria delle Grazie at Milan, and | ||||
the Cartoon of the Battle of Anghiari, for the Palazzo della | ||||
Signoria at Florence--have been preserved; and, though far from | ||||
complete, are so much more numerous than the manuscript notes, that | ||||
we are justified in asserting that in value and interest they amply | ||||
compensate for the meagerness of the written suggestions. | ||||
The notes for the composition of the Last Supper, which are given | ||||
under nos._ 665 _and_ 666 _occur in a MS. at South Kensington, II2, | ||||
written in the years_ 1494-1495. _This MS. sketch was noted down not | ||||
more than three or four years before the painting was executed, | ||||
which justifies the inference that at the time when it was written | ||||
the painter had not made up his mind definitely even as to the | ||||
general scheme of the work; and from this we may also conclude that | ||||
the drawings of apostles' heads at Windsor, in red chalk, must be | ||||
ascribed to a later date. They are studies for the head of St. | ||||
Matthew, the fourth figure on Christ's left hand--see Pl. XL VII, | ||||
the sketch (in black chalk) for the head of St. Philip, the third | ||||
figure on the left hand--see Pl. XL VIII, for St. Peter's right | ||||
arm--see Pl. XLIX, and for the expressive head of Judas which has | ||||
unfortunately somewhat suffered by subsequent restoration of | ||||
outlines,--see Pl. L. According to a tradition, as unfounded as it | ||||
is improbable, Leonardo made use of the head of Padre Bandelli, the | ||||
prior of the convent, as the prototype of his Judas; this however | ||||
has already been contradicted by Amoretti "Memorie storiche" cap. | ||||
XIV. The study of the head of a criminal on Pl. LI has, it seems to | ||||
me, a better claim to be regarded as one of the preparatory sketches | ||||
for the head of Judas. The Windsor collection contains two old | ||||
copies of the head of St. Simon, the figure to the extreme left of | ||||
Christ, both of about equal merit (they are marked as Nos._ 21 _and_ | ||||
36_)--the second was reproduced on Pl. VIII of the Grosvenor | ||||
Gallery Publication in_ 1878. _There is also at Windsor a drawing in | ||||
black chalk of folded hands (marked with the old No._ 212; _No. LXI | ||||
of the Grosvenor Gallery Publication) which I believe to be a copy | ||||
of the hands of St. John, by some unknown pupil. A reproduction of | ||||
the excellent drawings of heads of Apostles in the possession of H. | ||||
R. H. the Grand Duchess of Weimar would have been out of my province | ||||
in this work, and, with regard to them, I must confine myself to | ||||
pointing out that the difference in style does not allow of our | ||||
placing the Weimar drawings in the same category as those here | ||||
reproduced. The mode of grouping in the Weimar drawings is of itself | ||||
sufficient to indicate that they were not executed before the | ||||
picture was painted, but, on the contrary, afterwards, and it is, on | ||||
the face of it, incredible that so great a master should thus have | ||||
copied from his own work. | ||||
The drawing of Christ's head, in the Brera palace at Milan was | ||||
perhaps originally the work of Leonardo's hand; it has unfortunately | ||||
been entirely retouched and re-drawn, so that no decisive opinion | ||||
can be formed as to its genuineness. | ||||
The red chalk drawing reproduced on Pl. XLVI is in the Accademia at | ||||
Venice; it was probably made before the text, Nos._ 664 _and_ 665, | ||||
_was written. | ||||
The two pen and ink sketches on Pl. XLV seem to belong to an even | ||||
earlier date; the more finished drawing of the two, on the right | ||||
hand, represents Christ with only St. John and Judas and a third | ||||
disciple whose action is precisely that described in No._ 666, | ||||
_Pl._ 4. _It is hardly necessary to observe that the other sketches | ||||
on this page and the lines of text below the circle (containing the | ||||
solution of a geometrical problem) have no reference to the picture | ||||
of the Last Supper. With this figure of Christ may be compared a | ||||
similar pen and ink drawing reproduced on page_ 297 _below on the | ||||
left hand; the original is in the Louvre. On this page again the | ||||
rest of the sketches have no direct bearing on the composition of | ||||
the Last Supper, not even, as it seems to me, the group of four men | ||||
at the bottom to the right hand--who are listening to a fifth, in | ||||
their midst addressing them. Moreover the writing on this page (an | ||||
explanation of a disk shaped instrument) is certainly not in the | ||||
same style as we find constantly used by Leonardo after the year_ | ||||
1489. | ||||
_It may be incidentally remarked that no sketches are known for the | ||||
portrait of "Mona Lisa", nor do the MS. notes ever allude to it, | ||||
though according to Vasari the master had it in hand for fully four | ||||
years. | ||||
Leonardo's cartoon for the picture of the battle of Anghiari has | ||||
shared the fate of the rival work, Michaelangelo's "Bathers summoned | ||||
to Battle". Both have been lost in some wholly inexplicable manner. | ||||
I cannot here enter into the remarkable history of this work; I can | ||||
only give an account of what has been preserved to us of Leonardo's | ||||
scheme and preparations for executing it. The extent of the material | ||||
in studies and drawings was till now quite unknown. Their | ||||
publication here may give some adequate idea of the grandeur of this | ||||
famous work. The text given as No._ 669 _contains a description of | ||||
the particulars of the battle, but for the reasons given in the note | ||||
to this text, I must abandon the idea of taking this passage as the | ||||
basis of my attempt to reconstruct the picture as the artist | ||||
conceived and executed it. | ||||
I may here remind the reader that Leonardo prepared the cartoon in | ||||
the Sala del Papa of Santa Maria Novella at Florence and worked | ||||
there from the end of October 1503 till February 1504, and then was | ||||
busied with the painting in the Sala del Consiglio in the Palazzo | ||||
della Signoria, till the work was interrupted at the end of May | ||||
1506. (See Milanesi's note to Vasari pp. 43--45 Vol. IV ed. 1880.) | ||||
Vasari, as is well known, describes only one scene or episode of the | ||||
cartoon--the Battle for the Standard in the foreground of the | ||||
composition, as it would seem; and this only was ever finished as a | ||||
mural decoration in the Sala del Consiglio. This portion of the | ||||
composition is familiar to all from the disfigured copy engraved by | ||||
Edelinck. Mariette had already very acutely observed that Edelinck | ||||
must surely have worked from a Flemish copy of the picture. There is | ||||
in the Louvre a drawing by Rubens (No. 565) which also represents | ||||
four horsemen fighting round a standard and which agrees with | ||||
Edelinck's engraving, but the engraving reverses the drawing. An | ||||
earlier Flemish drawing, such as may have served as the model for | ||||
both Rubens and Edelinck, is in the Uffizi collection (see | ||||
Philpots's Photograph, No. 732). It seems to be a work of the second | ||||
half of the XVIth century, a time when both the picture and the | ||||
cartoon had already been destroyed. It is apparently the production | ||||
of a not very skilled hand. Raphael Trichet du Fresne, 1651, | ||||
mentions that a small picture by Leonardo himself of the Battle of | ||||
the Standard was then extant in the Tuileries; by this he probably | ||||
means the painting on panel which is now in the possession of Madame | ||||
Timbal in Paris, and which has lately been engraved by Haussoullier | ||||
as a work by Leonardo. The picture, which is very carefully painted, | ||||
seems to me however to be the work of some unknown Florentine | ||||
painter, and probably executed within the first ten years of the | ||||
XVIth century. At the same time, it would seem to be a copy not from | ||||
Leonardo's cartoon, but from his picture in the Palazzo della | ||||
Signoria; at any rate this little picture, and the small Flemish | ||||
drawing in Florence are the oldest finished copies of this episode | ||||
in the great composition of the Battle of Anghiari. | ||||
In his Life of Raphael, Vasari tells us that Raphael copied certain | ||||
works of Leonardo's during his stay in Florence. Raphael's first | ||||
visit to Florence lasted from the middle of October 1504 till July | ||||
1505, and he revisited it in the summer of 1506. The hasty sketch, | ||||
now in the possession of the University of Oxford and reproduced on | ||||
page 337 also represents the Battle of the Standard and seems to | ||||
have been made during his first stay, and therefore not from the | ||||
fresco but from the cartoon; for, on the same sheet we also find, | ||||
besides an old man's head drawn in Leonardo's style, some studies | ||||
for the figure of St. John the Martyr which Raphael used in 1505 in | ||||
his great fresco in the Church of San Severo at Perugia. | ||||
Of Leonardo's studies for the Battle of Anghiari I must in the first | ||||
place point to five, on three of which--Pl. LII 2, Pl. LIII, Pl. | ||||
LVI--we find studies for the episode of the Standard. The standard | ||||
bearer, who, in the above named copies is seen stooping, holding on | ||||
to the staff across his shoulder, is immediately recognisable as the | ||||
left-hand figure in Raphael's sketch, and we find it in a similar | ||||
attitude in Leonardo's pen and ink drawing in the British | ||||
Museum--Pl. LII, 2--the lower figure to the right. It is not | ||||
difficult to identify the same figure in two more complicated groups | ||||
in the pen and ink drawings, now in the Accademia at Venice--Pl. | ||||
LIII, and Pl. LIV--where we also find some studies of foot soldiers | ||||
fighting. On the sheet in the British Museum--Pl. LII, 2--we find, | ||||
among others, one group of three horses galloping forwards: one | ||||
horseman is thrown and protects himself with his buckler against the | ||||
lance thrusts of two others on horseback, who try to pierce him as | ||||
they ride past. The same action is repeated, with some variation, in | ||||
two sketches in pen and ink on a third sheet, in the Accademia at | ||||
Venice, Pl. LV; a coincidence which suggests the probability of such | ||||
an incident having actually been represented on the cartoon. We are | ||||
not, it is true, in a position to declare with any certainty which | ||||
of these three dissimilar sketches may have been the nearest to the | ||||
group finally adopted in executing the cartoon. | ||||
With regard, however, to one of the groups of horsemen it is | ||||
possible to determine with perfect certainty not only which | ||||
arrangement was preferred, but the position it occupied in the | ||||
composition. The group of horsemen on Pl. LVII is a drawing in black | ||||
chalk at Windsor, which is there attributed to Leonardo, but which | ||||
appears to me to be the work of Cesare da Sesto, and the | ||||
Commendatore Giov. Morelli supports me in this view. It can hardly | ||||
be doubted that da Sesto, as a pupil of Leonardo's, made this | ||||
drawing from his master's cartoon, if we compare it with the copy | ||||
made by Raphael--here reproduced, for just above the fighting | ||||
horseman in Raphael's copy it is possible to detect a horse which is | ||||
seen from behind, going at a slower pace, with his tail flying out | ||||
to the right and the same horse may be seen in the very same | ||||
attitude carrying a dimly sketched rider, in the foreground of | ||||
Cesare da Sesto's drawing._ | ||||
_If a very much rubbed drawing in black chalk at Windsor--Pl. | ||||
LVI--is, as it appears to be, the reversed impression of an original | ||||
drawing, it is not difficult to supplement from it the portions | ||||
drawn by Cesare da Sesto. Nay, it may prove possible to reconstruct | ||||
the whole of the lost cartoon from the mass of materials we now have | ||||
at hand which we may regard as the nucleus of the composition. A | ||||
large pen and ink drawing by Raphael in the Dresden collection, | ||||
representing three horsemen fighting, and another, by Cesare da | ||||
Sesto, in the Uffizi, of light horsemen fighting are a further | ||||
contribution which will help us to reconstruct it._ | ||||
_The sketch reproduced on Pl. LV gives a suggestive example of the | ||||
way in which foot-soldiers may have been introduced into the cartoon | ||||
as fighting among the groups of horsemen; and I may here take the | ||||
opportunity of mentioning that, for reasons which it would be out of | ||||
place to enlarge upon here, I believe the two genuine drawings by | ||||
Raphael's hand in his "Venetian sketch-book" as it is called--one of | ||||
a standard bearer marching towards the left, and one of two | ||||
foot-soldiers armed with spears and fighting with a horseman--to be | ||||
undoubtedly copies from the cartoon of the Battle of Anghiari._ | ||||
_Leonardo's two drawings, preserved in the museum at Buda-Pesth and | ||||
reproduced on pages 338 and 339 are preliminary studies for the | ||||
heads of fighting warriors. The two heads drawn in black chalk (pg. | ||||
338) and the one seen in profile, turned to the left, drawn in red | ||||
chalk (pg. 339), correspond exactly with those of two horsemen in | ||||
the scene of the fight round the standard as we see them in Madame | ||||
Timbal's picture and in the other finished copies. An old copy of | ||||
the last named drawing by a pupil of Leonardo is in MS. C. A. 187b; | ||||
561b (See Saggio, Tav. XXII). Leonardo used to make such finished | ||||
studies of heads as those, drawn on detached sheets, before | ||||
beginning his pictures from his drawings--compare the preparatory | ||||
studies for the fresco of the Last Supper, given on Pl. XLVII and | ||||
Pl. L. Other drawings of heads, all characterised by the expression | ||||
of vehement excitement that is appropriate to men fighting, are to | ||||
be seen at Windsor (No. 44) and at the Accademia at Venice (IV, 13); | ||||
at the back of one of the drawings at Buda-Pesth there is the bust | ||||
of a warrior carrying a spear on his left shoulder, holding up the | ||||
left arm (See Csatakepek a XVI--lk Szazadbol osszeallitotta Pvlszky | ||||
Karoly). These drawings may have been made for other portions of the | ||||
cartoon, of which no copies exist, and thus we are unable to | ||||
identify these preparatory drawings. Finally I may add that a sketch | ||||
of fighting horse and foot soldiers, formerly in the possession of | ||||
M. Thiers and published by Charles Blanc in his "Vies des Peintres" | ||||
can hardly be accepted as genuine. It is not to be found, as I am | ||||
informed, among the late President's property, and no one appears to | ||||
know where it now is._ | ||||
_An attempted reconstruction of the Cartoon, which is not only | ||||
unsuccessful but perfectly unfounded, is to be seen in the | ||||
lithograph by Bergeret, published in Charles Blanc's "Vies des | ||||
peintres" and reprinted in "The great Artists. L. da Vinci", p. 80. | ||||
This misleading pasticcio may now be rejected without hesitation._ | ||||
_There are yet a few original drawings by Leonardo which might be | ||||
mentioned here as possibly belonging to the cartoon of the Battle; | ||||
such as the pen and ink sketches on Pl. XXI and on Pl. XXXVIII, No. | ||||
3, but we should risk too wide a departure from the domain of | ||||
ascertained fact._ | ||||
_With regard to the colours and other materials used by Leonardo the | ||||
reader may be referred to the quotations from the accounts for the | ||||
picture in question given by Milanesi in his edition of Vasari (Vol. | ||||
IV, p. 44, note) where we find entries of a similar character to | ||||
those in Leonardo's note books for the year 1505; S. K. M. 12 (see | ||||
No. 636)._ | ||||
_That Leonardo was employed in designing decorations and other | ||||
preparations for high festivals, particularly for the court of | ||||
Milan, we learn not only from the writings of his contemporaries but | ||||
from his own incidental allusions; for instance in MS. C. l5b (1), | ||||
l. 9. In the arrangement of the texts referring to this I have | ||||
placed those first, in which historical personages are named--Nos. | ||||
670-674. Among the descriptions of Allegorical subjects two texts | ||||
lately found at Oxford have been included, Nos. 676 and 677. They | ||||
are particularly interesting because they are accompanied by large | ||||
sketches which render the meaning of the texts perfectly clear. It | ||||
is very intelligible that in other cases, where there are no | ||||
illustrative sketches, the notes must necessarily remain obscure or | ||||
admit of various interpretations. The literature of the time affords | ||||
ample evidence of the use of such allegorical representations, | ||||
particularly during the Carnival and in Leonardo's notes we find the | ||||
Carnival expressly mentioned--Nos. 685 and 704. Vasari in his Life | ||||
of Pontormo, particularly describes that artist's various | ||||
undertakings for Carnival festivities. These very graphic | ||||
descriptions appear to me to throw great light in more ways than one | ||||
on the meaning of Leonardo's various notes as to allegorical | ||||
representations and also on mottoes and emblems--Nos. 681-702. In | ||||
passing judgment on the allegorical sketches and emblems it must not | ||||
be overlooked that even as pictures they were always accompanied by | ||||
explanations in words. Several finished drawings of allegorical | ||||
compositions or figures have been preserved, but as they have no | ||||
corresponding explanation in the MSS. they had no claim to be | ||||
reproduced here. The female figure on Pl. XXVI may perhaps be | ||||
regarded as a study for such an allegorical painting, of which the | ||||
purport would have been explained by an inscription._ | ||||
On Madonna pictures. | ||||
663. | ||||
[In the autumn of] 1478 I began the two Madonna [pictures]. | ||||
[Footnote: Photographs of this page have been published by BRAUN, | ||||
No. 439, and PHILPOT, No. 718. | ||||
1. _Incominciai_. We have no other information as to the two | ||||
pictures of the Madonna here spoken of. As Leonardo here tells us | ||||
that he had begun two Madonnas at the same time, the word | ||||
'_incominciai_' may be understood to mean that he had begun at the | ||||
same time preparatory studies for two pictures to be painted later. | ||||
If this is so, the non-existence of the pictures may be explained by | ||||
supposing that they were only planned and never executed. I may here | ||||
mention a few studies for pictures of the Madonna which probably | ||||
belong to this early time; particularly a drawing in silver-point on | ||||
bluish tinted paper at Windsor--see Pl. XL, No. 3--, a drawing of | ||||
which the details have almost disappeared in the original but have | ||||
been rendered quite distinct in the reproduction; secondly a slight | ||||
pen and ink sketch in, the Codex VALLARDI, in the Louvre, fol. 64, | ||||
No. 2316; again a silver point drawing of a Virgin and child drawn | ||||
over again with the pen in the His de la Salle collection also in | ||||
the Louvre, No. 101. (See Vicomte BOTH DE TAUZIA, _Notice des | ||||
dessins de la collection His de la Salle, exposes au Louvre_. Paris | ||||
1881, pp. 80, 81.) This drawing is, it is true, traditionally | ||||
ascribed to Raphael, but the author of the catalogue very justly | ||||
points out its great resemblance with the sketches for Madonnas in | ||||
the British Museum which are indisputably Leonardo's. Some of these | ||||
have been published by Mr. HENRY WALLIS in the Art Journal, New Ser. | ||||
No. 14, Feb. 1882. If the non-existence of the two pictures here | ||||
alluded to justifies my hypothesis that only studies for such | ||||
pictures are meant by the text, it may also be supposed that the | ||||
drawings were made for some comrade in VERROCCHIO'S atelier. (See | ||||
VASARI, Sansoni's ed. Florence 1880. Vol. IV, p. 564): "_E perche a | ||||
Lerenzo piaceva fuor di modo la maniera di Lionardo, la seppe cosi | ||||
bene imitare, che niuno fu che nella pulitezza e nel finir l'opere | ||||
con diligenza l'imitasse piu di lui_." Leonardo's notes give me no | ||||
opportunity of discussing the pictures executed by him in Florence, | ||||
before he moved to Milan. So the studies for the unfinished picture | ||||
of the Adoration of the Magi--in the Uffizi, Florence--cannot be | ||||
described here, nor would any discussion about the picture in the | ||||
Louvre "_La Vierge aux Rochers_" be appropriate in the absence of | ||||
all allusion to it in the MSS. Therefore, when I presently add a few | ||||
remarks on this painting in explanation of the Master's drawings for | ||||
it, it will be not merely with a view to facilitate critical | ||||
researches about the picture now in the National Gallery, London, | ||||
which by some critics has been pronounced to be a replica of the | ||||
Louvre picture, but also because I take this opportunity of | ||||
publishing several finished studies of the Master's which, even if | ||||
they were not made in Florence but later in Milan, must have been | ||||
prior to the painting of the Last Supper. The original picture in | ||||
Paris is at present so disfigured by dust and varnish that the | ||||
current reproductions in photography actually give evidence more of | ||||
the injuries to which the picture has been exposed than of the | ||||
original work itself. The wood-cut given on p. 344, is only intended | ||||
to give a general notion of the composition. It must be understood | ||||
that the outline and expression of the heads, which in the picture | ||||
is obscured but not destroyed, is here altogether missed. The | ||||
facsimiles which follow are from drawings which appear to me to be | ||||
studies for "_La Vierge aux Rochers_." | ||||
1. A drawing in silver point on brown toned paper of a woman's head | ||||
looking to the left. In the Royal Library at Turin, apparently a | ||||
study from nature for the Angel's head (Pl. XLII). | ||||
2. A study of drapery for the left leg of the same figure, done with | ||||
the brush, Indian ink on greenish paper, the lights heightened with | ||||
white. | ||||
The original is at Windsor, No. 223. The reproduction Pl. XLIII is | ||||
defective in the shadow on the upper part of the thigh, which is not | ||||
so deep as in the original; it should also be observed that the | ||||
folds of the drapery near the hips are somewhat altered in the | ||||
finished work in the Louvre, while the London copy shows a greater | ||||
resemblance to this study in that particular. | ||||
3. A study in red chalk for the bust of the Infant Christ--No. 3 in | ||||
the Windsor collection (Pl. XLIV). The well-known silver-point | ||||
drawing on pale green paper, in the Louvre, of a boy's head (No. 363 | ||||
in REISET, _Notice des dessins, Ecoles d'Italie_) seems to me to be | ||||
a slightly altered copy, either from the original picture or from | ||||
this red chalk study. | ||||
4. A silver-point study on greenish paper, for the head of John the | ||||
Baptist, reproduced on p. 342. This was formerly in the Codex | ||||
Vallardi and is now exhibited among the drawings in the Louvre. The | ||||
lights are, in the original, heightened with white; the outlines, | ||||
particularly round the head and ear, are visibly restored. | ||||
There is a study of an outstretched hand--No. 288 in the Windsor | ||||
collection--which was published in the Grosvenor Gallery | ||||
Publication, 1878, simply under the title of: "No. 72 Study of a | ||||
hand, pointing" which, on the other hand, I regard as a copy by a | ||||
pupil. The action occurs in the kneeling angel of the Paris picture | ||||
and not in the London copy. | ||||
These four genuine studies form, I believe, a valuable substitute in | ||||
the absence of any MS. notes referring to the celebrated Paris | ||||
picture.] | ||||
Bernardo di Bandino's Portrait. | ||||
664. | ||||
A tan-coloured small cap, A doublet of black serge, A black jerkin | ||||
lined A blue coat lined, with fur of foxes' breasts, and the collar | ||||
of the jerkin covered with black and white stippled velvet Bernardo | ||||
di Bandino Baroncelli; black hose. | ||||
[Footnote: These eleven lines of text are by the side of the pen and | ||||
ink drawing of a man hanged--Pl. LXII, No. 1. This drawing was | ||||
exhibited in 1879 at the _Ecole des Beaux-Arts_ in Paris and the | ||||
compilers of the catalogue amused themselves by giving the victim's | ||||
name as follows: "_Un pendu, vetu d'une longue robe, les mains liees | ||||
sur le dos ... Bernardo di Bendino Barontigni, marchand de | ||||
pantalons_" (see _Catalogue descriptif des Dessins de Mailres | ||||
anciens exposes a l'Ecole des Beaux Arts_, Paris 1879; No. 83, pp. | ||||
9-10). Now, the criminal represented here, is none other than | ||||
Bernardino di Bandino Baroncelli the murderer of Giuliano de'Medici, | ||||
whose name as a coadjutor in the conspiracy of the Pazzi has gained | ||||
a melancholy notoriety by the tragedy of the 26th April 1478. | ||||
Bernardo was descended from an ancient family and the son of the man | ||||
who, under King Ferrante, was President of the High Court of Justice | ||||
in Naples. His ruined fortunes, it would seem, induced him to join | ||||
the Pazzi; he and Francesco Pazzi were entrusted with the task of | ||||
murdering Giuliano de'Medici on the fixed day. Their victim not | ||||
appearing in the cathedral at the hour when they expected him, the | ||||
two conspirators ran to the palace of the Medici and induced him to | ||||
accompany them. Giuliano then took his place in the chancel of the | ||||
Cathedral, and as the officiating priest raised the Host--the sign | ||||
agreed upon--Bernardo stabbed the unsuspecting Giuliano in the | ||||
breast with a short sword; Giuliano stepped backwards and fell dead. | ||||
The attempt on Lorenzo's life however, by the other conspirators at | ||||
the same moment, failed of success. Bernardo no sooner saw that | ||||
Lorenzo tried to make his escape towards the sacristy, than he | ||||
rushed upon him, and struck down Francesco Nori who endeavoured to | ||||
protect Lorenzo. How Lorenzo then took refuge behind the brazen | ||||
doors of the sacristy, and how, as soon as Giuliano's death was made | ||||
known, the further plans of the conspirators were defeated, while a | ||||
terrible vengeance overtook all the perpetrators and accomplices, | ||||
this is no place to tell. Bernardo Bandini alone seemed to be | ||||
favoured by fortune; he hid first in the tower of the Cathedral, and | ||||
then escaped undiscovered from Florence. Poliziano, who was with | ||||
Lorenzo in the Cathedral, says in his 'Conjurationis Pactianae | ||||
Commentarium': "_Bandinus fugitans in Tiphernatem incidit, a quo in | ||||
aciem receptus Senas pervenit_." And Gino Capponi in summing up the | ||||
reports of the numerous contemporary narrators of the event, says: | ||||
"_Bernardo Bandini ricoverato in Costantinopoli, fu per ordine del | ||||
Sultano preso e consegnato a un Antonio di Bernardino dei Medici, | ||||
che Lorenzo aveva mandato apposta in Turchia: cosi era grande la | ||||
potenza di quest' uomo e grande la voglia di farne mostra e che non | ||||
restasse in vita chi aveagli ucciso il fratello, fu egli applicato | ||||
appena giunto_" (_Storia della Republica di Firenze II_, 377, 378). | ||||
Details about the dates may be found in the _Chronichetta di | ||||
Belfredello Strinati Alfieri_: "_Bernardo di Bandino Bandini | ||||
sopradetto ne venne preso da Gostantinopoti a di 14. Dicembre 1479 e | ||||
disaminato, che fu al Bargello, fu impiccato alle finestre di detto | ||||
Bargello allato alla Doana a di 29. Dicembre MCCCCLXXIX che pochi di | ||||
stette_." It may however be mentioned with reference to the mode of | ||||
writing the name of the assassin that, though most of his | ||||
contemporaries wrote Bernardo Bandini, in the _Breve Chronicon | ||||
Caroli Petri de Joanninis_ he is called Bernardo di Bandini | ||||
Baroncelli; and, in the _Sententiae Domini Matthaei de Toscana_, | ||||
Bernardus Joannis Bandini de Baroncellis, as is written on | ||||
Leonardo's drawing of him when hanged. Now VASARI, in the life of | ||||
_Andrea del Castagno_ (Vol. II, 680; ed. Milanesi 1878), tells us | ||||
that in 1478 this painter was commissioned by order of the Signoria | ||||
to represent the members of the Pazzi conspiracy as traitors, on the | ||||
facade of the Palazzo del Podesta--the Bargello. This statement is | ||||
obviously founded on a mistake, for Andrea del Castagno was already | ||||
dead in 1457. He had however been commissioned to paint Rinaldo | ||||
degli Albizzi, when declared a rebel and exiled in 1434, and his | ||||
adherents, as hanging head downwards; and in consequence he had | ||||
acquired the nickname of Andrea degl' Impiccati. On the 21st July | ||||
1478 the Council of Eight came to the following resolution: "_item | ||||
servatis etc. deliberaverunt et santiaverunt Sandro Botticelli pro | ||||
ejus labore in pingendo proditores flor. quadraginta largos_" (see | ||||
G. MILANESI, _Arch. star. VI_ (1862) p. 5 note.) | ||||
As has been told, Giuliano de' Medici was murdered on the 26th April | ||||
1478, and we see by this that only three months later Botticelli was | ||||
paid for his painting of the "_proditores_". We can however hardly | ||||
suppose that all the members of the conspiracy were depicted by him | ||||
in fresco on the facade of the palace, since no fewer than eighty | ||||
had been condemned to death. We have no means of knowing whether, | ||||
besides Botticelli, any other painters, perhaps Leonardo, was | ||||
commissioned, when the criminals had been hanged in person out of | ||||
the windows of the Palazzo del Podesta to represent them there | ||||
afterwards in effigy in memory of their disgrace. Nor do we know | ||||
whether the assassin who had escaped may at first not have been | ||||
provisionally represented as hanged in effigy. Now, when we try to | ||||
connect the historical facts with this drawing by Leonardo | ||||
reproduced on Pl. LXII, No. I, and the full description of the | ||||
conspirator's dress and its colour on the same sheet, there seems to | ||||
be no reasonable doubt that Bernardo Bandini is here represented as | ||||
he was actually hanged on December 29th, 1479, after his capture at | ||||
Constantinople. The dress is certainly not that in which he | ||||
committed the murder. A long furred coat might very well be worn at | ||||
Constantinople or at Florence in December, but hardly in April. The | ||||
doubt remains whether Leonardo described Bernardo's dress so fully | ||||
because it struck him as remarkable, or whether we may not rather | ||||
suppose that this sketch was actually made from nature with the | ||||
intention of using it as a study for a wall painting to be executed. | ||||
It cannot be denied that the drawing has all the appearance of | ||||
having been made for this purpose. Be this as it may, the sketch | ||||
under discussion proves, at any rate, that Leonardo was in Florence | ||||
in December 1479, and the note that accompanies it is valuable as | ||||
adding one more characteristic specimen to the very small number of | ||||
his MSS. that can be proved to have been written between 1470 and | ||||
1480.] | ||||
Notes on the Last Supper (665-668). | ||||
665. | ||||
One who was drinking and has left the glass in its position and | ||||
turned his head towards the speaker. | ||||
Another, twisting the fingers of his hands together turns with stern | ||||
brows to his companion [6]. Another with his hands spread open shows | ||||
the palms, and shrugs his shoulders up his ears making a mouth of | ||||
astonishment [8]. | ||||
[9] Another speaks into his neighbour's ear and he, as he listens to | ||||
him, turns towards him to lend an ear [10], while he holds a knife | ||||
in one hand, and in the other the loaf half cut through by the | ||||
knife. [13] Another who has turned, holding a knife in his hand, | ||||
upsets with his hand a glass on the table [14]. | ||||
[Footnote 665, 666: In the original MS. there is no sketch to | ||||
accompany these passages, and if we compare them with those drawings | ||||
made by Leonardo in preparation for the composition of the | ||||
picture--Pl. XLV, XLVI--, (compare also Pl. LII, 1 and the drawings | ||||
on p. 297) it is impossible to recognise in them a faithful | ||||
interpretation of the whole of this text; but, if we compare these | ||||
passages with the finished picture (see p. 334) we shall see that in | ||||
many places they coincide. For instance, compare No. 665, 1. 6--8, | ||||
with the fourth figure on the right hand of Christ. The various | ||||
actions described in lines 9--10, 13--14 are to be seen in the group | ||||
of Peter, John and Judas; in the finished picture however it is not | ||||
a glass but a salt cellar that Judas is upsetting.] | ||||
666. | ||||
Another lays his hand on the table and is looking. Another blows his | ||||
mouthful. [3] Another leans forward to see the speaker shading his | ||||
eyes with his hand. [5] Another draws back behind the one who leans | ||||
forward, and sees the speaker between the wall and the man who is | ||||
leaning [Footnote: 6. _chinato_. I have to express my regret for | ||||
having misread this word, written _cinato_ in the original, and | ||||
having altered it to _"ciclo"_ when I first published this text, in | ||||
'The Academy' for Nov. 8, 1879 immediately after I had discovered | ||||
it, and subsequently in the small biography of Leonardo da Vinci | ||||
(Great Artists) p. 29.]. | ||||
[Footnote: In No. 666. Line I must refer to the furthest figure on | ||||
the left; 3, 5 and 6 describe actions which are given to the group | ||||
of disciples on the left hand of Christ.] | ||||
667. | ||||
CHRIST. | ||||
Count Giovanni, the one with the Cardinal of Mortaro. | ||||
[Footnote: As this note is in the same small Manuscript as the | ||||
passage here immediately preceding it, I may be justified in | ||||
assuming that Leonardo meant to use the features of the person here | ||||
named as a suitable model for the figure of Christ. The celebrated | ||||
drawing of the head of Christ, now hanging in the Brera Gallery at | ||||
Milan, has obviously been so much restored that it is now impossible | ||||
to say, whether it was ever genuine. We have only to compare it with | ||||
the undoubtedly genuine drawings of heads of the disciples in PI. | ||||
XLVII, XLVIII and L, to admit that not a single line of the Milan | ||||
drawing in its present state can be by the same hand.] | ||||
668. | ||||
Philip, Simon, Matthew, Thomas, James the Greater, Peter, Philip, | ||||
Andrew, Bartholomew. | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. XLVI. The names of the disciples are given in the | ||||
order in which they are written in the original, from right to left, | ||||
above each head. The original drawing is here slightly reduced in | ||||
scale; it measures 39 centimetres in length by 26 in breadth.] | ||||
669. | ||||
On the battle of Anghiari. | ||||
Florentine | ||||
Neri di Gino Capponi | ||||
Bernardetto de' Medici | ||||
Micheletto, | ||||
Niccolo da Pisa | ||||
Conte Francesco | ||||
Pietro Gian Paolo | ||||
Guelfo Orsino, | ||||
Messer Rinaldo degli | ||||
Albizzi | ||||
Begin with the address of Niccolo Piccinino to the soldiers and the | ||||
banished Florentines among whom are Messer Rinaldo degli Albizzi and | ||||
other Florentines. Then let it be shown how he first mounted on | ||||
horseback in armour; and the whole army came after him--40 squadrons | ||||
of cavalry, and 2000 foot soldiers went with him. Very early in the | ||||
morning the Patriarch went up a hill to reconnoitre the country, | ||||
that is the hills, fields and the valley watered by a river; and | ||||
from thence he beheld Niccolo Picinino coming from Borgo San | ||||
Sepolcro with his people, and with a great dust; and perceiving them | ||||
he returned to the camp of his own people and addressed them. Having | ||||
spoken he prayed to God with clasped hands, when there appeared a | ||||
cloud in which Saint Peter appeared and spoke to the Patriarch.--500 | ||||
cavalry were sent forward by the Patriarch to hinder or check the | ||||
rush of the enemy. In the foremost troop Francesco the son of | ||||
Niccolo Piccinino [24] was the first to attack the bridge which was | ||||
held by the Patriarch and the Florentines. Beyond the bridge to his | ||||
left he sent forward some infantry to engage ours, who drove them | ||||
back, among whom was their captain Micheletto [29] whose lot it was | ||||
to be that day at the head of the army. Here, at this bridge there | ||||
is a severe struggle; our men conquer and the enemy is repulsed. | ||||
Here Guido and Astorre, his brother, the Lord of Faenza with a great | ||||
number of men, re-formed and renewed the fight, and rushed upon the | ||||
Florentines with such force that they recovered the bridge and | ||||
pushed forward as far as the tents. But Simonetto advanced with 600 | ||||
horse, and fell upon the enemy and drove them back once more from | ||||
the place, and recaptured the bridge; and behind him came more men | ||||
with 2000 horse soldiers. And thus for a long time they fought with | ||||
varying fortune. But then the Patriarch, in order to divert the | ||||
enemy, sent forward Niccolo da Pisa [44] and Napoleone Orsino, a | ||||
beardless lad, followed by a great multitude of men, and then was | ||||
done another great feat of arms. At the same time Niccolo Piccinino | ||||
urged forward the remnant of his men, who once more made ours give | ||||
way; and if it had not been that the Patriarch set himself at their | ||||
head and, by his words and deeds controlled the captains, our | ||||
soldiers would have taken to flight. The Patriarch had some | ||||
artillery placed on the hill and with these he dispersed the enemy's | ||||
infantry; and the disorder was so complete that Niccolo began to | ||||
call back his son and all his men, and they took to flight towards | ||||
Borgo. And then began a great slaughter of men; none escaped but the | ||||
foremost of those who had fled or who hid themselves. The battle | ||||
continued until sunset, when the Patriarch gave his mind to | ||||
recalling his men and burying the dead, and afterwards a trophy was | ||||
erected. | ||||
[Footnote: 669. This passage does not seem to me to be in Leonardo's | ||||
hand, though it has hitherto been generally accepted as genuine. Not | ||||
only is the writing unlike his, but the spelling also is quite | ||||
different. I would suggest that this passage is a description of the | ||||
events of the battle drawn up for the Painter by order of the | ||||
Signoria, perhaps by some historian commissioned by them, to serve | ||||
as a scheme or programme of the work. The whole tenor of the style | ||||
seems to me to argue in favour of this theory; and besides, it would | ||||
be in no way surprising that such a document should have been | ||||
preserved among Leonardo's autographs.] | ||||
Allegorical representations referring to the duke of Milan | ||||
(670-673). | ||||
670. | ||||
Ermine with blood Galeazzo, between calm weather and a | ||||
representation of a tempest. | ||||
[Footnote: 670. Only the beginning of this text is legible; the | ||||
writing is much effaced and the sense is consequently obscure. It | ||||
seems to refer like the following passage to an allegorical | ||||
picture.] | ||||
671. | ||||
Il Moro with spectacles, and Envy depicted with False Report and | ||||
Justice black for il Moro. | ||||
Labour as having a branch of vine [_or_ a screw] in her hand. | ||||
672. | ||||
Il Moro as representing Good Fortune, with hair, and robes, and his | ||||
hands in front, and Messer Gualtieri taking him by the robes with a | ||||
respectful air from below, having come in from the front [5]. | ||||
Again, Poverty in a hideous form running behind a youth. Il Moro | ||||
covers him with the skirt of his robe, and with his gilt sceptre he | ||||
threatens the monster. | ||||
A plant with its roots in the air to represent one who is at his | ||||
last;--a robe and Favour. | ||||
Of tricks [_or_ of magpies] and of burlesque poems [_or_ of | ||||
starlings]. | ||||
Those who trust themselves to live near him, and who will be a large | ||||
crowd, these shall all die cruel deaths; and fathers and mothers | ||||
together with their families will be devoured and killed by cruel | ||||
creatures. | ||||
[Footnote: 1--10 have already been published by _Amoretti_ in | ||||
_Memorie Storiche_ cap. XII. He adds this note with regard to | ||||
Gualtieri: "_A questo M. Gualtieri come ad uomo generoso e benefico | ||||
scrive il Bellincioni un Sonetto (pag, 174) per chiedergli un | ||||
piacere; e 'l Tantio rendendo ragione a Lodovico il Moro, perche | ||||
pubblicasse le Rime del Bellincioni; cio hammi imposto, gli dice: | ||||
l'humano fidele, prudente e sollicito executore delli tuoi | ||||
comandamenti Gualtero, che fa in tutte le cose ove tu possi far | ||||
utile, ogni studio vi metti._" A somewhat mysterious and evidently | ||||
allegorical composition--a pen and ink drawing--at Windsor, see PL | ||||
LVIII, contains a group of figures in which perhaps the idea is | ||||
worked out which is spoken of in the text, lines 1-5.] | ||||
673. | ||||
He was blacker than a hornet, his eyes were as red as a burning fire | ||||
and he rode on a tall horse six spans across and more than 20 long | ||||
with six giants tied up to his saddle-bow and one in his hand which | ||||
he gnawed with his teeth. And behind him came boars with tusks | ||||
sticking out of their mouths, perhaps ten spans. | ||||
Allegorical representations (674--678). | ||||
674. | ||||
Above the helmet place a half globe, which is to signify our | ||||
hemisphere, in the form of a world; on which let there be a peacock, | ||||
richly decorated, and with his tail spread over the group; and every | ||||
ornament belonging to the horse should be of peacock's feathers on a | ||||
gold ground, to signify the beauty which comes of the grace bestowed | ||||
on him who is a good servant. | ||||
On the shield a large mirror to signify that he who truly desires | ||||
favour must be mirrored in his virtues. | ||||
On the opposite side will be represented Fortitude, in like manner | ||||
in her place with her pillar in her hand, robed in white, to signify | ||||
... And all crowned; and Prudence with 3 eyes. The housing of the | ||||
horse should be of plain cloth of gold closely sprinkled with | ||||
peacock's eyes, and this holds good for all the housings of the | ||||
horse, and the man's dress. And the man's crest and his neck-chain | ||||
are of peacock's feathers on golden ground. | ||||
On the left side will be a wheel, the centre of which should be | ||||
attached to the centre of the horse's hinder thigh piece, and in the | ||||
centre Prudence is seen robed in red, Charity sitting in a fiery | ||||
chariot and with a branch of laurel in her hand, to signify the hope | ||||
which comes of good service. | ||||
[21] Messer Antonio Grimani of Venice companion of Antonio Maria | ||||
[23]. | ||||
[Footnote: _Messer Antonio Gri_. His name thus abbreviated is, there | ||||
can be no doubt, Grimani. Antonio Grimani was the famous Doge who in | ||||
1499 commanded the Venetian fleet in battle against the Turks. But | ||||
after the abortive conclusion of the expedition--Ludovico being the | ||||
ally of the Turks who took possession of Friuli--, Grimani was driven | ||||
into exile; he went to live at Rome with his son Cardinal Domenico | ||||
Grimani. On being recalled to Venice he filled the office of Doge | ||||
from 1521 to 1523. _Antonio Maria_ probably means Antonio Maria | ||||
Grimani, the Patriarch of Aquileia.] | ||||
675. | ||||
Fame should be depicted as covered all over with tongues instead of | ||||
feathers, and in the figure of a bird. | ||||
676. | ||||
Pleasure and Pain represent as twins, since there never is one | ||||
without the other; and as if they were united back to back, since | ||||
they are contrary to each other. | ||||
[6] Clay, gold. | ||||
[Footnote: 7. _oro. fango_: gold, clay. These words stand below the | ||||
allegorical figure.] | ||||
If you take Pleasure know that he has behind him one who will deal | ||||
you Tribulation and Repentance. | ||||
[9] This represents Pleasure together with Pain, and show them as | ||||
twins because one is never apart from the other. They are back to | ||||
back because they are opposed to each other; and they exist as | ||||
contraries in the same body, because they have the same basis, | ||||
inasmuch as the origin of pleasure is labour and pain, and the | ||||
various forms of evil pleasure are the origin of pain. Therefore it | ||||
is here represented with a reed in his right hand which is useless | ||||
and without strength, and the wounds it inflicts are poisoned. In | ||||
Tuscany they are put to support beds, to signify that it is here | ||||
that vain dreams come, and here a great part of life is consumed. It | ||||
is here that much precious time is wasted, that is, in the morning, | ||||
when the mind is composed and rested, and the body is made fit to | ||||
begin new labours; there again many vain pleasures are enjoyed; both | ||||
by the mind in imagining impossible things, and by the body in | ||||
taking those pleasures that are often the cause of the failing of | ||||
life. And for these reasons the reed is held as their support. | ||||
[Footnote: 676. The pen and ink drawing on PI. LIX belongs to this | ||||
passage.] | ||||
[Footnote: 8. _tribolatione_. In the drawing caltrops may be seen | ||||
lying in the old man's right hand, others are falling and others | ||||
again are shewn on the ground. Similar caltrops are drawn in MS. | ||||
Tri. p. 98 and underneath them, as well as on page 96 the words | ||||
_triboli di ferro_ are written. From the accompanying text it | ||||
appears that they were intended to be scattered on the ground at the | ||||
bottom of ditches to hinder the advance of the enemy. Count Giulio | ||||
Porro who published a short account of the Trivulzio MS. in the | ||||
"_Archivio Storico Lombardo_", Anno VIII part IV (Dec. 31, 1881) has | ||||
this note on the passages treating of "_triboli_": "_E qui | ||||
aggiungero che anni sono quando venne fabbricata la nuova | ||||
cavallerizza presso il castello di Milano, ne furono trovati due che | ||||
io ho veduto ed erano precisamente quali si trovano descritti e | ||||
disegnati da Leonardo in questo codice_". | ||||
There can therefore be no doubt that this means of defence was in | ||||
general use, whether it were originally Leonardo's invention or not. | ||||
The play on the word "_tribolatione_", as it occurs in the drawing | ||||
at Oxford, must then have been quite intelligible.] | ||||
[Footnote: 9--22. These lines, in the original, are written on the | ||||
left side of the page and refer to the figure shown on PI. LXI. Next | ||||
to it is placed the group of three figures given in PI. LX No. I. | ||||
Lines 21 and 22, which are written under it, are the only | ||||
explanation given.] | ||||
Evil-thinking is either Envy or Ingratitude. | ||||
677. | ||||
Envy must be represented with a contemptuous motion of the hand | ||||
towards heaven, because if she could she would use her strength | ||||
against God; make her with her face covered by a mask of fair | ||||
seeming; show her as wounded in the eye by a palm branch and by an | ||||
olive-branch, and wounded in the ear by laurel and myrtle, to | ||||
signify that victory and truth are odious to her. Many thunderbolts | ||||
should proceed from her to signify her evil speaking. Let her be | ||||
lean and haggard because she is in perpetual torment. Make her heart | ||||
gnawed by a swelling serpent, and make her with a quiver with | ||||
tongues serving as arrows, because she often offends with it. Give | ||||
her a leopard's skin, because this creature kills the lion out of | ||||
envy and by deceit. Give her too a vase in her hand full of flowers | ||||
and scorpions and toads and other venomous creatures; make her ride | ||||
upon death, because Envy, never dying, never tires of ruling. Make | ||||
her bridle, and load her with divers kinds of arms because all her | ||||
weapons are deadly. | ||||
Toleration. | ||||
Intolerable. | ||||
No sooner is Virtue born than Envy comes into the world to attack | ||||
it; and sooner will there be a body without a shadow than Virtue | ||||
without Envy. | ||||
[Footnote: The larger of the two drawings on PI. LXI is explained by | ||||
the first 21 lines of this passage. L. 22 and 23, which are written | ||||
above the space between the two drawings, do not seem to have any | ||||
reference to either. L. 24-27 are below the allegorical twin figure | ||||
which they serve to explain.] | ||||
678. | ||||
When Pluto's Paradise is opened, then there may be devils placed in | ||||
twelve pots like openings into hell. Here will be Death, the Furies, | ||||
ashes, many naked children weeping; living fires made of various | ||||
colours.... | ||||
679. | ||||
John the Baptist | ||||
Saint Augustin | ||||
Saint Peter | ||||
Paul | ||||
Elisabeth | ||||
Saint Clara. | ||||
Bernardino | ||||
Our Lady Louis | ||||
Bonaventura | ||||
Anthony of Padua. | ||||
Saint Francis. | ||||
Francis, | ||||
Anthony, a lily and book; | ||||
Bernardino with the [monogram of] Jesus, | ||||
Louis with 3 fleur de lys on his breast and | ||||
the crown at his feet, | ||||
Bonaventura with Seraphim, | ||||
Saint Clara with the tabernacle, | ||||
Elisabeth with a Queen's crown. | ||||
[Footnote: 679. The text of the first six lines is written within a | ||||
square space of the same size as the copy here given. The names are | ||||
written in the margin following the order in which they are here | ||||
printed. In lines 7--12 the names of those saints are repeated of | ||||
whom it seemed necessary to point out the emblems.] | ||||
List of drawings. | ||||
680. | ||||
A head, full face, of a young man | ||||
with fine flowing hair, | ||||
Many flowers drawn from nature, | ||||
A head, full face, with curly hair, | ||||
Certain figures of Saint Jerome, | ||||
[6] The measurements of a figure, | ||||
Drawings of furnaces. | ||||
A head of the Duke, | ||||
[9] many designs for knots, | ||||
4 studies for the panel of Saint Angelo | ||||
A small composition of Girolamo da Fegline, | ||||
A head of Christ done with the pen, | ||||
[13] 8 Saint Sebastians, | ||||
Several compositions of Angels, | ||||
A chalcedony, | ||||
A head in profile with fine hair, | ||||
Some pitchers seen in(?) perspective, | ||||
Some machines for ships, | ||||
Some machines for waterworks, | ||||
A head, a portrait of Atalanta raising her | ||||
face; | ||||
The head of Geronimo da Fegline, | ||||
The head of Gian Francisco Borso, | ||||
Several throats of old women, | ||||
Several heads of old men, | ||||
Several nude figures, complete, | ||||
Several arms, eyes, feet, and positions, | ||||
A Madonna, finished, | ||||
Another, nearly in profile, | ||||
Head of Our Lady ascending into Heaven, | ||||
A head of an old man with long chin, | ||||
A head of a gypsy girl, | ||||
A head with a hat on, | ||||
A representation of the Passion, a cast, | ||||
A head of a girl with her hair gathered in a knot, | ||||
A head, with the brown hair dressed. | ||||
[Footnote: 680. This has already been published by AMORETTI _Memorie | ||||
storiche_ cap. XVI. His reading varies somewhat from that here | ||||
given, _e. g._ l. 5 and 6. _Certi Sangirolami in su d'una figura_; | ||||
and instead of I. 13. _Un San Bastiano_.] | ||||
[Footnote: 680. 9. _Molti disegni di gruppi_. VASARI in his life of | ||||
Leonardo (IV, 21, ed. MILANESI 1880) says: "_Oltreche perse tempo | ||||
fino a disegnare_ gruppi _di corde fatti con ordine, e che da un | ||||
capo seguissi tutto il resto fino all' altro, tanto che s'empiessi | ||||
un tondo; che se ne vede in istampa uno difficilissimo e molto | ||||
bello, e nel mezzo vi sono queste parole: Leonardus Vinci | ||||
Accademia_". _Gruppi_ must here be understood as a technical | ||||
expression for those twisted ornaments which are well known through | ||||
wood cuts. AMORETTI mentions six different ones in the Ambrosian | ||||
Library. I am indebted to M. DELABORDE for kindly informing me that | ||||
the original blocks of these are preserved in his department in the | ||||
Bibliotheque Nationale in Paris. On the cover of these volumes is a | ||||
copy from one of them. The size of the original is 23 1/2 | ||||
centimetres by 26 1/4. The centre portion of another is given on p. | ||||
361. G. Govi remarks on these ornaments (_Saggio_ p. 22): "_Codesti | ||||
gruppi eran probabilmente destinati a servir di modello a ferri da | ||||
rilegatori per adornar le cartelle degli scolari (?). Fregi | ||||
somigliantissimi a questi troviamo infatti impressi in oro sui | ||||
cartoni di vari volumi contemporanei, e li vediam pur figurare nelle | ||||
lettere iniziali di alcune edizioni del tempo._" | ||||
Durer who copied them, omitting the inscription, added to the second | ||||
impressions his own monogram. In his diary he designates them simply | ||||
as "_Die sechs Knoten_" (see THAUSING, Life of A. Durer I, 362, | ||||
363). In Leonardo's MSS. we find here and there little sketches or | ||||
suggestions for similar ornaments. Compare too G. MONGERI, _L'Arte | ||||
in Milano_, p. 315 where an ornament of the same character is given | ||||
from the old decorations of the vaulted ceiling of the Sacristy of | ||||
S. Maria delle Grazie.] | ||||
[Footnote: 680, 17. The meaning in which the word _coppi_, literally | ||||
pitchers, is here used I am unable to determine; but a change to | ||||
_copie_ seems to me too doubtful to be risked.] | ||||
681. | ||||
Stubborn rigour. | ||||
Doomed rigour. | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. LXII, No. 2, the two upper pen and ink drawings. | ||||
The originals, in the Windsor collection are slightly washed with | ||||
colour. The background is blue sky; the plough and the instrument | ||||
with the compass are reddish brown, the sun is tinted yellow]. | ||||
682. | ||||
Obstacles cannot crush me | ||||
Every obstacle yields to stern resolve | ||||
He who is fixed to a star does not change | ||||
his mind. | ||||
[Footnote: This text is written to elucidate two sketches which were | ||||
obviously the first sketches for the drawings reproduced on PL LXII, | ||||
No. 2.] | ||||
683. | ||||
Ivy is [a type] of longevity. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original there is, near this text, a sketch of a | ||||
coat wreathed above the waist with ivy.] | ||||
684. | ||||
Truth the sun. | ||||
falsehood a mask. | ||||
innocence, | ||||
malignity. | ||||
Fire destroys falsehood, | ||||
that is sophistry, and | ||||
restores truth, driving out | ||||
darkness. | ||||
Fire may be represented as the destroy of | ||||
all sophistry, and as the | ||||
image and demonstration of truth; | ||||
because it is light and drives | ||||
out darkness which conceals | ||||
all essences [or subtle things]. | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. LXIII. L. 1-8 are in the middle of the page; 1. | ||||
9-14 to the right below; 1. 15-22 below in the middle column. The | ||||
rest of the text is below the sketches on the left. There are some | ||||
other passages on this page relating to geometry.] | ||||
TRUTH. | ||||
Fire destroys all sophistry, that is deceit; | ||||
and maintains truth alone, that is gold. | ||||
Truth at last cannot be hidden. | ||||
Dissimulation is of no avail. Dissimulation is | ||||
to no purpose before | ||||
so great a judge. | ||||
Falsehood puts on a mask. | ||||
Nothing is hidden under the sun. | ||||
Fire is to represent truth because it | ||||
destroys all sophistry and lies; and the | ||||
mask is for lying and falsehood | ||||
which conceal truth. | ||||
685. | ||||
Movement will cease before we are | ||||
weary | ||||
of being useful. | ||||
Movement will fail sooner than usefulness. | ||||
Death sooner than I am never weary of | ||||
weariness. being useful, | ||||
In serving others I is a motto for carnval. | ||||
cannot do enough. Without fatigue. | ||||
No labour is | ||||
sufficient to tire me. | ||||
Hands into which | ||||
ducats and precious | ||||
stones fall like snow; they | ||||
never become tired by serving, | ||||
but this service is only for its | ||||
utility and not for our I am never weary | ||||
own benefit. of being useful. | ||||
Naturally | ||||
nature has so disposed me. | ||||
686. | ||||
This shall be placed in the | ||||
hand of Ingratitude. | ||||
Wood nourishes the fire that | ||||
consumes it. | ||||
687. | ||||
TO REPRESENT INGRATITUDE. | ||||
When the sun appears | ||||
which dispels darkness in | ||||
general, you put out the | ||||
light which dispelled it | ||||
for you in particular | ||||
for your need and convenience. | ||||
688. | ||||
On this side Adam and Eve on the other; | ||||
O misery of mankind, of how many things do | ||||
you make yourself the slave for money! | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. LXIV. The figures of Adam and Eve in the clouds | ||||
here alluded to would seem to symbolise their superiority to all | ||||
earthly needs.] | ||||
689. | ||||
Thus are base unions sundered. | ||||
[Footnote: A much blurred sketch is on the page by this text. It | ||||
seems to represent an unravelled plait or tissue.] | ||||
690. | ||||
Constancy does not begin, but is that | ||||
which perseveres. | ||||
[Footnote: A drawing in red chalk, also rubbed, which stands in the | ||||
original in the middle of this text, seems to me to be intended for | ||||
a sword hilt, held in a fist.] | ||||
691. | ||||
Love, Fear, and Esteem,-- | ||||
Write these on three stones. Of servants. | ||||
692. | ||||
Prudence Strength. | ||||
693. | ||||
Fame alone raises herself to Heaven, | ||||
because virtuous things are in favour with God. | ||||
Disgrace should be represented upside | ||||
down, because all her deeds are contrary to | ||||
God and tend to hell. | ||||
694. | ||||
Short liberty. | ||||
695. | ||||
Nothing is so much to be feared as Evil | ||||
Report. | ||||
This Evil Report is born of life. | ||||
696. | ||||
Not to disobey. | ||||
697. | ||||
A felled tree which is shooting | ||||
again. | ||||
I am still hopeful. | ||||
A falcon, | ||||
Time. | ||||
[Footnote: I. _Albero tagliato_. This emblem was displayed during | ||||
the Carnival at Florence in 1513. See VASARI VI, 251, ed. MILANESI | ||||
1881. But the coincidence is probably accidental.] | ||||
698. | ||||
Truth here makes Falsehood torment | ||||
lying tongues. | ||||
699. | ||||
Such as harm is when it hurts me not, | ||||
is good which avails me not. | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. LX, No. 2. Compare this sketch with that on PI. | ||||
LXII, No. 2. Below the two lines of the text there are two more | ||||
lines: _li guchi (giunchi) che ritego le paglucole (pagliucole) | ||||
chelli (che li) anniegano_.] | ||||
700. | ||||
He who offends others, does not secure himself. | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. LX, No. 3.] | ||||
701. | ||||
Ingratitude. | ||||
[Footnote: See PI. LX, No. 4. Below the bottom sketches are the | ||||
unintelligible words "_sta stilli_." For "_Ingratitudo_" compare | ||||
also Nos. 686 and 687.] | ||||
702. | ||||
One's thoughts turn towards Hope. | ||||
[Footnote: 702. By the side of this passage is a sketch of | ||||
a cage with a bird sitting in it.] | ||||
Ornaments and Decorations for feasts (703-705). | ||||
703. | ||||
A bird, for a comedy. | ||||
[Footnote: The biographies say so much, and the author's notes say | ||||
so little of the invention attributed to Leonardo of making | ||||
artificial birds fly through the air, that the text here given is of | ||||
exceptional interest from being accompanied by a sketch. It is a | ||||
very slight drawing of a bird with outspread wings, which appears to | ||||
be sliding down a stretched string. Leonardo's flying machines and | ||||
his studies of the flight of birds will be referred to later.] | ||||
704. | ||||
A DRESS FOR THE CARNIVAL. | ||||
To make a beautiful dress cut it in thin cloth and give it an | ||||
odoriferous varnish, made of oil of turpentine and of varnish in | ||||
grain, with a pierced stencil, which must be wetted, that it may not | ||||
stick to the cloth; and this stencil may be made in a pattern of | ||||
knots which afterwards may be filled up with black and the ground | ||||
with white millet.[Footnote 7: The grains of black and white millet | ||||
would stick to the varnish and look like embroidery.] | ||||
[Footnote: Ser Giuliano, da Vinci the painter's brother, had been | ||||
commissioned, with some others, to order and to execute the garments | ||||
of the Allegorical figures for the Carnival at Florence in 1515--16; | ||||
VASARI however is incorrect in saying of the Florentine Carnival of | ||||
1513: "_equelli che feciono ed ordinarono gli abiti delle figure | ||||
furono Ser Piero da Vinci, padre di Lonardo, e Bernardino di | ||||
Giordano, bellissimi ingegni_" (See MILANESI'S ed. Voi. VI, pg. | ||||
251.)] | ||||
705. | ||||
Snow taken from the high peaks of mountains might be carried to hot | ||||
places and let to fall at festivals in open places at summer time. | ||||
*** End of Volume 1 | ||||
The Notebooks of Leonardo Da Vinci | ||||
Volume 2 | ||||
Translated by Jean Paul Richter | ||||
1888 | ||||
XI. | ||||
The notes on Sculpture. | ||||
Compared with the mass of manuscript treating of Painting, a very | ||||
small number of passages bearing on the practice and methods of | ||||
Sculpture are to be found scattered through the note books; these | ||||
are here given at the beginning of this section (Nos. 706-709). | ||||
There is less cause for surprise at finding that the equestrian | ||||
statue of Francesco Sforza is only incidentally spoken of; for, | ||||
although Leonardo must have worked at it for a long succession of | ||||
years, it is not in the nature of the case that it could have given | ||||
rise to much writing. We may therefore regard it as particularly | ||||
fortunate that no fewer than thirteen notes in the master's | ||||
handwriting can be brought together, which seem to throw light on | ||||
the mysterious history of this famous work. Until now writers on | ||||
Leonardo were acquainted only with the passages numbered 712, 719, | ||||
720, 722 and 723. | ||||
In arranging these notes on sculpture I have given the precedence to | ||||
those which treat of the casting of the monument, not merely because | ||||
they are the fullest, but more especially with a view to | ||||
reconstructing the monument, an achievement which really almost lies | ||||
within our reach by combining and comparing the whole of the | ||||
materials now brought to light, alike in notes and in sketches. | ||||
A good deal of the first two passages, Nos. 710 and 711, which refer | ||||
to this subject seems obscure and incomprehensible; still, they | ||||
supplement each other and one contributes in no small degree to the | ||||
comprehension of the other. A very interesting and instructive | ||||
commentary on these passages may be found in the fourth chapter of | ||||
Vasari's Introduzione della Scultura under the title "Come si fanno | ||||
i modelli per fare di bronzo le figure grandi e picciole, e come le | ||||
forme per buttarle; come si armino di ferri, e come si gettino di | ||||
metallo," &c. Among the drawings of models of the moulds for casting | ||||
we find only one which seems to represent the horse in the act of | ||||
galloping--No. 713. All the other designs show the horse as pacing | ||||
quietly and as these studies of the horse are accompanied by copious | ||||
notes as to the method of casting, the question as to the position | ||||
of the horse in the model finally selected, seems to be decided by | ||||
preponderating evidence. "Il cavallo dello Sforza"--C. Boito remarks | ||||
very appositely in the Saggio on page 26, "doveva sembrare fratello | ||||
al cavallo del Colleoni. E si direbbe che questo fosse figlio del | ||||
cavallo del Gattamelata, il quale pare figlio di uno dei quattro | ||||
cavalli che stavano forse sull' Arco di Nerone in Roma" (now at | ||||
Venice). The publication of the Saggio also contains the | ||||
reproduction of a drawing in red chalk, representing a horse walking | ||||
to the left and supported by a scaffolding, given here on Pl. LXXVI, | ||||
No. 1. It must remain uncertain whether this represents the model as | ||||
it stood during the preparations for casting it, or whether--as | ||||
seems to me highly improbable--this sketch shows the model as it was | ||||
exhibited in 1493 on the Piazza del Castello in Milan under a | ||||
triumphal arch, on the occasion of the marriage of the Emperor | ||||
Maximilian to Bianca Maria Sforza. The only important point here is | ||||
to prove that strong evidence seems to show that, of the numerous | ||||
studies for the equestrian statue, only those which represent the | ||||
horse pacing agree with the schemes of the final plans. | ||||
The second group of preparatory sketches, representing the horse as | ||||
galloping, must therefore be considered separately, a distinction | ||||
which, in recapitulating the history of the origin of the monument | ||||
seems justified by the note given under No. 720. | ||||
Galeazza Maria Sforza was assassinated in 1476 before his scheme for | ||||
erecting a monument to his father Francesco Sforza could be carried | ||||
into effect. In the following year Ludovico il Moro the young | ||||
aspirant to the throne was exiled to Pisa, and only returned to | ||||
Milan in 1479 when he was Lord (Governatore) of the State of Milan, | ||||
in 1480 after the minister Cecco Simonetta had been murdered. It may | ||||
have been soon after this that Ludovico il Moro announced a | ||||
competition for an equestrian statue, and it is tolerably certain | ||||
that Antonio del Pollajuolo took part in it, from this passage in | ||||
Vasari's Life of this artist: "E si trovo, dopo la morte sua, il | ||||
disegno e modello che a Lodovico Sforza egli aveva fatto per la | ||||
statua a cavallo di Francesco Sforza, duca di Milano; il quale | ||||
disegno e nel nostro Libro, in due modi: in uno egli ha sotto | ||||
Verona; nell'altro, egli tutto armato, e sopra un basamento pieno di | ||||
battaglie, fa saltare il cavallo addosso a un armato; ma la cagione | ||||
perche non mettesse questi disegni in opera, non ho gia potuto | ||||
sapere." One of Pollajuolo's drawings, as here described, has lately | ||||
been discovered by Senatore Giovanni Morelli in the Munich | ||||
Pinacothek. Here the profile of the horseman is a portrait of | ||||
Francesco Duke of Milan, and under the horse, who is galloping to | ||||
the left, we see a warrior thrown and lying on the ground; precisely | ||||
the same idea as we find in some of Leonardo's designs for the | ||||
monument, as on Pl. LXVI, LXVII, LXVIII, LXIX and LXXII No. 1; and, | ||||
as it is impossible to explain this remarkable coincidence by | ||||
supposing that either artist borrowed it from the other, we can only | ||||
conclude that in the terms of the competition the subject proposed | ||||
was the Duke on a horse in full gallop, with a fallen foe under its | ||||
hoofs. | ||||
Leonardo may have been in the competition there and then, but the | ||||
means for executing the monument do not seem to have been at once | ||||
forthcoming. It was not perhaps until some years later that Leonardo | ||||
in a letter to the Duke (No. 719) reminded him of the project for | ||||
the monument. Then, after he had obeyed a summons to Milan, the plan | ||||
seems to have been so far modified, perhaps in consequence of a | ||||
remonstrance on the part of the artist, that a pacing horse was | ||||
substituted for one galloping, and it may have been at the same time | ||||
that the colossal dimensions of the statue were first decided on. | ||||
The designs given on Pl. LXX, LXXI, LXXII, 2 and 3, LXXIII and LXXIV | ||||
and on pp. 4 and 24, as well as three sketches on Pl. LXIX may be | ||||
studied with reference to the project in its new form, though it is | ||||
hardly possible to believe that in either of these we see the design | ||||
as it was actually carried out. It is probable that in Milan | ||||
Leonardo worked less on drawings, than in making small models of wax | ||||
and clay as preparatory to his larger model. Among the drawings | ||||
enumerated above, one in black chalk, Pl. LXXIII--the upper sketch | ||||
on the right hand side, reminds us strongly of the antique statue of | ||||
Marcus Aurelius. If, as it would seem, Leonardo had not until then | ||||
visited Rome, he might easily have known this statue from drawings | ||||
by his former master and friend Verrocchio, for Verrocchio had been | ||||
in Rome for a long time between 1470 and 1480. In 1473 Pope Sixtus | ||||
IV had this antique equestrian statue restored and placed on a new | ||||
pedestal in front of the church of San Giovanni in Luterano. | ||||
Leonardo, although he was painting independently as early as in 1472 | ||||
is still spoken of as working in Verrocchio's studio in 1477. Two | ||||
years later the Venetian senate decided on erecting an equestrian | ||||
statue to Colleoni; and as Verrocchio, to whom the work was | ||||
entrusted, did not at once move from Florence to Venice--where he | ||||
died in 1488 before the casting was completed--but on the contrary | ||||
remained in Florence for some years, perhaps even till 1485, | ||||
Leonardo probably had the opportunity of seeing all his designs for | ||||
the equestrian statue at Venice and the red chalk drawing on Pl. | ||||
LXXIV may be a reminiscence of it. | ||||
The pen and ink drawing on Pl. LXXII, No. 3, reminds us of | ||||
Donatello's statue of Gattamelata at Padua. However it does not | ||||
appear that Leonardo was ever at Padua before 1499, but we may | ||||
conclude that he took a special interest in this early bronze statue | ||||
and the reports he could procure of it, form an incidental remark | ||||
which is to be found in C. A. 145a; 432a, and which will be given in | ||||
Vol. II under Ricordi or Memoranda. Among the studies--in the widest | ||||
sense of the word--made in preparation statue we may include the | ||||
Anatomy of the Horse which Lomazzo and Vas mention; the most | ||||
important parts of this work still exist in the Queen's Li Windsor. | ||||
It was beyond a doubt compiled by Leonardo when at Milan; only | ||||
interesting records to be found among these designs are reproduced | ||||
in Nos. 716a but it must be pointed out that out of 40 sheets of | ||||
studies of the movements of the belonging to that treatise, a horse | ||||
in full gallop occurs but once. | ||||
If we may trust the account given by Paulus Jovius--about l527-- | ||||
Leonardo's horse was represented as "vehementer incitatus et | ||||
anhelatus". Jovius had probably seen the model exhibited at Milan; | ||||
but, need we, in fact, infer from this description that the horse | ||||
was galloping? Compare Vasari's description of the Gattamelata | ||||
monument at Padua: "Egli [Donatello] vi ando ben volentieri, e fece | ||||
il cavallo di bronzo, che e in sulla piazza di Sant Antonio, nel | ||||
quale si dimostra lo sbuffamento ed il fremito del cavallo, ed il | ||||
grande animo e la fierezza vivacissimamente espressa dall'arte nella | ||||
figura che lo cavalca". | ||||
These descriptions, it seems to me, would only serve to mark the | ||||
difference between the work of the middle ages and that of the | ||||
renaissance. | ||||
We learn from a statement of Sabba da Castiglione that, when Milan | ||||
was taken by the French in 1499, the model sustained some injury; | ||||
and this informant, who, however is not invariably trustworthy, adds | ||||
that Leonardo had devoted fully sixteen years to this work (la forma | ||||
del cavallo, intorno a cui Leonardo avea sedici anni continui | ||||
consumati). This often-quoted passage has given ground for an | ||||
assumption, which has no other evidence to support it, that Leonardo | ||||
had lived in Milan ever since 1483. But I believe it is nearer the | ||||
truth to suppose that this author's statement alludes to the fact | ||||
that about sixteen years must have past since the competition in | ||||
which Leonardo had taken part. | ||||
I must in these remarks confine myself strictly to the task in hand | ||||
and give no more of the history of the Sforza monument than is | ||||
needed to explain the texts and drawings I have been able to | ||||
reproduce. In the first place, with regard to the drawings, I may | ||||
observe that they are all, with the following two exceptions, in the | ||||
Queen's Library at Windsor Castle; the red chalk drawing on Pl. | ||||
LXXVI No. 1 is in the MS. C. A. (see No. 7l2) and the fragmentary | ||||
pen and ink drawing on page 4 is in the Ambrosian Library. The | ||||
drawings from Windsor on Pl. LXVI have undergone a trifling | ||||
reduction from the size of the originals. | ||||
There can no longer be the slightest doubt that the well-known | ||||
engraving of several horsemen (Passavant, Le Peintre-Graveur, Vol. | ||||
V, p. 181, No. 3) is only a copy after original drawings by | ||||
Leonardo, executed by some unknown engraver; we have only to compare | ||||
the engraving with the facsimiles of drawings on Pl. LXV, No. 2, Pl. | ||||
LXVII, LXVIII and LXIX which, it is quite evident, have served as | ||||
models for the engraver. | ||||
On Pl. LXV No. 1, in the larger sketch to the right hand, only the | ||||
base is distinctly visible, the figure of the horseman is effaced. | ||||
Leonardo evidently found it unsatisfactory and therefore rubbed it | ||||
out. | ||||
The base of the monument--the pedestal for the equestrian statue--is | ||||
repeatedly sketched on a magnificent plan. In the sketch just | ||||
mentioned it has the character of a shrine or aedicula to contain a | ||||
sarcophagus. Captives in chains are here represented on the | ||||
entablature with their backs turned to that portion of the monument | ||||
which more | ||||
strictly constitutes the pedestal of the horse. The lower portion of | ||||
the aedicula is surrounded by columns. In the pen and ink drawing | ||||
Pl. LXVI--the lower drawing on the right hand side--the sarcophagus | ||||
is shown between the columns, and above the entablature is a plinth | ||||
on which the horse stands. But this arrangement perhaps seemed to | ||||
Leonardo to lack solidity, and in the little sketch on the left | ||||
hand, below, the sarcophagus is shown as lying under an arched | ||||
canopy. In this the trophies and the captive warriors are detached | ||||
from the angles. In the first of these two sketches the place for | ||||
the trophies is merely indicated by a few strokes; in the third | ||||
sketch on the left the base is altogether broader, buttresses and | ||||
pinnacles having been added so as to form three niches. The black | ||||
chalk drawing on Pl. LXVIII shows a base in which the angles are | ||||
formed by niches with pilasters. In the little sketch to the extreme | ||||
left on Pl. LXV, No. 1, the equestrian statue serves to crown a | ||||
circular temple somewhat resembling Bramante's tempietto of San | ||||
Pietro in Montario at Rome, while the sketch above to the right | ||||
displays an arrangement faintly reminding us of the tomb of the | ||||
Scaligers in Verona. The base is thus constructed of two platforms | ||||
or slabs, the upper one considerably smaller than the lower one | ||||
which is supported on flying buttresses with pinnacles. | ||||
On looking over the numerous studies in which the horse is not | ||||
galloping but merely walking forward, we find only one drawing for | ||||
the pedestal, and this, to accord with the altered character of the | ||||
statue, is quieter and simpler in style (Pl. LXXIV). It rises almost | ||||
vertically from the ground and is exactly as long as the pacing | ||||
horse. The whole base is here arranged either as an independent | ||||
baldaquin or else as a projecting canopy over a recess in which the | ||||
figure of the deceased Duke is seen lying on his sarcophagus; in the | ||||
latter case it was probably intended as a tomb inside a church. | ||||
Here, too, it was intended to fill the angles with trophies or | ||||
captive warriors. Probably only No. 724 in the text refers to the | ||||
work for the base of the monument. | ||||
If we compare the last mentioned sketch with the description of a | ||||
plan for an equestrian monument to Gian Giacomo Trivulzio (No. 725) | ||||
it seems by no means impossible that this drawing is a preparatory | ||||
study for the very monument concerning which the manuscript gives us | ||||
detailed information. We have no historical record regarding this | ||||
sketch nor do the archives in the Trivulzio Palace give us any | ||||
information. The simple monument to the great general in San Nazaro | ||||
Maggiore in Milan consists merely of a sarcophagus placed in recess | ||||
high on the wall of an octagonal chapel. The figure of the warrior | ||||
is lying on the sarcophagus, on which his name is inscribed; a piece | ||||
of sculpture which is certainly not Leonardo's work. Gian Giacomo | ||||
Trivulzio died at Chartres in 1518, only five months before | ||||
Leonardo, and it seems to me highly improbable that this should have | ||||
been the date of this sketch; under these circumstances it would | ||||
have been done under the auspices of Francis I, but the Italian | ||||
general was certainly not in favour with the French monarch at the | ||||
time. Gian Giacomo Trivulzio was a sworn foe to Ludovico il Moro, | ||||
whom he strove for years to overthrow. On the 6th September 1499 he | ||||
marched victorious into Milan at the head of a French army. In a | ||||
short time, however, he was forced to quit Milan again when Ludovico | ||||
il Moro bore down upon the city with a force of Swiss troops. On the | ||||
15th of April following, after defeating Lodovico at Novara, | ||||
Trivulzio once more entered Milan as a Conqueror, but his hopes of | ||||
becoming _Governatore_ of the place were soon wrecked by intrigue. | ||||
This victory and triumph, historians tell us, were signalised by | ||||
acts of vengeance against the dethroned Sforza, and it might have | ||||
been particularly flattering to him that the casting and | ||||
construction of the Sforza monument were suspended for the time. | ||||
It must have been at this moment--as it seems to me--that he | ||||
commissioned the artist to prepare designs for his own monument, | ||||
which he probably intended should find a place in the Cathedral or | ||||
in some other church. He, the husband of Margherita di Nicolino | ||||
Colleoni, would have thought that he had a claim to the same | ||||
distinction and public homage as his less illustrious connection had | ||||
received at the hands of the Venetian republic. It was at this very | ||||
time that Trivulzio had a medal struck with a bust portrait of | ||||
himself and the following remarkable inscription on the reverse:_ | ||||
DEO FAVENTE--1499--DICTVS--10--IA--EXPVLIT--LVDOVICV--SF-- | ||||
(Sfortiam) DVC-- (ducem) MLI (Mediolani)--NOIE | ||||
(nomine)--REGIS--FRANCORVM--EODEM--ANN --(anno) RED'T (redit)--LVS | ||||
(Ludovicus)--SVPERATVS ET CAPTVS--EST--AB--EO. _In the Library of | ||||
the Palazzo Trivulzio there is a MS. of Callimachus Siculus written | ||||
at the end of the XVth or beginning of the XVIth century. At the | ||||
beginning of this MS. there is an exquisite illuminated miniature of | ||||
an equestrian statue with the name of the general on the base; it is | ||||
however very doubtful whether this has any connection with | ||||
Leonardo's design. | ||||
Nos. 731-740, which treat of casting bronze, have probably a very | ||||
indirect bearing on the arrangements made for casting the equestrian | ||||
statue of Francesco Sforza. Some portions evidently relate to the | ||||
casting of cannon. Still, in our researches about Leonardo's work on | ||||
the monument, we may refer to them as giving us some clue to the | ||||
process of bronze casting at that period. | ||||
Some practical hints (706-709). | ||||
7O6. | ||||
OF A STATUE. | ||||
If you wish to make a figure in marble, first make one of clay, and | ||||
when you have finished it, let it dry and place it in a case which | ||||
should be large enough, after the figure is taken out of it, to | ||||
receive also the marble, from which you intend to reveal the figure | ||||
in imitation of the one in clay. After you have put the clay figure | ||||
into this said case, have little rods which will exactly slip in to | ||||
the holes in it, and thrust them so far in at each hole that each | ||||
white rod may touch the figure in different parts of it. And colour | ||||
the portion of the rod that remains outside black, and mark each rod | ||||
and each hole with a countersign so that each may fit into its | ||||
place. Then take the clay figure out of this case and put in your | ||||
piece of marble, taking off so much of the marble that all your rods | ||||
may be hidden in the holes as far as their marks; and to be the | ||||
better able to do this, make the case so that it can be lifted up; | ||||
but the bottom of it will always remain under the marble and in this | ||||
way it can be lifted with tools with great ease. | ||||
707. | ||||
Some have erred in teaching sculptors to measure the limbs of their | ||||
figures with threads as if they thought that these limbs were | ||||
equally round in every part where these threads were wound about | ||||
them. | ||||
708. | ||||
MEASUREMENT AND DIVISION OF A STATUE. | ||||
Divide the head into 12 degrees, and each degree divide into 12 | ||||
points, and each point into 12 minutes, and the minutes into minims | ||||
and the minims into semi minims. | ||||
Degree--point--minute--minim. | ||||
709. | ||||
Sculptured figures which appear in motion, will, in their standing | ||||
position, actually look as if they were falling forward. | ||||
[Footnote: _figure di rilievo_. Leonardo applies this term | ||||
exclusively to wholly detached figures, especially to those standing | ||||
free. This note apparently refers to some particular case, though we | ||||
have no knowledge of what that may have been. If we suppose it to | ||||
refer to the first model of the equestrian statue of Francesco | ||||
Sforza (see the introduction to the notes on Sculpture) this | ||||
observation may be regarded as one of his arguments for abandoning | ||||
the first scheme of the Sforza Monument, in which the horse was to | ||||
be galloping (see page 2). It is also in favour of this theory that | ||||
the note is written in a manuscript volume already completed in | ||||
1492. Leonardo's opinions as to the shortcomings of plastic works | ||||
when compared with paintings are given under No. 655 and 656.] | ||||
Notes on the casting of the Sforza monument (710-715). | ||||
710. | ||||
Three braces which bind the mould. | ||||
[If you want to make simple casts quickly, make them in a box of | ||||
river sand wetted with vinegar.] | ||||
[When you shall have made the mould upon the horse you must make the | ||||
thickness of the metal in clay.] | ||||
Observe in alloying how many hours are wanted for each | ||||
hundredweight. [In casting each one keep the furnace and its fire | ||||
well stopped up.] [Let the inside of all the moulds be wetted with | ||||
linseed oil or oil of turpentine, and then take a handful of | ||||
powdered borax and Greek pitch with aqua vitae, and pitch the mould | ||||
over outside so that being under ground the damp may not [damage | ||||
it?] | ||||
[To manage the large mould make a model of the small mould, make a | ||||
small room in proportion.] | ||||
[Make the vents in the mould while it is on the horse.] | ||||
Hold the hoofs in the tongs, and cast them with fish glue. Weigh the | ||||
parts of the mould and the quantity of metal it will take to fill | ||||
them, and give so much to the furnace that it may afford to each | ||||
part its amount of metal; and this you may know by weighing the clay | ||||
of each part of the mould to which the quantity in the furnace must | ||||
correspond. And this is done in order that the furnace for the legs | ||||
when filled may not have to furnish metal from the legs to help out | ||||
the head, which would be impossible. [Cast at the same casting as | ||||
the horse the little door] | ||||
[Footnote: The importance of the notes included under this number is | ||||
not diminished by the fact that they have been lightly crossed out | ||||
with red chalk. Possibly they were the first scheme for some fuller | ||||
observations which no longer exist; or perhaps they were crossed out | ||||
when Leonardo found himself obliged to give up the idea of casting | ||||
the equestrian statue. In the original the first two sketches are | ||||
above l. 1, and the third below l. 9.] | ||||
711. | ||||
THE MOULD FOR THE HORSE. | ||||
Make the horse on legs of iron, strong and well set on a good | ||||
foundation; then grease it and cover it with a coating, leaving each | ||||
coat to dry thoroughly layer by layer; and this will thicken it by | ||||
the breadth of three fingers. Now fix and bind it with iron as may | ||||
be necessary. Moreover take off the mould and then make the | ||||
thickness. Then fill the mould by degrees and make it good | ||||
throughout; encircle and bind it with its irons and bake it inside | ||||
where it has to touch the bronze. | ||||
OF MAKING THE MOULD IN PIECES. | ||||
Draw upon the horse, when finished, all the pieces of the mould with | ||||
which you wish to cover the horse, and in laying on the clay cut it | ||||
in every piece, so that when the mould is finished you can take it | ||||
off, and then recompose it in its former position with its joins, by | ||||
the countersigns. | ||||
The square blocks _a b_ will be between the cover and the core, that | ||||
is in the hollow where the melted bronze is to be; and these square | ||||
blocks of bronze will support the intervals between the mould and | ||||
the cover at an equal distance, and for this reason these squares | ||||
are of great importance. | ||||
The clay should be mixed with sand. | ||||
Take wax, to return [what is not used] and to pay for what is used. | ||||
Dry it in layers. | ||||
Make the outside mould of plaster, to save time in drying and the | ||||
expense in wood; and with this plaster enclose the irons [props] | ||||
both outside and inside to a thickness of two fingers; make terra | ||||
cotta. And this mould can be made in one day; half a boat load of | ||||
plaster will serve you. | ||||
Good. | ||||
Dam it up again with glue and clay, or white of egg, and bricks and | ||||
rubbish. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. LXXV. The figure "40," close to the sketch in the | ||||
middle of the page between lines 16 and 17 has been added by a | ||||
collector's hand. | ||||
In the original, below line 21, a square piece of the page has been | ||||
cut out about 9 centimetres by 7 and a blank piece has been gummed | ||||
into the place. | ||||
Lines 22-24 are written on the margin. l. 27 and 28 are close to the | ||||
second marginal sketch. l. 42 is a note written above the third | ||||
marginal sketch and on the back of this sheet is the text given as | ||||
No. 642. Compare also No. 802.] | ||||
712. | ||||
All the heads of the large nails. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. LXXVI, No. i. This drawing has already been | ||||
published in the "_Saggio delle Opere di L. da Vinci_." Milano 1872, | ||||
Pl. XXIV, No. i. But, for various reasons I cannot regard the | ||||
editor's suggestions as satisfactory. He says: "_Veggonsi le | ||||
armature di legname colle quali forse venne sostenuto il modello, | ||||
quando per le nozze di Bianca Maria Sforza con Massimiliano | ||||
imperatore, esso fu collocato sotto un arco trionfale davanti al | ||||
Castello_." | ||||
713. | ||||
These bindings go inside. | ||||
714. | ||||
Salt may be made from human excrements, burnt and calcined, made | ||||
into lees and dried slowly at a fire, and all the excrements produce | ||||
salt in a similar way and these salts when distilled, are very | ||||
strong. | ||||
[Footnote: VASARI repeatedly states, in the fourth chapter of his | ||||
_Introduzione della Scultura_, that in preparing to cast bronze | ||||
statues horse-dung was frequently used by sculptors. If, | ||||
notwithstanding this, it remains doubtful whether I am justified in | ||||
having introduced here this text of but little interest, no such | ||||
doubt can be attached to the sketch which accompanies it.] | ||||
715. | ||||
METHOD OF FOUNDING AGAIN. | ||||
This may be done when the furnace is made [Footnote: this note is | ||||
written below the sketches.] strong and bruised. | ||||
Models for the horse of the Sforza monument (716-718). | ||||
7l6. | ||||
Messer Galeazzo's big genet | ||||
717. | ||||
Messer Galeazzo's Sicilian horse. | ||||
[Footnote: These notes are by the side of a drawing of a horse with | ||||
figured measurements.] | ||||
718. | ||||
Measurement of the Sicilian horse the leg from behind, seen in | ||||
front, lifted and extended. | ||||
[Footnote: There is no sketch belonging to this passage. Galeazze | ||||
here probably means Galeazze di San Severino, the famous captain who | ||||
married Bianca the daughter of Ludovico il Moro.] | ||||
Occasional references to the Sforza monument (719-724). | ||||
719. | ||||
Again, the bronze horse may be taken in hand, which is to be to the | ||||
immortal glory and eternal honour of the happy memory of the prince | ||||
your father, and of the illustrious house of Sforza. | ||||
[Footnote: The letter from which this passage is here extracted will | ||||
be found complete in section XXI. (see the explanation of it, on | ||||
page 2).] | ||||
720. | ||||
On the 23rd of April 1490 I began this book, and recommenced the | ||||
horse. | ||||
721. | ||||
There is to be seen, in the mountains of Parma and Piacenza, a | ||||
multitude of shells and corals full of holes, still sticking to the | ||||
rocks, and when I was at work on the great horse for Milan, a large | ||||
sackful of them, which were found thereabout, was brought to me into | ||||
my workshop, by certain peasants. | ||||
722. | ||||
Believe me, Leonardo the Florentine, who has to do the equestrian | ||||
bronze statue of the Duke Francesco that he does not need to care | ||||
about it, because he has work for all his life time, and, being so | ||||
great a work, I doubt whether he can ever finish it. [Footnote: This | ||||
passage is quoted from a letter to a committee at Piacenza for whom | ||||
Leonardo seems to have undertaken to execute some work. The letter | ||||
is given entire in section XXL; in it Leonardo remonstrates as to | ||||
some unreasonable demands.] | ||||
723. | ||||
Of the horse I will say nothing because I know the times. [Footnote: | ||||
This passage occurs in a rough copy of a letter to Ludovico il Moro, | ||||
without date (see below among the letters).] | ||||
724. | ||||
During ten years the works on the marbles have been going on I will | ||||
not wait for my payment beyond the time, when my works are finished. | ||||
[Footnote: This possibly refers to the works for the pedestal of the | ||||
equestrian statue concerning which we have no farther information in | ||||
the MSS. See p. 6.] | ||||
The project of the Trivulzio monument. | ||||
725. | ||||
THE MONUMENT TO MESSER GIOVANNI JACOMO DA TREVULZO. | ||||
[2] Cost of the making and materials for the horse [5]. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original, lines 2-5, 12-14, 33-35, are written on | ||||
the margin. This passage has been recently published by G. Govi in | ||||
Vol. V, Ser. 3a, of _Transunti, Reale Accademia dei Linea, sed. del | ||||
5 Giugno, 1881,_ with the following introductory note: _"Desidero | ||||
intanto che siano stampati questi pochi frammenti perche so che sono | ||||
stati trascritti ultimamente, e verranno messi in luce tra poco | ||||
fuori d'Italia. Li ripubblichi pure chi vuole, ma si sappia almeno | ||||
che anche tra noi si conoscevano, e s'eran raccolti da anni per | ||||
comporne, quando che fosse, una edizione ordinata degli scritti di | ||||
Leonardo."_ | ||||
The learned editor has left out line 22 and has written 3 _pie_ for | ||||
8 _piedi_ in line 25. There are other deviations of less importance | ||||
from the original.] | ||||
A courser, as large as life, with the rider requires for the cost of | ||||
the metal, duc. 500. | ||||
And for cost of the iron work which is inside the model, and | ||||
charcoal, and wood, and the pit to cast it in, and for binding the | ||||
mould, and including the furnace where it is to be cast ... duc. | ||||
200. | ||||
To make the model in clay and then in wax......... duc. 432. | ||||
To the labourers for polishing it when it is cast. ....... duc. 450. | ||||
in all. . duc. 1582. | ||||
[12] Cost of the marble of the monument [14]. | ||||
Cost of the marble according to the drawing. The piece of marble | ||||
under the horse which is 4 braccia long, 2 braccia and 2 inches wide | ||||
and 9 inches thick 58 hundredweight, at 4 Lire and 10 Soldi per | ||||
hundredweight.. duc. 58. | ||||
And for 13 braccia and 6 inches of cornice, 7 in. wide and 4 in. | ||||
thick, 24 hundredweight....... duc. 24. | ||||
And for the frieze and architrave, which is 4 br. and 6 in. long, 2 | ||||
br. wide and 6 in. thick, 29 hundredweight., duc. 20. | ||||
And for the capitals made of metal, which are 8, 5 inches in. square | ||||
and 2 in. thick, at the price of 15 ducats each, will come to...... | ||||
duc. 122. | ||||
And for 8 columns of 2 br. 7 in., 4 1/2 in. thick, 20 hundredweight | ||||
duc. 20. | ||||
And for 8 bases which are 5 1/2 in. square and 2 in. high 5 hund'.. | ||||
duc. 5. | ||||
And for the slab of the tombstone 4 br. io in. long, 2 br. 4 1/2 in. | ||||
wide 36 hundredweight....... duc. 36. | ||||
And for 8 pedestal feet each 8 br. long and 6 1/2 in. wide and 6 1/2 | ||||
in. thick, 20 hundredweight come to... duc. 20. | ||||
And for the cornice below which is 4 br. and 10 in. long, and 2 br. | ||||
and 5 in. wide, and 4 in. thick, 32 hund'.. duc. 32. | ||||
And for the stone of which the figure of the deceased is to be made | ||||
which is 3 br. and 8 in. long, and 1 br. and 6 in. wide, and 9 in. | ||||
thick, 30 hund'.. duc. 30. | ||||
And for the stone on which the figure lies which is 3 br. and 4 in. | ||||
long and 1 br. and 2 in., wide and 4 1/2 in. thick duc. 16. | ||||
And for the squares of marble placed between the pedestals which are | ||||
8 and are 9 br. long and 9 in. wide, and 3 in. thick, 8 | ||||
hundredweight . . . duc. 8. in all. . duc. 389. | ||||
[33]Cost of the work in marble[35]. | ||||
Round the base on which the horse stands there are 8 figures at 25 | ||||
ducats each ............ duc. 200. | ||||
And on the same base there are 8 festoons with some other ornaments, | ||||
and of these there are 4 at the price of 15 ducats each, and 4 at | ||||
the price of 8 ducats each ....... duc. 92. | ||||
And for squaring the stones duc. 6. | ||||
Again, for the large cornice which goes below the base on which the | ||||
horse stands, which is 13 br. and 6 in., at 2 due. per br. ...... | ||||
duc. 27. | ||||
And for 12 br. of frieze at 5 due. per br. ........... duc. 60. | ||||
And for 12 br. of architrave at 1 1/2 duc. per br. ....... duc. 18. | ||||
And for 3 rosettes which will be the soffit of the monument, at 20 | ||||
ducats each .......... duc. 60. | ||||
And for 8 fluted columns at 8 ducats each ......... duc. 64. | ||||
And for 8 bases at 1 ducat each, duc. 8. | ||||
And for 8 pedestals, of which 4 are at 10 duc. each, which go above | ||||
the angles; and 4 at 6 duc. each .. duc. 64. | ||||
And for squaring and carving the moulding of the pedestals at 2 duc. | ||||
each, and there are 8 .... duc. 16. | ||||
And for 6 square blocks with figures and trophies, at 25 duc. each | ||||
.. duc. 150. | ||||
And for carving the moulding of the stone under the figure of the | ||||
deceased .......... duc. 40. | ||||
For the statue of the deceased, to do it well .......... duc. 100. | ||||
For 6 harpies with candelabra, at 25 ducats each ......... duc. 150. | ||||
For squaring the stone on which the statue lies, and carving the | ||||
moulding ............ duc. 20. | ||||
in all .. duc. 1075. | ||||
The sum total of every thing added together amount to ...... duc. | ||||
3046. | ||||
726. | ||||
MINT AT ROME. | ||||
It can also be made without a spring. But the screw above must | ||||
always be joined to the part of the movable sheath: [Margin note: | ||||
The mint of Rome.] [Footnote: See Pl. LXXVI. This passage is taken | ||||
from a note book which can be proved to have been used in Rome.] | ||||
All coins which do not have the rim complete, are not to be accepted | ||||
as good; and to secure the perfection of their rim it is requisite | ||||
that, in the first place, all the coins should be a perfect circle; | ||||
and to do this a coin must before all be made perfect in weight, and | ||||
size, and thickness. Therefore have several plates of metal made of | ||||
the same size and thickness, all drawn through the same gauge so as | ||||
to come out in strips. And out of [24] these strips you will stamp | ||||
the coins, quite round, as sieves are made for sorting chestnuts | ||||
[27]; and these coins can then be stamped in the way indicated | ||||
above; &c. | ||||
[31] The hollow of the die must be uniformly wider than the lower, | ||||
but imperceptibly [35]. | ||||
This cuts the coins perfectly round and of the exact thickness, and | ||||
weight; and saves the man who cuts and weighs, and the man who makes | ||||
the coins round. Hence it passes only through the hands of the | ||||
gauger and of the stamper, and the coins are very superior. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. LXXVI No. 2. The text of lines 31-35 stands | ||||
parallel 1. 24-27. | ||||
Farther evidence of Leonardo's occupations and engagements at Rome | ||||
under Pope Leo X. may be gathered from some rough copies of letters | ||||
which will be found in this volume. Hitherto nothing has been known | ||||
of his work in Rome beyond some doubtful, and perhaps mythical, | ||||
statements in Vasari.] | ||||
727. | ||||
POWDER FOR MEDALS. | ||||
The incombustible growth of soot on wicks reduced to powder, burnt | ||||
tin and all the metals, alum, isinglass, smoke from a brass forge, | ||||
each ingredient to be moistened, with aqua vitae or malmsey or | ||||
strong malt vinegar, white wine or distilled extract of turpentine, | ||||
or oil; but there should be little moisture, and cast in moulds. | ||||
[Margin note: On the coining of medals (727. 728).] [Footnote: The | ||||
meaning of _scagliuolo_ in this passage is doubtful.] | ||||
728. | ||||
OF TAKING CASTS OF MEDALS. | ||||
A paste of emery mixed with aqua vitae, or iron filings with | ||||
vinegar, or ashes of walnut leaves, or ashes of straw very finely | ||||
powdered. | ||||
[Footnote: The meaning of _scagliuolo_ in this passage is doubtful.] | ||||
The diameter is given in the lead enclosed; it is beaten with a | ||||
hammer and several times extended; the lead is folded and kept | ||||
wrapped up in parchment so that the powder may not be spilt; then | ||||
melt the lead, and the powder will be on the top of the melted lead, | ||||
which must then be rubbed between two plates of steel till it is | ||||
thoroughly pulverised; then wash it with aqua fortis, and the | ||||
blackness of the iron will be dissolved leaving the powder clean. | ||||
Emery in large grains may be broken by putting it on a cloth many | ||||
times doubled, and hit it sideways with the hammer, when it will | ||||
break up; then mix it little by little and it can be founded with | ||||
ease; but if you hold it on the anvil you will never break it, when | ||||
it is large. | ||||
Any one who grinds smalt should do it on plates of tempered steel | ||||
with a cone shaped grinder; then put it in aqua fortis, which melts | ||||
away the steel that may have been worked up and mixed with the | ||||
smalt, and which makes it black; it then remains purified and clean; | ||||
and if you grind it on porphyry the porphyry will work up and mix | ||||
with the smalt and spoil it, and aqua fortis will never remove it | ||||
because it cannot dissolve the porphyry. | ||||
If you want a fine blue colour dissolve the smalt made with tartar, | ||||
and then remove the salt. | ||||
Vitrified brass makes a fine red. | ||||
729. | ||||
STUCCO. | ||||
Place stucco over the prominence of the..... which may be composed | ||||
of Venus and Mercury, and lay it well over that prominence of the | ||||
thickness of the side of a knife, made with the ruler and cover this | ||||
with the bell of a still, and you will have again the moisture with | ||||
which you applied the paste. The rest you may dry [Margin note: On | ||||
stucco (729. 730).] [Footnote: In this passage a few words have been | ||||
written in a sort of cipher--that is to say backwards; as in l. 3 | ||||
_erenev_ for _Venere_, l. 4 _oirucrem_ for Mercurio, l. 12 _il | ||||
orreve co ecarob_ for _il everro (?) co borace_. The meaning of the | ||||
word before _"di giesso"_ in l. 1 is unknown; and the sense, in | ||||
which _sagoma_ is used here and in other passages is obscure.-- | ||||
_Venere_ and _Mercurio_ may mean 'marble' and 'lime', of which | ||||
stucco is composed. | ||||
12. The meaning of _orreve_ is unknown.] | ||||
well; afterwards fire it, and beat it or burnish it with a good | ||||
burnisher, and make it thick towards the side. | ||||
STUCCO. | ||||
Powder ... with borax and water to a paste, and make stucco of it, | ||||
and then heat it so that it may dry, and then varnish it, with fire, | ||||
so that it shines well. | ||||
730. | ||||
STUCCO FOR MOULDING. | ||||
Take of butter 6 parts, of wax 2 parts, and as much fine flour as | ||||
when put with these 2 things melted, will make them as firm as wax | ||||
or modelling clay. | ||||
GLUE. | ||||
Take mastic, distilled turpentine and white lead. | ||||
On bronze casting generally (731-740). | ||||
731. | ||||
TO CAST. | ||||
Tartar burnt and powdered with plaster and cast cause the plaster to | ||||
hold together when it is mixed up again; and then it will dissolve | ||||
in water. | ||||
732. | ||||
TO CAST BRONZE IN PLASTER. | ||||
Take to every 2 cups of plaster 1 of ox-horns burnt, mix them | ||||
together and make your cast with it. | ||||
733. | ||||
When you want to take a cast in wax, burn the scum with a candle, | ||||
and the cast will come out without bubbles. | ||||
734. | ||||
2 ounces of plaster to a pound of metal;-- walnut, which makes it | ||||
like the curve. | ||||
[Footnote: The second part of this is quite obscure.] | ||||
735. | ||||
[Dried earth 16 pounds, 100 pounds of metal wet clay 20,--of wet | ||||
100,-half,- which increases 4 Ibs. of water,--1 of wax, 1 Ib. of | ||||
metal, a little less,-the scrapings of linen with earth, measure for | ||||
measure.] [Footnote: The translation is given literally, but the | ||||
meaning is quite obscure.] | ||||
736. | ||||
Such as the mould is, so will the cast be. | ||||
737. | ||||
HOW CASTS OUGHT TO BE POLISHED. | ||||
Make a bunch of iron wire as thick as thread, and scrub them with | ||||
[this and] water; hold a bowl underneath that it may not make a mud | ||||
below. | ||||
HOW TO REMOVE THE ROUGH EDGES FROM BRONZE. | ||||
Make an iron rod, after the manner of a large chisel, and with this | ||||
rub over those seams on the bronze which remain on the casts of the | ||||
guns, and which are caused by the joins in the mould; but make the | ||||
tool heavy enough, and let the strokes be long and broad. | ||||
TO FACILITATE MELTING. | ||||
First alloy part of the metal in the crucible, then put it in the | ||||
furnace, and this being in a molten state will assist in beginning | ||||
to melt the copper. | ||||
TO PREVENT THE COPPER COOLING IN THE FURNACE. | ||||
When the copper cools in the furnace, be ready, as soon as you | ||||
perceive it, to cut it with a long stick while it is still in a | ||||
paste; or if it is quite cold cut it as lead is cut with broad and | ||||
large chisels. | ||||
IF YOU HAVE TO MAKE A LARGE CAST. | ||||
If you have to make a cast of a hundred thousand pounds do it with | ||||
two furnaces and with 2000 pounds in each, or as much as 3000 pounds | ||||
at most. | ||||
738. | ||||
HOW TO PROCEED TO BREAK A LARGE MASS OF BRONZE. | ||||
If you want to break up a large mass of bronze, first suspend it, | ||||
and then make round it a wall on the four sides, like a trough of | ||||
bricks, and make a great fire therein. When it is quite red hot give | ||||
it a blow with a heavy weight raised above it, and with great force. | ||||
739. | ||||
TO COMBINE LEAD WITH OTHER METAL. | ||||
If you wish for economy in combining lead with the metal in order to | ||||
lessen the amount of tin which is necessary in the metal, first | ||||
alloy the lead with the tin and then add the molten copper. | ||||
How TO MELT [METAL] IN A FURNACE. | ||||
The furnace should be between four well founded pillars. | ||||
OF THE THICKNESS OF THE COATING. | ||||
The coating should not be more than two fingers thick, it should be | ||||
laid on in four thicknesses over fine clay and then well fixed, and | ||||
it should be fired only on the inside and then carefully covered | ||||
with ashes and cow's dung. | ||||
OF THE THICKNESS OF THE GUN. | ||||
The gun being made to carry 600 Ibs. of ball and more, by this rule | ||||
you will take the measure of the diameter of the ball and divide it | ||||
into 6 parts and one of these parts will be its thickness at the | ||||
muzzle; but at the breech it must always be half. And if the ball is | ||||
to be 700 lbs., 1/7th of the diameter of the ball must be its | ||||
thickness in front; and if the ball is to be 800, the eighth of its | ||||
diameter in front; and if 900, 1/8th and 1/2 [3/16], and if 1000, | ||||
1/9th. | ||||
OF THE LENGTH OF THE BODY OF THE GUN. | ||||
If you want it to throw a ball of stone, make the length of the gun | ||||
to be 6, or as much as 7 diameters of the ball; and if the ball is | ||||
to be of iron make it as much as 12 balls, and if the ball is to be | ||||
of lead, make it as much as 18 balls. I mean when the gun is to have | ||||
the mouth fitted to receive 600 lbs. of stone ball, and more. | ||||
OF THE THICKNESS OF SMALL GUNS. | ||||
The thickness at the muzzle of small guns should be from a half to | ||||
one third of the diameter of the ball, and the length from 30 to 36 | ||||
balls. | ||||
740. | ||||
OF LUTING THE FURNACE WITHIN. | ||||
The furnace must be luted before you put the metal in it, with earth | ||||
from Valenza, and over that with ashes. | ||||
[Footnote 1. 2.: _Terra di Valenza_.--Valenza is north of | ||||
Alessandria on the Po.] | ||||
OF RESTORING THE METAL WHEN IT IS BECOMING COOL. | ||||
When you see that the bronze is congealing take some willow-wood cut | ||||
in small chips and make up the fire with it. | ||||
THE CAUSE OF ITS CURDLING. | ||||
I say that the cause of this congealing often proceeds from too much | ||||
fire, or from ill-dried wood. | ||||
TO KNOW THE CONDITION OF THE FIRE. | ||||
You may know when the fire is good and fit for your purpose by a | ||||
clear flame, and if you see the tips of the flames dull and ending | ||||
in much smoke do not trust it, and particularly when the flux metal | ||||
is almost fluid. | ||||
OF ALLOYING THE METAL. | ||||
Metal for guns must invariably be made with 6 or even 8 per cent, | ||||
that is 6 of tin to one hundred of copper, for the less you put in, | ||||
the stronger will the gun be. | ||||
WHEN THE TIN SHOULD BE ADDED TO THE COPPER. | ||||
The tin should be put in with the copper when the copper is reduced | ||||
to a fluid. | ||||
HOW TO HASTEN THE MELTING. | ||||
You can hasten the melting when 2/3ds of the copper is fluid; you | ||||
can then, with a stick of chestnut-wood, repeatedly stir what of | ||||
copper remains entire amidst what is melted. | ||||
_Introductory Observations on the Architectural Designs (XII), and | ||||
Writings on Architecture (XIII)._ | ||||
_Until now very little has been known regarding Leonardo's labours | ||||
in the domain of Architecture. No building is known to have been | ||||
planned and executed by him, though by some contemporary writers | ||||
incidental allusion is made to his occupying himself with | ||||
architecture, and his famous letter to Lodovico il Moro,--which has | ||||
long been a well-known document,--in which he offers his service as | ||||
an architect to that prince, tends to confirm the belief that he was | ||||
something more than an amateur of the art. This hypothesis has | ||||
lately been confirmed by the publication of certain documents, | ||||
preserved at Milan, showing that Leonardo was not only employed in | ||||
preparing plans but that he took an active part, with much credit, | ||||
as member of a commission on public buildings; his name remains | ||||
linked with the history of the building of the Cathedral at Pavia | ||||
and that of the Cathedral at Milan._ | ||||
_Leonardo's writings on Architecture are dispersed among a large | ||||
number of MSS., and it would be scarcely possible to master their | ||||
contents without the opportunity of arranging, sorting and comparing | ||||
the whole mass of materials, so as to have some comprehensive idea | ||||
of the whole. The sketches, when isolated and considered by | ||||
themselves, might appear to be of but little value; it is not till | ||||
we understand their general purport, from comparing them with each | ||||
other, that we can form any just estimate of their true worth._ | ||||
_Leonardo seems to have had a project for writing a complete and | ||||
separate treatise on Architecture, such as his predecessors and | ||||
contemporaries had composed--Leon Battista Alberti, Filarete, | ||||
Francesco di Giorgio and perhaps also Bramante. But, on the other | ||||
hand, it cannot be denied that possibly no such scheme was connected | ||||
with the isolated notes and researches, treating on special | ||||
questions, which are given in this work; that he was merely working | ||||
at problems in which, for some reason or other he took a special | ||||
interest._ | ||||
_A great number of important buildings were constructed in Lombardy | ||||
during the period between 1472 and 1499, and among them there are | ||||
several by unknown architects, of so high an artistic merit, that it | ||||
is certainly not improbable that either Bramante or Leonardo da | ||||
Vinci may have been, directly or indirectly, concerned in their | ||||
erection._ | ||||
_Having been engaged, for now nearly twenty years, in a thorough | ||||
study of Bramante's life and labours, I have taken a particular | ||||
interest in detecting the distinguishing marks of his style as | ||||
compared with Leonardo's. In 1869 I made researches about the | ||||
architectural drawings of the latter in the Codex Atlanticus at | ||||
Milan, for the purpose of finding out, if possible the original | ||||
plans and sketches of the churches of Santa Maria delle Grazie at | ||||
Milan, and of the Cathedral at Pavia, which buildings have been | ||||
supposed to be the work both of Bramante and of Leonardo. Since 1876 | ||||
I have repeatedly examined Leonardo's architectural studies in the | ||||
collection of his manuscripts in the Institut de France, and some of | ||||
these I have already given to the public in my work on_ "Les Projets | ||||
Primitifs pour la Basilique de St. Pierre de Rome", _P1. 43. In 1879 | ||||
I had the opportunity of examining the manuscript in the Palazzo | ||||
Trivulzio at Milan, and in 1880 Dr Richter showed me in London the | ||||
manuscripts in the possession of Lord Ashburnham, and those in the | ||||
British Museum. I have thus had opportunities of seeing most of | ||||
Leonardo's architectural drawings in the original, but of the | ||||
manuscripts tliemselves I have deciphered only the notes which | ||||
accompany the sketches. It is to Dr Richter's exertions that we owe | ||||
the collected texts on Architecture which are now published, and | ||||
while he has undertaken to be responsible for the correct reading of | ||||
the original texts, he has also made it his task to extract the | ||||
whole of the materials from the various MSS. It has been my task to | ||||
arrange and elucidate the texts under the heads which have been | ||||
adopted in this work. MS. B. at Paris and the Codex Atlanticus at | ||||
Milan are the chief sources of our knowledge of Leonardo as an | ||||
architect, and I have recently subjected these to a thorough | ||||
re-investigation expressly with a view to this work._ | ||||
_A complete reproduction of all Leonardo's architectural sketches | ||||
has not, indeed, been possible, but as far as the necessarily | ||||
restricted limits of the work have allowed, the utmost completeness | ||||
has been aimed at, and no efforts have been spared to include every | ||||
thing that can contribute to a knowledge of Leonardo's style. It | ||||
would have been very interesting, if it had been possible, to give | ||||
some general account at least of Leonardo's work and studies in | ||||
engineering, fortification, canal-making and the like, and it is | ||||
only on mature reflection that we have reluctantly abandoned this | ||||
idea. Leonardo's occupations in these departments have by no means | ||||
so close a relation to literary work, in the strict sense of the | ||||
word as we are fairly justified in attributing to his numerous notes | ||||
on Architecture._ | ||||
_Leonardo's architectural studies fall naturally under two heads:_ | ||||
_I. Those drawings and sketches, often accompanied by short remarks | ||||
and explanations, which may be regarded as designs for buildings or | ||||
monuments intended to be built. With these there are occasionally | ||||
explanatory texts._ | ||||
_II. Theoretical investigations and treatises. A special interest | ||||
attaches to these because they discuss a variety of questions which | ||||
are of practical importance to this day. Leonardo's theory as to the | ||||
origin and progress of cracks in buildings is perhaps to be | ||||
considered as unique in its way in the literature of Architecture._ | ||||
_HENRY DE GEYMULLER_ | ||||
_XII._ | ||||
_Architectural Designs._ | ||||
_I. Plans for towns._ | ||||
_A. Sketches for laying out a new town with a double system of high- | ||||
level and low-level road-ways._ | ||||
_Pl. LXXVII, No. 1 (MS. B, 15b). A general view of a town, with the | ||||
roads outside it sloping up to the high-level ways within._ | ||||
_Pl. LXXVII, No. 3 (MS. B, 16b. see No. 741; and MS. B. 15b, see No. | ||||
742) gives a partial view of the town, with its streets and houses, | ||||
with explanatory references._ | ||||
_Pl. LXXVII, No. 2 (MS. B, 15b; see No. 743). View of a double | ||||
staircaise with two opposite flights of steps._ | ||||
_Pl. LXXVIII, Nos. 2 and 3 (MS. B, 37a). Sketches illustrating the | ||||
connection of the two levels of roads by means of steps. The lower | ||||
galleries are lighted by openings in the upper roadway._ | ||||
_B. Notes on removing houses (MS. Br. M., 270b, see No. 744)._ | ||||
741. | ||||
The roads _m_ are 6 braccia higher than the roads _p s_, and each | ||||
road must be 20 braccia wide and have 1/2 braccio slope from the | ||||
sides towards the middle; and in the middle let there be at every | ||||
braccio an opening, one braccio long and one finger wide, where the | ||||
rain water may run off into hollows made on the same level as _p s_. | ||||
And on each side at the extremity of the width of the said road let | ||||
there be an arcade, 6 braccia broad, on columns; and understand that | ||||
he who would go through the whole place by the high level streets | ||||
can use them for this purpose, and he who would go by the low level | ||||
can do the same. By the high streets no vehicles and similar objects | ||||
should circulate, but they are exclusively for the use of gentlemen. | ||||
The carts and burdens for the use and convenience of the inhabitants | ||||
have to go by the low ones. One house must turn its back to the | ||||
other, leaving the lower streets between them. Provisions, such as | ||||
wood, wine and such things are carried in by the doors _n_, and | ||||
privies, stables and other fetid matter must be emptied away | ||||
underground. From one arch to the next | ||||
742. | ||||
must be 300 braccia, each street receiving its light through the | ||||
openings of the upper streets, and at each arch must be a winding | ||||
stair on a circular plan because the corners of square ones are | ||||
always fouled; they must be wide, and at the first vault there must | ||||
be a door entering into public privies and the said stairs lead from | ||||
the upper to the lower streets and the high level streets begin | ||||
outside the city gates and slope up till at these gates they have | ||||
attained the height of 6 braccia. Let such a city be built near the | ||||
sea or a large river in order that the dirt of the city may be | ||||
carried off by the water. | ||||
743. | ||||
The construction of the stairs: The stairs _c d_ go down to _f g_, | ||||
and in the same way _f g_ goes down to _h k_. | ||||
744. | ||||
ON MOVING HOUSES. | ||||
Let the houses be moved and arranged in order; and this will be done | ||||
with facility because such houses are at first made in pieces on the | ||||
open places, and can then be fitted together with their timbers in | ||||
the site where they are to be permanent. | ||||
[9] Let the men of the country [or the village] partly inhabit the | ||||
new houses when the court is absent [12]. | ||||
[Footnote: On the same page we find notes referring to Romolontino | ||||
and Villafranca with a sketch-map of the course of the "Sodro" and | ||||
the "(Lo)cra" (both are given in the text farther on). There can | ||||
hardly be a doubt that the last sentence of the passage given above, | ||||
refers to the court of Francis I. King of France.--L.9-13 are | ||||
written inside the larger sketch, which, in the original, is on the | ||||
right hand side of the page by the side of lines 1-8. The three | ||||
smaller sketches are below. J. P. R.] | ||||
_II. Plans for canals and streets in a town. | ||||
Pl. LXXIX, 1. and 2, (MS. B, 37b, see No. 745, and MS. B. 36a, see | ||||
No. 746). A Plan for streets and canals inside a town, by which the | ||||
cellars of the houses are made accessible in boats. | ||||
The third text given under No. 747 refers to works executed by | ||||
Leonardo in France._ | ||||
745. | ||||
The front _a m_ will give light to the rooms; _a e_ will be 6 | ||||
braccia--_a b_ 8 braccia --_b e_ 30 braccia, in order that the rooms | ||||
under the porticoes may be lighted; _c d f_ is the place where the | ||||
boats come to the houses to be unloaded. In order to render this | ||||
arrangement practicable, and in order that the inundation of the | ||||
rivers may not penetrate into the cellars, it is necessary to chose | ||||
an appropriate situation, such as a spot near a river which can be | ||||
diverted into canals in which the level of the water will not vary | ||||
either by inundations or drought. The construction is shown below; | ||||
and make choice of a fine river, which the rains do not render | ||||
muddy, such as the Ticino, the Adda and many others. [Footnote 12: | ||||
_Tesino, Adda e molti altri, i.e._ rivers coming from the mountains | ||||
and flowing through lakes.] The construction to oblige the waters to | ||||
keep constantly at the same level will be a sort of dock, as shown | ||||
below, situated at the entrance of the town; or better still, some | ||||
way within, in order that the enemy may not destroy it [14]. | ||||
[Footnote: L. 1-4 are on the left hand side and within the sketch | ||||
given on Pl. LXXIX, No. I. Then follows after line 14, the drawing | ||||
of a sluicegate--_conca_--of which the use is explained in the text | ||||
below it. On the page 38a, which comes next in the original MS. is | ||||
the sketch of an oval plan of a town over which is written "_modo di | ||||
canali per la citta_" and through the longer axis of it "_canale | ||||
magior_" is written with "_Tesino_" on the prolongation of the | ||||
canal. J. P. R.] | ||||
746. | ||||
Let the width of the streets be equal to the average height of the | ||||
houses. | ||||
747. | ||||
The main underground channel does not receive turbid water, but that | ||||
water runs in the ditches outside the town with four mills at the | ||||
entrance and four at the outlet; and this may be done by damming the | ||||
water above Romorantin. | ||||
[11]There should be fountains made in each piazza[13]. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original this text comes immediately after the | ||||
passage given as No. 744. The remainder of the writing on the same | ||||
page refers to the construction of canals and is given later, in the | ||||
"Topographical Notes". | ||||
Lines 1-11 are written to the right of the plan lines 11-13 | ||||
underneath it. J. P. R.] | ||||
[Footnote 10: _Romolontino_ is Romorantin, South of Orleans in | ||||
France.] | ||||
_III. Castles and Villas. | ||||
A. Castles. | ||||
Pl. LXXX, No. 1 (P. V. fol. 39b; No. d'ordre 2282). The fortified | ||||
place here represented is said by Vallardi to be the_ "castello" _at | ||||
Milan, but without any satisfactory reason. The high tower behind | ||||
the_ "rivellino" _ravelin--seems to be intended as a watch-tower. | ||||
Pl. LXXX, No. 2 (MS. B, 23b). A similarly constructed tower probably | ||||
intended for the same use. | ||||
Pl. LXXX, No. 3 (MS. B). Sketches for corner towers with steps for a | ||||
citadel. | ||||
Pl. LXXX, No. 4 (W. XVI). A cupola crowning a corner tower; an | ||||
interesting example of decorative fortification. In this | ||||
reproduction of the original pen and ink drawing it appears | ||||
reversed. | ||||
B. Projects for Palaces. | ||||
Pl. LXXXI, No. 2 (MS. C. A, 75b; 221a, see No. 748). Project for a | ||||
royal residence at Amboise in France. | ||||
Pl. LXXXII, No. 1 (C. A 308a; 939a). A plan for a somewhat extensive | ||||
residence, and various details; but there is no text to elucidate | ||||
it; in courts are written the three names: | ||||
Sam cosi giova | ||||
_(St. Mark)_ _(Cosmo)_ _(John)_, | ||||
arch mo nino | ||||
C. Plans for small castles or Villas. | ||||
The three following sketches greatly resemble each other. Pl. | ||||
LXXXII, No. 2 (MS. K3 36b; see No. 749)._ | ||||
_Pl. LXXXII, No. 3 (MS. B 60a; See No. 750). | ||||
Pl. LXXXIII (W. XVII). The text on this sheet refers to Cyprus (see | ||||
Topographical Notes No. 1103), but seems to have no direct | ||||
connection with the sketches inserted between. | ||||
Pl. LXXXVIII, Nos. 6 and 7 (MS. B, 12a; see No. 751). A section of a | ||||
circular pavilion with the plan of a similar building by the side of | ||||
it. These two drawings have a special historical interest because | ||||
the text written below mentions the Duke and Duchess of Milan. | ||||
The sketch of a villa on a terrace at the end of a garden occurs in | ||||
C. A. 150; and in C. A. 77b; 225b is another sketch of a villa | ||||
somewhat resembling the_ Belvedere _of Pope Innocent VIII, at Rome. | ||||
In C. A. 62b; 193b there is a Loggia. | ||||
Pl. LXXXII, No. 4 (C. A. 387a; 1198a) is a tower-shaped_ Loggia | ||||
_above a fountain. The machinery is very ingeniously screened from | ||||
view._ | ||||
748. | ||||
The Palace of the prince must have a piazza in front of it. | ||||
Houses intended for dancing or any kind of jumping or any other | ||||
movements with a multitude of people, must be on the ground- floor; | ||||
for I have already witnessed the destruction of some, causing death | ||||
to many persons, and above all let every wall, be it ever so thin, | ||||
rest on the ground or on arches with a good foundation. | ||||
Let the mezzanines of the dwellings be divided by walls made of very | ||||
thin bricks, and without wood on account of fire. | ||||
Let all the privies have ventilation [by shafts] in the thickness of | ||||
the walls, so as to exhale by the roofs. | ||||
The mezzanines should be vaulted, and the vaults will be stronger in | ||||
proportion as they are of small size. | ||||
The ties of oak must be enclosed in the walls in order to be | ||||
protected from fire. | ||||
[Footnote: The remarks accompanying the plan reproduced on Pl. | ||||
LXXXI, No. 2 are as follows: Above, to the left: "_in_ a _angholo | ||||
stia la guardia de la sstalla_" (in the angle _a_ may be the keeper | ||||
of the stable). Below are the words "_strada dabosa_" (road to | ||||
Amboise), parallel with this "_fossa br 40_" (the moat 40 braccia) | ||||
fixing the width of the moat. In the large court surrounded by a | ||||
portico "_in terre No.--Largha br.80 e lugha br 120_." To the right | ||||
of the castle is a large basin for aquatic sports with the words | ||||
"_Giostre colle nave cioe li giostra li stieno sopra le na_" | ||||
(Jousting in boats that is the men are to be in boats). J. P. R.] | ||||
The privies must be numerous and going one into the other in order | ||||
that the stench may not penetrate into the dwellings., and all their | ||||
doors must shut off themselves with counterpoises. | ||||
The main division of the facade of this palace is into two portions; | ||||
that is to say the width of the court-yard must be half the whole | ||||
facade; the 2nd ... | ||||
749. | ||||
30 braccia wide on each side; the lower entrance leads into a hall | ||||
10 braccia wide and 30 braccia long with 4 recesses each with a | ||||
chimney. | ||||
[Footnote: On each side of the castle, Pl. LXXXII. No. 2 there are | ||||
drawings of details, to the left "_Camino_" a chimney, to the right | ||||
the central lantern, sketched in red "_8 lati_" _i.e._ an octagon.] | ||||
750. | ||||
The firststorey [or terrace] must be entirely solid. | ||||
751. | ||||
The pavilion in the garden of the Duchess of Milan. | ||||
The plan of the pavilion which is in the middle of the labyrinth of | ||||
the Duke of Milan. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage was first published by AMORETTI in _Memorie | ||||
Storiche_ Cap. X: Una sua opera da riportarsi a quest' anno fu il | ||||
bagno fatto per la duchessa Beatrice nel parco o giardino del | ||||
Castello. Lionardo non solo ne disegno il piccolo edifizio a foggia | ||||
di padiglione, nel cod. segnato Q. 3, dandone anche separatamente la | ||||
pianta; ma sotto vi scrisse: Padiglione del giardino della duchessa; | ||||
e sotto la pianta: Fondamento del padiglione ch'e nel mezzo del | ||||
labirinto del duca di Milano; nessuna data e presso il padiglione, | ||||
disegnato nella pagina 12, ma poco sopra fra molti circoli | ||||
intrecciati vedesi = 10 Luglio 1492 = e nella pagina 2 presso ad | ||||
alcuni disegni di legumi qualcheduno ha letto Settembre 1482 in vece | ||||
di 1492, come dovea scriverevi, e probabilmente scrisse Lionardo. | ||||
The original text however hardly bears the interpretation put upon | ||||
it by AMORETTI. He is mistaken as to the mark on the MS. as well as | ||||
in his statements as to the date, for the MS. in question has no | ||||
date; the date he gives occurs, on the contrary, in another | ||||
note-book. Finally, it appears to me quite an open question whether | ||||
Leonardo was the architect who carried out the construction of the | ||||
dome-like Pavilion here shown in section, or of the ground plan of | ||||
the Pavilion drawn by the side of it. Must we, in fact, suppose that | ||||
"_il duca di Milano_" here mentioned was, as has been generally | ||||
assumed, Ludovico il Moro? He did not hold this title from the | ||||
Emperor before 1494; till that date he was only called _Governatore_ | ||||
and Leonardo in speaking of him, mentions him generally as "_il | ||||
Moro_" even after 1494. On January 18, 1491, he married Beatrice | ||||
d'Este the daughter of Ercole I, Duke of Ferrara. She died on the | ||||
2nd January 1497, and for the reasons I have given it seems | ||||
improbable that it should be this princess who is here spoken of as | ||||
the "_Duchessa di Milano_". From the style of the handwriting it | ||||
appears to me to be beyond all doubt that the MS. B, from which this | ||||
passage is taken, is older than the dated MSS. of 1492 and 1493. In | ||||
that case the Duke of Milan here mentioned would be Gian Galeazzo | ||||
(1469-1494) and the Duchess would be his wife Isabella of Aragon, to | ||||
whom he was married on the second February 1489. J. P. R.] | ||||
752. | ||||
The earth that is dug out from the cellars must be raised on one | ||||
side so high as to make a terrace garden as high as the level of the | ||||
hall; but between the earth of the terrace and the wall of the | ||||
house, leave an interval in order that the damp may not spoil the | ||||
principal walls. | ||||
_IV. Ecclesiastical Architecture. | ||||
A. General Observations._ | ||||
753. | ||||
A building should always be detached on all sides so that its form | ||||
may be seen. | ||||
[Footnote: The original text is reproduced on Pl. XCII, No. 1 to the | ||||
left hand at the bottom.] | ||||
754. | ||||
Here there cannot and ought not to be any _campanile_; on the | ||||
contrary it must stand apart like that of the Cathedral and of San | ||||
Giovanni at Florence, and of the Cathedral at Pisa, where the | ||||
campanile is quite detached as well as the dome. Thus each can | ||||
display its own perfection. If however you wish to join it to the | ||||
church, make the lantern serve for the campanile as in the church at | ||||
Chiaravalle. | ||||
[Footnote: This text is written by the side of the plan given on Pl. | ||||
XCI. No. 2.] | ||||
[Footnote 12: The Abbey of Chiaravalle, a few miles from Milan, has | ||||
a central tower on the intersection of the cross in the style of | ||||
that of the Certosa of Pavia, but the style is mediaeval (A. D. | ||||
1330). Leonardo seems here to mean, that in a building, in which the | ||||
circular form is strongly conspicuous, the campanile must either be | ||||
separated, or rise from the centre of the building and therefore | ||||
take the form of a lantern.] | ||||
755. | ||||
It never looks well to see the roofs of a church; they should rather | ||||
be flat and the water should run off by gutters made in the frieze. | ||||
[Footnote: This text is to the left of the domed church reproduced | ||||
on Pl. LXXXVII, No. 2.] | ||||
_B. The theory of Dome Architecture. | ||||
This subject has been more extensively treated by Leonardo in | ||||
drawings than in writing. Still we may fairly assume that it was his | ||||
purpose, ultimately to embody the results of his investigation in a_ | ||||
"Trattato delle Cupole." _The amount of materials is remarkably | ||||
extensive. MS. B is particularly rich in plans and elevations of | ||||
churches with one or more domes--from the simplest form to the most | ||||
complicated that can be imagined. Considering the evident connexion | ||||
between a great number of these sketches, as well as the | ||||
impossibility of seeing in them designs or preparatory sketches for | ||||
any building intended to be erected, the conclusion is obvious that | ||||
they were not designed for any particular monument, but were | ||||
theoretical and ideal researches, made in order to obtain a clear | ||||
understanding of the laws which must govern the construction of a | ||||
great central dome, with smaller ones grouped round it; and with or | ||||
without the addition of spires, so that each of these parts by | ||||
itself and in its juxtaposition to the other parts should produce | ||||
the grandest possible effect. | ||||
In these sketches Leonardo seems to have exhausted every imaginable | ||||
combination. [Footnote 1: In MS. B, 32b (see Pl. C III, No. 2) we | ||||
find eight geometrical patterns, each drawn in a square; and in MS. | ||||
C.A., fol. 87 to 98 form a whole series of patterns done with the | ||||
same intention.] The results of some of these problems are perhaps | ||||
not quite satisfactory; still they cannot be considered to give | ||||
evidence of a want of taste or of any other defect in Leonardo s | ||||
architectural capacity. They were no doubt intended exclusively for | ||||
his own instruction, and, before all, as it seems, to illustrate the | ||||
features or consequences resulting from a given principle._ | ||||
_I have already, in another place,_ [Footnote 1: Les Projets | ||||
Primitifs pour la Basilique de St. Pierre de Rome, par Bramante, | ||||
Raphael etc.,Vol. I, p. 2.] _pointed out the law of construction for | ||||
buildings crowned by a large dome: namely, that such a dome, to | ||||
produce the greatest effect possible, should rise either from the | ||||
centre of a Greek cross, or from the centre of a structure of which | ||||
the plan has some symmetrical affinity to a circle, this circle | ||||
being at the same time the centre of the whole plan of the building. | ||||
Leonardo's sketches show that he was fully aware, as was to be | ||||
expected, of this truth. Few of them exhibit the form of a Latin | ||||
cross, and when this is met with, it generally gives evidence of the | ||||
determination to assign as prominent a part as possible to the dome | ||||
in the general effect of the building. | ||||
While it is evident, on the one hand, that the greater number of | ||||
these domes had no particular purpose, not being designed for | ||||
execution, on the other hand several reasons may be found for | ||||
Leonardo's perseverance in his studies of the subject. | ||||
Besides the theoretical interest of the question for Leonardo and | ||||
his_ Trattato _and besides the taste for domes prevailing at that | ||||
time, it seems likely that the intended erection of some building of | ||||
the first importance like the Duomos of Pavia and Como, the church | ||||
of Sta. Maria delle Grazie at Milan, and the construction of a Dome | ||||
or central Tower_ (Tiburio) _on the cathedral of Milan, may have | ||||
stimulated Leonardo to undertake a general and thorough | ||||
investigation of the subject; whilst Leonardo's intercourse with | ||||
Bramante for ten years or more, can hardly have remained without | ||||
influence in this matter. In fact now that some of this great | ||||
Architect's studies for S. Peter's at Rome have at last become | ||||
known, he must be considered henceforth as the greatest master of | ||||
Dome-Architecture that ever existed. His influence, direct or | ||||
indirect even on a genius like Leonardo seems the more likely, since | ||||
Leonardo's sketches reveal a style most similar to that of Bramante, | ||||
whose name indeed, occurs twice in Leonardo's manuscript notes. It | ||||
must not be forgotten that Leonardo was a Florentine; the | ||||
characteristic form of the two principal domes of Florence, Sta. | ||||
Maria del Fiore and the Battisterio, constantly appear as leading | ||||
features in his sketches. | ||||
The church of San Lorenzo at Milan, was at that time still intact. | ||||
The dome is to this day one of the most wonderful cupolas ever | ||||
constructed, and with its two smaller domes might well attract the | ||||
attention and study of a never resting genius such as Leonardo. A | ||||
whole class of these sketches betray in fact the direct influence of | ||||
the church of S. Lorenzo, and this also seems to have suggested the | ||||
plan of Bramante's dome of St. Peter's at Rome. | ||||
In the following pages the various sketches for the construction of | ||||
domes have been classified and discussed from a general point of | ||||
view. On two sheets: Pl. LXXXIV (C.A. 354b; 118a) and Pl. LXXXV, | ||||
Nos. 1-11 (Ash. II, 6b) we see various dissimilar types, grouped | ||||
together; thus these two sheets may be regarded as a sort of | ||||
nomenclature of the different types, on which we shall now have to | ||||
treat._ | ||||
_1. Churches formed on the plan of a Greek cross. | ||||
Group I. | ||||
Domes rising from a circular base. | ||||
The simplest type of central building is a circular edifice. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV, No. 9. Plan of a circular building surrounded by a | ||||
colonnade. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV, No. 8. Elevation of the former, with a conical roof. | ||||
Pl. XC. No. 5. A dodecagon, as most nearly approaching the circle. | ||||
Pl. LXXXVI, No. 1, 2, 3. Four round chapels are added at the | ||||
extremities of the two principal axes;--compare this plan with fig. | ||||
1 on p. 44 and fig. 3 on p. 47 (W. P. 5b) where the outer wall is | ||||
octagonal. | ||||
Group II. | ||||
Domes rising from a square base. | ||||
The plan is a square surrounded by a colonnade, and the dome seems | ||||
to be octagonal. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV. The square plan below the circular building No. 8, and | ||||
its elevation to the left, above the plan: here the ground-plan is | ||||
square, the upper storey octagonal. A further development of this | ||||
type is shown in two sketches C. A. 3a (not reproduced here), and in | ||||
Pl. LXXXVI, No. 5 (which possibly belongs to No. 7 on Pl. LXXXIV). | ||||
Pl, LXXXV, No. 4, and p. 45, Fig. 3, a Greek cross, repeated p. 45, | ||||
Fig. 3, is another development of the square central plan. | ||||
The remainder of these studies show two different systems; in the | ||||
first the dome rises from a square plan,--in the second from an | ||||
octagonal base._ | ||||
_Group III. | ||||
Domes rising from a square base and four pillars. [Footnote 1: The | ||||
ancient chapel San Satiro, via del Falcone, Milan, is a specimen of | ||||
this type.]_ | ||||
a) First type. _A Dome resting on four pillars in the centre of a | ||||
square edifice, with an apse in the middle, of each of the four | ||||
sides. We have eleven variations of this type. | ||||
aa) Pl. LXXXVIII, No. 3. | ||||
bb) Pl. LXXX, No. 5. | ||||
cc) Pl. LXXXV, Nos. 2, 3, 5. | ||||
dd) Pl. LXXXIV, No. 1 and 4 beneath. | ||||
ee) Pl. LXXXV, Nos. 1, 7, 10, 11._ | ||||
b) Second type. _This consists in adding aisles to the whole plan of | ||||
the first type; columns are placed between the apses and the aisles; | ||||
the plan thus obtained is very nearly identical with that of S. | ||||
Lorenzo at Milan. | ||||
Fig. 1 on p. 56. (MS. B, 75a) shows the result of this treatment | ||||
adapted to a peculiar purpose about which we shall have to say a few | ||||
words later on. | ||||
Pl. XCV, No. 1, shows the same plan but with the addition of a short | ||||
nave. This plan seems to have been suggested by the general | ||||
arrangement of S. Sepolcro at Milan. | ||||
MS. B. 57b (see the sketch reproduced on p.51). By adding towers in | ||||
the four outer angles to the last named plan, we obtain a plan which | ||||
bears the general features of Bramante's plans for S. Peter's at | ||||
Rome. [Footnote 2: See_ Les projets primitifs _etc., Pl. 9-12.] (See | ||||
p. 51 Fig. 1.) | ||||
Group IV. | ||||
Domes rising from an octagonal base. | ||||
This system, developed according to two different schemes, has given | ||||
rise to two classes with many varieties. | ||||
In a) On each side of the octagon chapels of equal form are added. | ||||
In b) The chapels are dissimilar; those which terminate the | ||||
principal axes being different in form from those which are added on | ||||
the diagonal sides of the octagon. | ||||
a. First Class. | ||||
The Chapel_ "degli Angeli," _at Florence, built only to a height of | ||||
about 20 feet by Brunellesco, may be considered as the prototype of | ||||
this group; and, indeed it probably suggested it. The fact that we | ||||
see in MS. B. 11b (Pl. XCIV, No. 3) by the side of Brunellesco's | ||||
plan for the Basilica of Sto. Spirito at Florence, a plan almost | ||||
identical with that of the_ Capella degli Angeli, _confirms this | ||||
supposition. Only two small differences, or we may say improvements, | ||||
have been introduced by Leonardo. Firstly the back of the chapels | ||||
contains a third niche, and each angle of the Octagon a folded | ||||
pilaster like those in Bramante's_ Sagrestia di S. M. presso San | ||||
Satiro _at Milan, instead of an interval between the two pilasters | ||||
as seen in the Battistero at Florence and in the Sacristy of Sto. | ||||
Spirito in the same town and also in the above named chapel by | ||||
Brunellesco. | ||||
The first set of sketches which come under consideration have at | ||||
first sight the appearance of mere geometrical studies. They seem to | ||||
have been suggested by the plan given on page 44 Fig. 2 (MS. B, 55a) | ||||
in the centre of which is written_ "Santa Maria in perticha da | ||||
Pavia", _at the place marked A on the reproduction. | ||||
a) (MS. B, 34b, page 44 Fig. 3). In the middle of each side a column | ||||
is added, and in the axes of the intercolumnar spaces a second row | ||||
of columns forms an aisle round the octagon. These are placed at the | ||||
intersection of a system of semicircles, of which the sixteen | ||||
columns on the sides of the octagon are the centres. | ||||
b) The preceding diagram is completed and becomes more monumental in | ||||
style in the sketch next to it (MS. B, 35a, see p. 45 Fig. 1). An | ||||
outer aisle is added by circles, having for radius the distance | ||||
between the columns in the middle sides of the octagon. | ||||
c) (MS. B. 96b, see p. 45 Fig. 2). Octagon with an aisle round it; | ||||
the angles of both are formed by columns. The outer sides are formed | ||||
by 8 niches forming chapels. The exterior is likewise octagonal, | ||||
with the angles corresponding to the centre of each of the interior | ||||
chapels. | ||||
Pl. XCII, No. 2 (MS. B. 96b). Detail and modification of the | ||||
preceding plan--half columns against piers--an arrangement by which | ||||
the chapels of the aisle have the same width of opening as the inner | ||||
arches between the half columns. Underneath this sketch the | ||||
following note occurs:_ questo vole - avere 12 facce - co 12 | ||||
tabernaculi - come - _a_ - _b_. _(This will have twelve sides with | ||||
twelve tabernacles as_ a b._) In the remaining sketches of this | ||||
class the octagon is not formed by columns at the angles. | ||||
The simplest type shows a niche in the middle of each side and is | ||||
repeated on several sheets, viz: MS. B 3; MS. C.A. 354b (see Pl. | ||||
LXXXIV, No. 11) and MS. Ash II 6b; (see Pl. LXXXV, No. 9 and the | ||||
elevations No. 8; Pl. XCII, No. 3; MS. B. 4b [not reproduced here] | ||||
and Pl. LXXXIV, No. 2)._ | ||||
_Pl. XCII, 3 (MS. B, 56b) corresponds to a plan like the one in MS. | ||||
B 35a, in which the niches would be visible outside or, as in the | ||||
following sketch, with the addition of a niche in the middle of each | ||||
chapel. | ||||
Pl. XC, No. 6. The niches themselves are surrounded by smaller | ||||
niches (see also No. 1 on the same plate). | ||||
Octagon expanded on each side. | ||||
A. by a square chapel: | ||||
MS. B. 34b (not reproduced here). | ||||
B. by a square with 3 niches: | ||||
MS. B. 11b (see Pl. XCIV, No. 3). | ||||
C. by octagonal chapels: | ||||
a) MS. B, 21a; Pl. LXXXVIII, No. 4. | ||||
b) No. 2 on the same plate. Underneath there is the remark:_ | ||||
"quest'e come le 8 cappele ano a essere facte" _(this is how the | ||||
eight chapels are to be executed). | ||||
c) Pl. LXXXVIII, No. 5. Elevation to the plans on the same sheet, it | ||||
is accompanied by the note:_ "ciasscuno de' 9 tiburi no'uole - | ||||
passare l'alteza - di - 2 - quadri" _(neither of the 9 domes must | ||||
exceed the height of two squares). | ||||
d) Pl. LXXXVIII, No. 1. Inside of the same octagon. MS. B, 30a, and | ||||
34b; these are three repetitions of parts of the same plan with very | ||||
slight variations. | ||||
D. by a circular chapel: | ||||
MS. B, 18a (see Fig. 1 on page 47) gives the plan of this | ||||
arrangement in which the exterior is square on the ground floor with | ||||
only four of the chapels projecting, as is explained in the next | ||||
sketch. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIX, MS. B, 17b. Elevation to the preceding plan sketched on | ||||
the opposite side of the sheet, and also marked A. It is accompanied | ||||
by the following remark, indicating the theoretical character of | ||||
these studies:_ questo - edifitio - anchora - starebbe - bene | ||||
affarlo dalla linja - _a_ - _b_ - _c_ - _d_ - insu. _("This edifice | ||||
would also produce a good effect if only the part above the lines_ a | ||||
b, c d, _were executed"). | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV, No. 11. The exterior has the form of an octagon, but the | ||||
chapels project partly beyond it. On the left side of the sketch | ||||
they appear larger than on the right side. | ||||
Pl. XC, No. 1, (MS. B, 25b); Repetition of Pl. LXXXIV, No. 11. | ||||
Pl. XC, No. 2. Elevation to the plan No. 1, and also to No. 6 of the | ||||
same sheet._ | ||||
_E. By chapels formed by four niches: | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV, No. 7 (the circular plan on the left below) shows this | ||||
arrangement in which the central dome has become circular inside and | ||||
might therefore be classed after this group. [Footnote 1: This plan | ||||
and some others of this class remind us of the plan of the Mausoleum | ||||
of Augustus as it is represented for instance by Durand. See_ Cab. | ||||
des Estampes, Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris, Topographie de Rome, V, | ||||
6, 82._] | ||||
The sketch on the right hand side gives most likely the elevation | ||||
for the last named plan. | ||||
F. By chapels of still richer combinations, which necessitate an | ||||
octagon of larger dimensions: | ||||
Pl. XCI, No. 2 (MS. Ash. 11. 8b) [Footnote 2: The note accompanying | ||||
this plan is given under No. 754.]; on this plan the chapels | ||||
themselves appear to be central buildings formed like the first type | ||||
of the third group. Pl. LXXXVIII, No. 3. | ||||
Pl. XCI, No. 2 above; the exterior of the preceding figure, | ||||
particularly interesting on account of the alternation of apses and | ||||
niches, the latter containing statues of a gigantic size, in | ||||
proportion to the dimension of the niches. | ||||
b. Second Class. | ||||
Composite plans of this class are generally obtained by combining | ||||
two types of the first class--the one worked out on the principal | ||||
axes, the other on the diagonal ones. | ||||
MS. B. 22 shows an elementary combination, without any additions on | ||||
the diagonal axes, but with the dimensions of the squares on the two | ||||
principal axes exceeding those of the sides of the octagon. | ||||
In the drawing W. P. 5b (see page 44 Fig. 1) the exterior only of | ||||
the edifice is octagonal, the interior being formed by a circular | ||||
colonnade; round chapels are placed against the four sides of the | ||||
principal axes. | ||||
The elevation, drawn on the same sheet (see page 47 Fig. 3), shows | ||||
the whole arrangement which is closely related with the one on Pl. | ||||
LXXXVI No. 1, 2. | ||||
MS. B. 21a shows: | ||||
a) four sides with rectangular chapels crowned by pediments Pl. | ||||
LXXXVII No. 3 (plan and elevation); | ||||
b) four sides with square chapels crowned by octagonal domes. Pl. | ||||
LXXXVII No. 4; the plan underneath. | ||||
MS. B. 18a shows a variation obtained by replacing the round chapels | ||||
in the principal axes of the sketch MS. B. l8a by square ones, with | ||||
an apse. Leonardo repeated both ideas for better comparison side by | ||||
side, see page 47. Fig. 2. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIX (MS. B. 17b). Elevation for the preceding figure. The | ||||
comparison of the drawing marked M with the plan on page 47 Fig. 2, | ||||
bearing the same mark, and of the elevation on Pl. LXXXIX below | ||||
(marked A) with the corresponding plan on page 47 is highly | ||||
instructive, as illustrating the spirit in which Leonardo pursued | ||||
these studies. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV No. 12 shows the design Pl. LXXXVII No. 3 combined with | ||||
apses, with the addition of round chapels on the diagonal sides. | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV No. 13 is a variation of the preceding sketch. | ||||
Pl. XC No. 3. MS. B. 25b. The round chapels of the preceding sketch | ||||
are replaced by octagonal chapels, above which rise campaniles. | ||||
Pl. XC No. 4 is the elevation for the preceding plan. | ||||
Pl. XCII No. 1. (MS. B. 39b.); the plan below. On the principal as | ||||
well as on the diagonal axes are diagonal chapels, but the latter | ||||
are separated from the dome by semicircular recesses. The | ||||
communication between these eight chapels forms a square aisle round | ||||
the central dome. | ||||
Above this figure is the elevation, showing four campaniles on the | ||||
angles. [Footnote 1: The note accompanying this drawing is | ||||
reproduced under No. 753.] | ||||
Pl. LXXXIV No. 3. On the principal axes are square chapels with | ||||
three niches; on the diagonals octagonal chapels with niches. Cod. | ||||
Atl. 340b gives a somewhat similar arrangement. | ||||
MS. B. 30. The principal development is thrown on the diagonal axes | ||||
by square chapels with three niches; on the principal axes are inner | ||||
recesses communicating with outer ones. | ||||
The plan Pl. XCIII No. 2 (MS. B. 22) differs from this only in so | ||||
far as the outer semicircles have become circular chapels, | ||||
projecting from the external square as apses; one of them serves as | ||||
the entrance by a semicircular portico. | ||||
The elevation is drawn on the left side of the plan. | ||||
MS. B. 19. A further development of MS. B. 18, by employing for the | ||||
four principal chapels the type Pl. LXXXVIII No. 3, as we have | ||||
already seen in Pl. XCI No. 2; the exterior presents two varieties. | ||||
a) The outer contour follows the inner. [Footnote 2: These chapels | ||||
are here sketched in two different sizes; it is the smaller type | ||||
which is thus formed.] | ||||
b) It is semicircular. | ||||
Pl. LXXXVII No. 2 (MS. B. 18b) Elevation to the first variation MS. | ||||
B. 19. If we were not certain that this sketch was by Leonardo, we | ||||
might feel tempted to take it as a study by Bramante for St. Peter's | ||||
at Rome. [Footnote 3: See_ Les projets primitifs Pl. 43._]_ | ||||
_MS. P. V. 39b. In the principal axes the chapels of MS. B. 19, and | ||||
semicircular niches on the diagonals. The exterior of the whole | ||||
edifice is also an octagon, concealing the form of the interior | ||||
chapels, but with its angles on their axes. | ||||
Group V. | ||||
Suggested by San Lorenzo at Milan. | ||||
In MS. C. A. 266 IIb, 8l2b there is a plan almost identical with | ||||
that of San Lorenzo. The diagonal sides of the irregular octagon are | ||||
not indicated. | ||||
If it could be proved that the arches which, in the actual church, | ||||
exist on these sides in the first story, were added in 1574 by | ||||
Martimo Bassi, then this plan and the following section would be | ||||
still nearer the original state of San Lorenzo than at present. A | ||||
reproduction of this slightly sketched plan has not been possible. | ||||
It may however be understood from Pl. LXXXVIII No. 3, by suppressing | ||||
the four pillars corresponding to the apses. | ||||
Pl. LXXXVII No. 1 shows the section in elevation corresponding with | ||||
the above-named plan. The recessed chapels are decorated with large | ||||
shells in the halfdomes like the arrangement in San Lorenzo, but | ||||
with proportions like those of Bramante's Sacristy of Santa Maria | ||||
presso S. Satiro. | ||||
MS. C. A. 266; a sheet containing three views of exteriors of Domes. | ||||
On the same sheet there is a plan similar to the one above-named but | ||||
with uninterrupted aisles and with the addition of round chapels in | ||||
the axes (compare Pl. XCVII No. 3 and page 44 Fig. 1), perhaps a | ||||
reminiscence of the two chapels annexed to San Lorenzo.--Leonardo | ||||
has here sketched the way of transforming this plan into a Latin | ||||
cross by means of a nave with side aisles. | ||||
Pl. XCI No. 1. Plan showing a type deprived of aisles and comprised | ||||
in a square building which is surrounded by a portico. It is | ||||
accompanied by the following text:_ | ||||
756. | ||||
This edifice is inhabited [accessible] below and above, like San | ||||
Sepolcro, and it is the same above as below, except that the upper | ||||
story has the dome _c d_; and the [Footnote: The church of San | ||||
Sepolcro at Milan, founded in 1030 and repeatedly rebuilt after the | ||||
middle of the XVIth century, still stands over the crypt of the | ||||
original structure.] lower has the dome _a b_, and when you enter | ||||
into the crypt, you descend 10 steps, and when you mount into the | ||||
upper you ascend 20 steps, which, with 1/3 braccio for each, make 10 | ||||
braccia, and this is the height between one floor of the church and | ||||
the other. | ||||
_Above the plan on the same sheet is a view of the exterior. By the | ||||
aid of these two figures and the description, sections of the | ||||
edifice may easily be reconstructed. But the section drawn on the | ||||
left side of the building seems not to be in keeping with the same | ||||
plan, notwithstanding the explanatory note written underneath it: | ||||
"dentro il difitio di sopra" (interior of the edifice | ||||
above)[Footnote 1: _The small inner dome corresponds to_ a b _on the | ||||
plan--it rises from the lower church into the upper-- above, and | ||||
larger, rises the dome_ c d. _The aisles above and below thus | ||||
correspond_ (e di sopra come di sotto, salvoche etc.). _The only | ||||
difference is, that in the section Leonardo has not taken the | ||||
trouble to make the form octagonal, but has merely sketched circular | ||||
lines in perspective._ J. P. R._]. | ||||
_Before leaving this group, it is well to remark that the germ of it | ||||
seems already indicated by the diagonal lines in the plans Pl. LXXXV | ||||
No. 11 and No. 7. We shall find another application of the same type | ||||
to the Latin cross in Pl. XCVII No. 3. | ||||
_2. Churches formed on the plan of a Latin cross. | ||||
We find among Leonardo's studies several sketches for churches on | ||||
the plan of the Latin cross; we shall begin by describing them, and | ||||
shall add a few observations. | ||||
A. Studies after existing Monuments. | ||||
Pl. XCIV No. 2. (MS. B. 11b.) Plan of Santo Spirito at Florence, a | ||||
basilica built after the designs of Brunellesco.--Leonardo has added | ||||
the indication of a portico in front, either his own invention or | ||||
the reproduction of a now lost design. | ||||
Pl. XCV No. 2. Plan accompanied by the words: "A_ e santo sepolcro | ||||
di milano di sopra"(A _is the upper church of S. Sepolcro at Milan); | ||||
although since Leonardo's time considerably spoilt, it is still the | ||||
same in plan. | ||||
The second plan with its note: "B_ e la sua parte socto tera" (B _is | ||||
its subterranean part [the crypt]) still corresponds with the | ||||
present state of this part of the church as I have ascertained by | ||||
visiting the crypt with this plan. Excepting the addition of a few | ||||
insignificant walls, the state of this interesting part of the | ||||
church still conforms to Leonardo's sketch; but in the Vestibolo the | ||||
two columns near the entrance of the winding stairs are absent. | ||||
B. Designs or Studies. | ||||
PL. XCV No. 1. Plan of a church evidently suggested by that of San | ||||
Sepolcro at Milan. The central part has been added to on the | ||||
principle of the second type of Group III. Leonardo has placed the_ | ||||
"coro" _(choir) in the centre._ | ||||
_Pl. XCVI No. 2. In the plan the dome, as regards its interior, | ||||
belongs to the First Class of Group IV, and may be grouped with the | ||||
one in MS. B. 35a. The nave seems to be a development of the type | ||||
represented in Pl. XCV No. 2, B. by adding towers and two lateral | ||||
porticos[Footnote 1: Already published in Les projets primitifs Pl. | ||||
XLIII.]. | ||||
On the left is a view of the exterior of the preceding plan. It is | ||||
accompanied by the following note:_ | ||||
757. | ||||
This building is inhabited below and above; the way up is by the | ||||
campaniles, and in going up one has to use the platform, where the | ||||
drums of the four domes are, and this platform has a parapet in | ||||
front, and none of these domes communicate with the church, but they | ||||
are quite separate. | ||||
_Pl. XCVI No. 1 (MS. C. A. 16b; 65a). Perspective view of a church | ||||
seen from behind; this recalls the Duomo at Florence, but with two | ||||
campaniles[Footnote 2: Already published in the Saggio Pl. IX.]. | ||||
Pl. XCVII No. 3 (MS. B. 52a). The central part is a development of | ||||
S. Lorenzo at Milan, such as was executed at the Duomo of Pavia. | ||||
There is sufficient analogy between the building actually executed | ||||
and this sketch to suggest a direct connection between them. | ||||
Leonardo accompanied Francesco di Giorgio[Footnote 3: See MALASPINA, | ||||
il Duomo di Pavia. Documents.] when the latter was consulted on June | ||||
21st, 1490 as to this church; the fact that the only word | ||||
accompanying the plan is:_ "sagrestia", _seems to confirm our | ||||
supposition, for the sacristies were added only in 1492, i. e. four | ||||
years after the beginning of the Cathedral, which at that time was | ||||
most likely still sufficiently unfinished to be capable of receiving | ||||
the form of the present sketch. | ||||
Pl. XCVII No. 2 shows the exterior of this design. Below is the | ||||
note:_ edifitio al proposito del fodameto figurato di socto | ||||
_(edifice proper for the ground plan figured below). | ||||
Here we may also mention the plan of a Latin cross drawn in MS. C. | ||||
A. fol. 266 (see p. 50). | ||||
Pl. XCIV No. 1 (MS. L. 15b). External side view of Brunellesco's | ||||
Florentine basilica San Lorenzo, seen from the North. | ||||
Pl. XCIV No. 4 (V. A. V, 1). Principal front of a nave, most likely | ||||
of a church on the plan of a Latin cross. We notice here not only | ||||
the principal features which were employed afterwards in Alberti's | ||||
front of S. Maria Novella, but even details of a more advanced | ||||
style, such as we are accustomed to meet with only after the year | ||||
1520. | ||||
In the background of Leonardo's unfinished picture of St. Jerome | ||||
(Vatican Gallery) a somewhat similar church front is indicated (see | ||||
the accompanying sketch). | ||||
[Illustration with caption: The view of the front of a temple, | ||||
apparently a dome in the centre of four corinthian porticos bearing | ||||
pediments (published by Amoretti Tav. II. B as being by Leonardo), | ||||
is taken from a drawing, now at the Ambrosian Gallery. We cannot | ||||
consider this to be by the hand of the master.]_ | ||||
_C. Studies for a form of a Church most proper for preaching. | ||||
The problem as to what form of church might answer the requirements | ||||
of acoustics seems to have engaged Leonardo's very particular | ||||
attention. The designation of_ "teatro" _given to some of these | ||||
sketches, clearly shows which plan seemed to him most favourable for | ||||
hearing the preacher's voice. | ||||
Pl. XCVII, No. 1 (MS. B, 52). Rectangular edifice divided into three | ||||
naves with an apse on either side, terminated by a semicircular | ||||
theatre with rising seats, as in antique buildings. The pulpit is in | ||||
the centre. Leonardo has written on the left side of the sketch_: | ||||
"teatro da predicare" _(Theatre for preaching). | ||||
MS. B, 55a (see page 56, Fig. 1). A domed church after the type of | ||||
Pl. XCV, No. 1, shows four theatres occupying the apses and facing | ||||
the square_ "coro" _(choir), which is in the centre between the four | ||||
pillars of the dome.[Footnote 1: The note_ teatro de predicar, _on | ||||
the right side is, I believe, in the handwriting of Pompeo Leoni. J. | ||||
P. R.] The rising arrangement of the seats is shown in the sketch | ||||
above. At the place marked_ B _Leonardo wrote_ teatri per uldire | ||||
messa _(rows of seats to hear mass), at_ T teatri,_ and at_ C coro | ||||
_(choir). | ||||
In MS. C.A. 260, are slight sketches of two plans for rectangular | ||||
choirs and two elevations of the altar and pulpit which seem to be | ||||
in connection with these plans. | ||||
In MS. Ash II, 8a (see p. 56 and 57. Fig. 2 and 3)._ "Locho dove si | ||||
predica" _(Place for preaching). A most singular plan for a | ||||
building. The interior is a portion of a sphere, the centre of which | ||||
is the summit of a column destined to serve as the preacher's | ||||
pulpit. The inside is somewhat like a modern theatre, whilst the | ||||
exterior and the galleries and stairs recall the ancient | ||||
amphitheatres. | ||||
[Illustration with caption: Page 57, Fig. 4. A plan accompanying the | ||||
two preceding drawings. If this gives the complete form Leonardo | ||||
intended for the edifice, it would have comprised only about two | ||||
thirds of the circle. Leonardo wrote in the centre_ "fondamento", _a | ||||
word he often employed for plans, and on the left side of the view | ||||
of the exterior:_ locho dove si predicha _(a place for preaching | ||||
in)._] | ||||
_D. Design for a Mausoleum. | ||||
Pl. XCVIII (P. V., 182._ No. d'ordre 2386). In the midst of a hilly | ||||
landscape rises an artificial mountain in the form of a gigantic | ||||
cone, crowned by an imposing temple. At two thirds of the height a | ||||
terrace is cut out with six doorways forming entrances to galleries, | ||||
each leading to three sepulchral halls, so constructed as to contain | ||||
about five hundred funeral urns, disposed in the customary antique | ||||
style. From two opposite sides steps ascend to the terrace in a | ||||
single flight and beyond it to the temple above. A large circular | ||||
opening, like that in the Pantheon, is in the dome above what may be | ||||
the altar, or perhaps the central monument on the level of the | ||||
terrace below. | ||||
The section of a gallery given in the sketch to the right below | ||||
shows the roof to be constructed on the principle of superimposed | ||||
horizontal layers, projecting one beyond the other, and each | ||||
furnished with a sort of heel, which appears to be undercut, so as | ||||
to give the appearance of a beam from within. Granite alone would be | ||||
adequate to the dimensions here given to the key stone, as the | ||||
thickness of the layers can hardly be considered to be less than a | ||||
foot. In taking this as the basis of our calculation for the | ||||
dimensions of the whole construction, the width of the chamber would | ||||
be about 25 feet but, judging from the number of urns it | ||||
contains--and there is no reason to suppose that these urns were | ||||
larger than usual--it would seem to be no more than about 8 or 10 | ||||
feet. | ||||
The construction of the vaults resembles those in the galleries of | ||||
some etruscan tumuli, for instance the Regulini Galeassi tomb at | ||||
Cervetri (lately discovered) and also that of the chamber and | ||||
passages of the pyramid of Cheops and of the treasury of Atreus at | ||||
Mycenae. | ||||
The upper cone displays not only analogies with the monuments | ||||
mentioned in the note, but also with Etruscan tumuli, such as the | ||||
Cocumella tomb at Vulci, and the Regulini Galeassi tomb_[Footnote 1: | ||||
_See_ FERSGUSON, _Handbook of Architecture, I,_ 291.]. _The whole | ||||
scheme is one of the most magnificent in the history of | ||||
Architecture. | ||||
It would be difficult to decide as to whether any monument he had | ||||
seen suggested this idea to Leonardo, but it is worth while to | ||||
enquire, if any monument, or group of monuments of an earlier date | ||||
may be supposed to have done so._[Footnote 2: _There are, in | ||||
Algiers, two Monuments, commonly called_ "Le Madracen" _and_ "Le | ||||
tombeau de la Chretienne," _which somewhat resemble Leonardo's | ||||
design. They are known to have served as the Mausolea of the Kings | ||||
of Mauritania. Pomponius Mela, the geographer of the time of the | ||||
Emperor Claudius, describes them as having been_ "Monumentum commune | ||||
regiae gentis." _See_ Le Madracen, Rapport fait par M. le Grand | ||||
Rabbin AB. CAHEN, Constantine 1873--Memoire sur les fouilles | ||||
executees au Madras'en .. par le Colonel BRUNON, Constantine | ||||
l873.--Deux Mausolees Africains, le Madracen et le tombeau de la | ||||
Chretienne par M. J. DE LAURIERE, Tours l874.--Le tombeau de la | ||||
Chretienne, Mausolee des rois Mauritaniens par M. BERBRUGGER, Alger | ||||
1867.--_I am indebted to M. LE BLANC, of the Institut, and M. LUD, | ||||
LALANNE, Bibliothecaire of the Institut for having first pointed out | ||||
to me the resemblance between these monuments; while M. ANT. HERON | ||||
DE VlLLEFOSSE of the Louvre was kind enough to place the | ||||
abovementioned rare works at my disposal. Leonardo's observations on | ||||
the coast of Africa are given later in this work. The Herodium near | ||||
Bethlehem in Palestine_ (Jebel el Fureidis, _the Frank Mountain) | ||||
was, according to the latest researches, constructed on a very | ||||
similar plan. See_ Der Frankenberg, von Baurath C. SCHICK in | ||||
Jerusalem, Zeitschrift des Deutschen Palastina-Vereins, _Leipzag_ | ||||
1880, _Vol. III, pages_ 88-99 _and Plates IV and V._ J. P. R.] | ||||
_E. Studies for the Central Tower, or Tiburio of Milan Cathedral. | ||||
Towards the end of the fifteenth century the Fabbricceria del Duomo | ||||
had to settle on the choice of a model for the crowning and central | ||||
part of this vast building. We learn from a notice published by G. | ||||
L. Calvi [Footnote: G. L. CALVI, Notizie sulla vita e sulle opere | ||||
dei principali architetti scultori e pittori che fiorirono in | ||||
Milano, Part III, 20. See also: H. DE GEYMULLER, Les projets | ||||
primitifs etc. I, 37 and 116-119.--The Fabbricceria of the Duomo has | ||||
lately begun the publication of the archives, which may possibly | ||||
tell us more about the part taken by Leonardo, than has hitherto | ||||
been known.] that among the artists who presented models in the year | ||||
1488 were: Bramante, Pietro da Gorgonzola, Luca Paperio (Fancelli), | ||||
and Leonardo da Vinci.-- | ||||
Several sketches by Leonardo refer to this important project: | ||||
Pl. XCIX, No. 2 (MS. S. K. III, No. 36a) a small plan of the whole | ||||
edifice.--The projecting chapels in the middle of the transept are | ||||
wanting here. The nave appears to be shortened and seems to be | ||||
approached by an inner "vestibolo".-- | ||||
Pl. C, No. 2 (Tr. 21). Plan of the octagon tower, giving the | ||||
disposition of the buttresses; starting from the eight pillars | ||||
adjoining the four principal piers and intended to support the eight | ||||
angles of the Tiburio. These buttresses correspond exactly with | ||||
those described by Bramante as existing in the model presented by | ||||
Omodeo. [Footnote: Bramante's opinion was first published by G. | ||||
MONGERl, Arch. stor. Lomb. V, fasc. 3 and afterwards by me in the | ||||
publication mentioned in the preceding note.] | ||||
Pl. C, 3 (MS. Tr. 16). Two plans showing different arrangements of | ||||
the buttresses, which seem to be formed partly by the intersection | ||||
of a system of pointed arches such as that seen in ** | ||||
Pl. C, No. 5 (MS. B, 27a) destined to give a broader base to the | ||||
drum. The text underneath is given under No. 788. | ||||
MS. B, 3--three slight sketches of plans in connexion with the | ||||
preceding ones._ | ||||
_Pl. XCIX, No.1 (MS. Tr. 15) contains several small sketches of | ||||
sections and exterior views of the Dome; some of them show | ||||
buttress-walls shaped as inverted arches. Respecting these Leonardo | ||||
notes:_ | ||||
758. | ||||
L'arco rivescio e migliore per fare spalla che l'ordinario, perche | ||||
il rovescio trova sotto se muro resistete alla sua debolezza, e | ||||
l'ordinario no trova nel suo debole se non aria | ||||
The inverted arch is better for giving a shoulder than the ordinary | ||||
one, because the former finds below it a wall resisting its | ||||
weakness, whilst the latter finds in its weak part nothing but air. | ||||
[Footnote: _Three slight sketches of sections on the same | ||||
leaf--above those reproduced here--are more closely connected with | ||||
the large drawing in the centre of Pl. C, No. 4 (M.S, Tr. 41) which | ||||
shows a section of a very elevated dome, with double vaults, | ||||
connected by ribs and buttresses ingeniously disposed, so as to | ||||
bring the weight of the lantern to bear on the base of the dome. | ||||
A sketch underneath it shows a round pillar on which is indicated | ||||
which part of its summit is to bear the weight: "il pilastro sara | ||||
charicho in . a . b." (The column will bear the weight at a b.) | ||||
Another note is above on the right side:_ Larcho regiera tanto sotto | ||||
asse chome di sopra se _(The arch supports as much below it [i. e. a | ||||
hanging weight] as above it). | ||||
Pl. C, No. 1 (C. A. 303a). Larger sketch of half section of the | ||||
Dome, with a very complicated system of arches, and a double vault. | ||||
Each stone is shaped so as to be knit or dovetailed to its | ||||
neighbours. Thus the inside of the Dome cannot be seen from below. | ||||
MS. C. A. 303b. A repetition of the preceding sketch with very | ||||
slight modifications._] | ||||
[Figs. 1. and Fig. 2. two sketeches of the dome] | ||||
MS. Tr. 9 (see Fig. 1 and 2). Section of the Dome with reverted | ||||
buttresses between the windows, above which iron anchors or chains | ||||
seem to be intended. Below is the sketch of the outside._ | ||||
_PI. XCIX, No. 3 (C. A., 262a) four sketches of the exterior of the | ||||
Dome. | ||||
C. A. 12. Section, showing the points of rupture of a gothic vault, | ||||
in evident connection with the sketches described above. | ||||
It deserves to be noticed how easily and apparently without effort, | ||||
Leonardo manages to combine gothic details and structure with the | ||||
more modern shape of the Dome. | ||||
The following notes are on the same leaf,_ oni cosa poderosa, _and_ | ||||
oni cosa poderosa desidera de(scendere); _farther below, several | ||||
multiplications most likely intended to calculate the weight of some | ||||
parts of the Dome, thus 16 x 47 = 720; 720 x 800 = 176000, next to | ||||
which is written:_ peso del pilastro di 9 teste _(weight of the | ||||
pillar 9 diameters high). | ||||
Below:_ 176000 x 8 = 1408000; _and below:_ | ||||
Semjlio e se ce 80 (?) il peso del tiburio _(six millions six | ||||
hundred (?) 80 the weight of the Dome). | ||||
Bossi hazarded the theory that Leonardo might have been the | ||||
architect who built the church of Sta. Maria delle Grazie, but there | ||||
is no evidence to support this, either in documents or in the | ||||
materials supplied by Leonardos manuscripts and drawings. The sketch | ||||
given at the side shows the arrangement of the second and third | ||||
socle on the apses of the choir of that church; and it is remarkable | ||||
that those sketches, in MS. S. K. M. II2, 2a and Ib, occur with the | ||||
passage given in Volume I as No. 665 and 666 referring to the | ||||
composition of the Last Supper in the Refectory of that church._] | ||||
_F. The Project for lifting up the Battistero of Florence and | ||||
setting it on a basement._ | ||||
_Among the very few details Vasari gives as to the architectural | ||||
studies of Leonardo, we read: "And among these models and designs | ||||
there was one by way of which he showed several times to many | ||||
ingenious citizens who then governed Florence, his readiness to lift | ||||
up without ruining it, the church of San Giovanni in Florence (the | ||||
Battistero, opposite the Duomo) in order to place under it the | ||||
missing basement with steps; he supported his assertions with | ||||
reasons so persuasive, that while he spoke the undertaking seemed | ||||
feasable, although every one of his hearers, when he had departed, | ||||
could see by himself the impossibility of so vast an undertaking."_ | ||||
[Footnote: _This latter statement of Vasari's must be considered to | ||||
be exaggerated. I may refer here to some data given by_ LIBRI, | ||||
Histoire des sciences mathematiques en Italie (II, 216, 217): "On a | ||||
cru dans ces derniers temps faire un miracle en mecanique en | ||||
effectuant ce transport, et cependant des l'annee 1455, Gaspard Nadi | ||||
et Aristote de Fioravantio avaient transporte, a une distance | ||||
considerable, la tour de la Magione de Bologne, avec ses fondements, | ||||
qui avait presque quatre-vingts pieds de haut. Le continuateur de la | ||||
chronique de Pugliola dit que le trajet fut de 35 pieds et que | ||||
durant le transport auquel le chroniqueur affirme avoir assiste, il | ||||
arriva un accident grave qui fit pencher de trois pieds la tour | ||||
pendant qu'elle etait suspendue, mais que cet accident fut | ||||
promptement repare (Muratori, Scriptores rer. ital. Tom. XVIII, col. | ||||
717, 718). Alidosi a rapporte une note ou Nadi rend compte de ce | ||||
transport avec une rare simplicite. D'apres cette note, on voit que | ||||
les operations de ce genre n'etaient pas nouvelles. Celle-ci ne | ||||
couta que 150 livres (monnaie d'alors) y compris le cadeau que le | ||||
Legat fit aux deux mecaniciens. Dans la meme annee, Aristote | ||||
redressa le clocher de Cento, qui penchait de plus de cinq pieds | ||||
(Alidosi, instruttione p. 188-- Muratori, Scriptores rer. ital., | ||||
tom. XXIII, col. 888.--Bossii, chronica Mediol., 1492, in-fol. ad | ||||
ann. 1455). On ne concoit pas comment les historiens des beaux-arts | ||||
ont pu negliger de tels hommes." J. P. R.] | ||||
_In the MS. C. A. fol. 293, there are two sketches which possibly | ||||
might have a bearing on this bold enterprise. We find there a plan | ||||
of a circular or polygonal edifice surrounded by semicircular arches | ||||
in an oblique position. These may be taken for the foundation of the | ||||
steps and of the new platform. In the perspective elevation the same | ||||
edifice, forming a polygon, is shown as lifted up and resting on a | ||||
circle of inverted arches which rest on an other circle of arches in | ||||
the ordinary position, but so placed that the inverted arches above | ||||
rest on the spandrels of the lower range._ | ||||
_What seems to confirm the supposition that the lifting up of a | ||||
building is here in question, is the indication of engines for | ||||
winding up, such as jacks, and a rack and wheel. As the lifting | ||||
apparatus represented on this sheet does not seem particularly | ||||
applicable to an undertaking of such magnitude, we may consider it | ||||
to be a first sketch or scheme for the engines to be used._ | ||||
_G. Description of an unknown Temple._ | ||||
759. | ||||
Twelve flights of steps led up to the great temple, which was eight | ||||
hundred braccia in circumference and built on an octagonal plan. At | ||||
the eight corners were eight large plinths, one braccia and a half | ||||
high, and three wide, and six long at the bottom, with an angle in | ||||
the middle; on these were eight great pillars, standing on the | ||||
plinths as a foundation, and twenty four braccia high. And on the | ||||
top of these were eight capitals three braccia long and six wide, | ||||
above which were the architrave frieze and cornice, four braccia and | ||||
a half high, and this was carried on in a straight line from one | ||||
pillar to the next and so, continuing for eight hundred braccia, | ||||
surrounded the whole temple, from pillar to pillar. To support this | ||||
entablature there were ten large columns of the same height as the | ||||
pillars, three braccia thick above their bases which were one | ||||
braccia and a half high. | ||||
The ascent to this temple was by twelve flights of steps, and the | ||||
temple was on the twelfth, of an octagonal form, and at each angle | ||||
rose a large pillar; and between the pillars were placed ten columns | ||||
of the same height as the pillars, rising at once from the pavement | ||||
to a height of twenty eight braccia and a half; and at this height | ||||
the architrave, frieze and cornice were placed which surrounded the | ||||
temple having a length of eight hundred braccia. At the same height, | ||||
and within the temple at the same level, and all round the centre of | ||||
the temple at a distance of 24 braccia farther in, are pillars | ||||
corresponding to the eight pillars in the angles, and columns | ||||
corresponding to those placed in the outer spaces. These rise to the | ||||
same height as the former ones, and over these the continuous | ||||
architrave returns towards the outer row of pillars and columns. | ||||
[Footnote: Either this description is incomplete, or, as seems to me | ||||
highly probable, it refers to some ruin. The enormous dimensions | ||||
forbid our supposing this to be any temple in Italy or Greece. Syria | ||||
was the native land of colossal octagonal buildings, in the early | ||||
centuries A. D. The Temple of Baalbek, and others are even larger | ||||
than that here described. J. P. R.] | ||||
_V. Palace architecture. | ||||
But a small number of Leonardo's drawings refer to the architecture | ||||
of palaces, and our knowledge is small as to what style Leonardo | ||||
might have adopted for such buildings. | ||||
Pl. CII No. 1 (W. XVIII). A small portion of a facade of a palace | ||||
in two stories, somewhat resembling Alberti's Palazzo | ||||
Rucellai.--Compare with this Bramante's painted front of the Casa | ||||
Silvestri, and a painting by Montorfano in San Pietro in Gessate at | ||||
Milan, third chapel on the left hand side and also with Bramante's | ||||
palaces at Rome. The pilasters with arabesques, the rustica between | ||||
them, and the figures over the window may be painted or in | ||||
sgraffito. The original is drawn in red chalk. | ||||
Pl. LXXXI No. 1 (MS. Tr. 42). Sketch of a palace with battlements | ||||
and decorations, most likely graffiti; the details remind us of | ||||
those in the Castello at Vigevano._ [Footnote 1: _Count GIULIO | ||||
PORRO, in his valuable contribution to the_ Archivio Storico | ||||
Lombardo, Anno VIII, Fasc. IV (31 Dec. 1881): Leonardo da Vinci, | ||||
Libro di Annotazioni e Memorie, _refers to this in the following | ||||
note:_ "Alla pag. 41 vi e uno schizzo di volta ed accanto scrisse: | ||||
'il pilastro sara charicho in su 6' e potrebbe darsi che si | ||||
riferisse alla cupola della chiesa delle Grazie tanto piu che a | ||||
pag. 42 vi e un disegno che rassomiglia assai al basamento che oggi | ||||
si vede nella parte esterna del coro di quella chiesa." _This may | ||||
however be doubted. The drawing, here referred to, on page 41 of the | ||||
same manuscript, is reproduced on Pl. C No. 4 and described on page | ||||
61 as being a study for the cupola of the Duomo of Milan._ J. P. R.] | ||||
_MS. Mz. 0", contains a design for a palace or house with a loggia | ||||
in the middle of the first story, over which rises an attic with a | ||||
Pediment reproduced on page 67. The details drawn close by on the | ||||
left seem to indicate an arrangement of coupled columns against the | ||||
wall of a first story. | ||||
Pl. LXXXV No. 14 (MS. S. K. M. Ill 79a) contains a very slight | ||||
sketch in red chalk, which most probably is intended to represent | ||||
the facade of a palace. Inside is the short note 7 he 7 (7 and 7)._ | ||||
_MS. J2 8a (see pages 68 Fig. 1 and 2) contains a view of an unknown | ||||
palace. Its plan is indicated at the side._ | ||||
_In MS. Br. M. 126a(see Fig. 3 on page 68) there is a sketch of a | ||||
house, on which Leonardo notes; casa con tre terrazi (house with | ||||
three terraces)._ | ||||
_Pl. CX, No. 4 (MS. L. 36b) represents the front of a fortified | ||||
building drawn at Cesena in 1502 (see No. 1040)._ | ||||
_Here we may also mention the singular building in the allegorical | ||||
composition represented on Pl. LVIII in Vol. I. In front of it | ||||
appears the head of a sphinx or of a dragon which seems to be | ||||
carrying the palace away._ | ||||
_The following texts refer to the construction of palaces and other | ||||
buildings destined for private use:_ | ||||
760. | ||||
In the courtyard the walls must be half the height of its width, | ||||
that is if the court be 40 braccia, the house must be 20 high as | ||||
regards the walls of the said courtyard; and this courtyard must be | ||||
half as wide as the whole front. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CI, no. 1, and compare the dimensions here given, | ||||
with No. 748 lines 26-29; and the drawing belonging to it Pl. LXXXI, | ||||
no. 2.] | ||||
On the dispositions of a stable. | ||||
761. | ||||
FOR MAKING A CLEAN STABLE. | ||||
The manner in which one must arrange a stable. You must first divide | ||||
its width in 3 parts, its depth matters not; and let these 3 | ||||
divisions be equal and 6 braccia broad for each part and 10 high, | ||||
and the middle part shall be for the use of the stablemasters; the 2 | ||||
side ones for the horses, each of which must be 6 braccia in width | ||||
and 6 in length, and be half a braccio higher at the head than | ||||
behind. Let the manger be at 2 braccia from the ground, to the | ||||
bottom of the rack, 3 braccia, and the top of it 4 braccia. Now, in | ||||
order to attain to what I promise, that is to make this place, | ||||
contrary to the general custom, clean and neat: as to the upper part | ||||
of the stable, i. e. where the hay is, that part must have at its | ||||
outer end a window 6 braccia high and 6 broad, through which by | ||||
simple means the hay is brought up to the loft, as is shown by the | ||||
machine _E_; and let this be erected in a place 6 braccia wide, and | ||||
as long as the stable, as seen at _k p_. The other two parts, which | ||||
are on either side of this, are again divided; those nearest to the | ||||
hay-loft are 4 braccia, _p s_, and only for the use and circulation | ||||
of the servants belonging to the stable; the other two which reach | ||||
to the outer walls are 2 braccia, as seen at _s k_, and these are | ||||
made for the purpose of giving hay to the mangers, by means of | ||||
funnels, narrow at the top and wide over the manger, in order that | ||||
the hay should not choke them. They must be well plastered and clean | ||||
and are represented at 4 _f s_. As to the giving the horses water, | ||||
the troughs must be of stone and above them [cisterns of] water. The | ||||
mangers may be opened as boxes are uncovered by raising the lids. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. LXXVIII, No.1.] | ||||
Decorations for feasts. | ||||
762. | ||||
THE WAY TO CONSTRUCT A FRAME-WORK FOR DECORATING BUILDINGS. | ||||
The way in which the poles ought to be placed for tying bunches of | ||||
juniper on to them. These poles must lie close to the framework of | ||||
the vaulting and tie the bunches on with osier withes, so as to clip | ||||
them even afterwards with shears. | ||||
Let the distance from one circle to another be half a braccia; and | ||||
the juniper [sprigs] must lie top downwards, beginning from below. | ||||
Round this column tie four poles to which willows about as thick as | ||||
a finger must be nailed and then begin from the bottom and work | ||||
upwards with bunches of juniper sprigs, the tops downwards, that is | ||||
upside down. [Footnote: See Pl. CII, No. 3. The words here given as | ||||
the title line, lines 1--4, are the last in the original MS.--Lines | ||||
5--16 are written under fig. 4.] | ||||
763. | ||||
The water should be allowed to fall from the whole circle _a b_. | ||||
[Footnote: Other drawings of fountains are given on Pl. CI (W. XX); | ||||
the original is a pen and ink drawing on blue paper; on Pl. CIII | ||||
(MS. B.) and Pl. LXXXII.] | ||||
_VI. Studies of architectural details._ | ||||
_Several of Leonardo's drawings of architectural details prove that, | ||||
like other great masters of that period, he had devoted his | ||||
attention to the study of the proportion of such details. As every | ||||
organic being in nature has its law of construction and growth, | ||||
these masters endeavoured, each in his way, to discover and prove a | ||||
law of proportion in architecture. The following notes in Leonardo's | ||||
manuscripts refer to this subject._ | ||||
_MS. S. K. M. Ill, 47b (see Fig. 1). A diagram, indicating the rules | ||||
as given by Vitruvius and by Leon Battista Alberti for the | ||||
proportions of the Attic base of a column._ | ||||
_MS. S. K. M. Ill 55a (see Fig. 2). Diagram showing the same rules._ | ||||
764. | ||||
B toro superiore . . . . . toro superiore | ||||
2B nestroli . . . . . . astragali quadre | ||||
3B orbiculo . . . . . . . . troclea | ||||
4B nestroli . . . . . . astragali quadre | ||||
5B toro iferiore . . . . . . toro iferiore | ||||
6B latastro . . . . . . . . plintho | ||||
[Footnote: No explanation can be offered of the meaning of the | ||||
letter B, which precedes each name. It may be meant for _basa_ | ||||
(base). Perhaps it refers to some author on architecture or an | ||||
architect (Bramante?) who employed the designations, thus marked for | ||||
the mouldings. 3. _troclea._ Philander: _Trochlea sive trochalia aut | ||||
rechanum._ 6. _Laterculus_ or _latastrum_ is the Latin name for | ||||
_Plinthus_ (pi lambda Xiv) but Vitruvius adopted this Greek name | ||||
and "latastro" seems to have been little in use. It is to be found | ||||
besides the text given above, as far as I am aware, only two | ||||
drawings of the Uffizi Collection, where in one instance, it | ||||
indicates the _abacus_ of a Doric capital.] | ||||
765. | ||||
STEPS OF URRBINO. | ||||
The plinth must be as broad as the thickness of the wall against | ||||
which the plinth is built. [Footnote: See Pl. CX No. 3. The hasty | ||||
sketch on the right hand side illustrates the unsatisfactory effect | ||||
produced when the plinth is narrower than the wall.] | ||||
766. | ||||
The ancient architects ...... beginning with the Egyptians (?) who, | ||||
as Diodorus Siculus writes, were the first to build and construct | ||||
large cities and castles, public and private buildings of fine form, | ||||
large and well proportioned ..... | ||||
The column, which has its thickness at the third part .... The one | ||||
which would be thinnest in the middle, would break ...; the one | ||||
which is of equal thickness and of equal strength, is better for the | ||||
edifice. The second best as to the usefulness will be the one whose | ||||
greatest thickness is where it joins with the base. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CIII, No. 3, where the sketches belonging to | ||||
lines 10--16 are reproduced, but reversed. The sketch of columns, | ||||
here reproduced by a wood cut, stands in the original close to lines | ||||
5--8.] | ||||
The capital must be formed in this way. Divide its thickness at the | ||||
top into 8; at the foot make it 5/7, and let it be 5/7 high and you | ||||
will have a square; afterwards divide the height into 8 parts as you | ||||
did for the column, and then take 1/8 for the echinus and another | ||||
eighth for the thickness of the abacus on the top of the capital. | ||||
The horns of the abacus of the capital have to project beyond the | ||||
greatest width of the bell 2/7, i. e. sevenths of the top of the | ||||
bell, so 1/7 falls to the projection of each horn. The truncated | ||||
part of the horns must be as broad as it is high. I leave the rest, | ||||
that is the ornaments, to the taste of the sculptors. But to return | ||||
to the columns and in order to prove the reason of their strength or | ||||
weakness according to their shape, I say that when the lines | ||||
starting from the summit of the column and ending at its base and | ||||
their direction and length ..., their distance apart or width may be | ||||
equal; I say that this column ... | ||||
767. | ||||
The cylinder of a body columnar in shape and its two opposite ends | ||||
are two circles enclosed between parallel lines, and through the | ||||
centre of the cylinder is a straight line, ending at the centre of | ||||
these circles, and called by the ancients the axis. | ||||
[Footnote: Leonardo wrote these lines on the margin of a page of the | ||||
Trattato di Francesco di Giorgio, where there are several drawings | ||||
of columns, as well as a head drawn in profile inside an outline | ||||
sketch of a capital.] | ||||
768. | ||||
_a b_ is 1/3 of _n m_; _m o_ is 1/6 of _r o_. The ovolo projects 1/6 | ||||
of _r o_; _s_ 7 1/5 of _r o_, _a b_ is divided into 9 1/2; the | ||||
abacus is 3/9 the ovolo 4/9, the bead-moulding and the fillet 2/9 | ||||
and 1/2. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. LXXXV, No. 16. In the original the drawing and | ||||
writing are both in red chalk.] | ||||
_Pl. LXXXV No. 6 (MS. Ash. II 6b) contains a small sketch of a | ||||
capital with the following note, written in three lines:_ I chorni | ||||
del capitelo deono essere la quarta parte d'uno quadro _(The horns | ||||
of a capital must measure the fourth part of a square)._ | ||||
_MS. S. K. M. III 72b contains two sketches of ornamentations of | ||||
windows._ | ||||
_In MS. C. A. 308a; 938a (see Pl. LXXXII No. 1) there are several | ||||
sketches of columns. One of the two columns on the right is similar | ||||
to those employed by Bramante at the Canonica di S. Ambrogio. The | ||||
same columns appear in the sketch underneath the plan of a castle. | ||||
There they appear coupled, and in two stories one above the other. | ||||
The archivolls which seem to spring out of the columns, are shaped | ||||
like twisted cords, meant perhaps to be twisted branches. The walls | ||||
between the columns seem to be formed out of blocks of wood, the | ||||
pedestals are ornamented with a reticulated pattern. From all this | ||||
we may suppose that Leonardo here had in mind either some festive | ||||
decoration, or perhaps a pavilion for some hunting place or park. | ||||
The sketch of columns marked "35" gives an example of columns shaped | ||||
like candelabra, a form often employed at that time, particularly in | ||||
Milan, and the surrounding districts for instance in the Cortile di | ||||
Casa Castiglione now Silvestre, in the cathedral of Como, at Porta | ||||
della Rana &c._ | ||||
769. | ||||
CONCERNING ARCHITRAVES OF ONE OR SEVERAL PIECES. | ||||
An architrave of several pieces is stronger than that of one single | ||||
piece, if those pieces are placed with their length in the direction | ||||
of the centre of the world. This is proved because stones have their | ||||
grain or fibre generated in the contrary direction i. e. in the | ||||
direction of the opposite horizons of the hemisphere, and this is | ||||
contrary to fibres of the plants which have ... | ||||
[Footnote: The text is incomplete in the original.] | ||||
_The Proportions of the stories of a building are indicated by a | ||||
sketch in MS. S. K. M. II2 11b (see Pl. LXXXV No. 15). The measures | ||||
are written on the left side, as follows: br 1 1/2--6 3/4--br | ||||
1/12--2 br--9 e 1/2--1 1/2--br 5--o 9--o 3 [br=braccia; o=oncie]. | ||||
Pl. LXXXV No. 13 (MS. B. 62a) and Pl. XCIII No. 1. (MS. B. 15a) give | ||||
a few examples of arches supported on piers._ | ||||
_XIII. | ||||
Theoretical writings on Architecture. | ||||
Leonardo's original writings on the theory of Architecture have come | ||||
down to us only in a fragmentary state; still, there seems to be no | ||||
doubt that he himself did not complete them. It would seem that | ||||
Leonardo entertained the idea of writing a large and connected book | ||||
on Architecture; and it is quite evident that the materials we | ||||
possess, which can be proved to have been written at different | ||||
periods, were noted down with a more or less definite aim and | ||||
purpose. They might all be collected under the one title: "Studies | ||||
on the Strength of Materials". Among them the investigations on the | ||||
subject of fissures in walls are particularly thorough, and very | ||||
fully reported; these passages are also especially interesting, | ||||
because Leonardo was certainly the first writer on architecture who | ||||
ever treated the subject at all. Here, as in all other cases | ||||
Leonardo carefully avoids all abstract argument. His data are not | ||||
derived from the principles of algebra, but from the laws of | ||||
mechanics, and his method throughout is strictly experimental. | ||||
Though the conclusions drawn from his investigations may not have | ||||
that precision which we are accustomed to find in Leonardo's | ||||
scientific labours, their interest is not lessened. They prove at | ||||
any rate his deep sagacity and wonderfully clear mind. No one | ||||
perhaps, who has studied these questions since Leonardo, has | ||||
combined with a scientific mind anything like the artistic delicacy | ||||
of perception which gives interest and lucidity to his observations. | ||||
I do not assert that the arrangement here adopted for the passages | ||||
in question is that originally intended by Leonardo; but their | ||||
distribution into five groups was suggested by the titles, or | ||||
headings, which Leonardo himself prefixed to most of these notes. | ||||
Some of the longer sections perhaps should not, to be in strict | ||||
agreement with this division, have been reproduced in their entirety | ||||
in the place where they occur. But the comparatively small amount of | ||||
the materials we possess will render them, even so, sufficiently | ||||
intelligible to the reader; it did not therefore seem necessary or | ||||
desirable to subdivide the passages merely for the sake of strict | ||||
classification._ | ||||
_The small number of chapters given under the fifth class, treating | ||||
on the centre of gravity in roof-beams, bears no proportion to the | ||||
number of drawings and studies which refer to the same subject. Only | ||||
a small selection of these are reproduced in this work since the | ||||
majority have no explanatory text._ | ||||
I. | ||||
ON FISSURES IN WALLS. | ||||
770. | ||||
First write the treatise on the causes of the giving way of walls | ||||
and then, separately, treat of the remedies. | ||||
Parallel fissures constantly occur in buildings which are erected on | ||||
a hill side, when the hill is composed of stratified rocks with an | ||||
oblique stratification, because water and other moisture often | ||||
penetrates these oblique seams carrying in greasy and slippery soil; | ||||
and as the strata are not continuous down to the bottom of the | ||||
valley, the rocks slide in the direction of the slope, and the | ||||
motion does not cease till they have reached the bottom of the | ||||
valley, carrying with them, as though in a boat, that portion of the | ||||
building which is separated by them from the rest. The remedy for | ||||
this is always to build thick piers under the wall which is | ||||
slipping, with arches from one to another, and with a good scarp and | ||||
let the piers have a firm foundation in the strata so that they may | ||||
not break away from them. | ||||
In order to find the solid part of these strata, it is necessary to | ||||
make a shaft at the foot of the wall of great depth through the | ||||